Polycom RealPresence Group Series Administrator Guide

Polycom RealPresence Group Series Administrator Guide
ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
6.0.0 | September 2016 | 3725-63706-010A
Polycom® RealPresence® Group
Series
Copyright© 2016, Polycom, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced, translated into another
language or format, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the
express written permission of Polycom, Inc.
6001 America Center Drive
San Jose, CA 95002
USA
Trademarks Polycom®, the Polycom logo and the names and marks associated with Polycom products are
trademarks and/or service marks of Polycom, Inc. and are registered and/or common law marks in the United States
and various other countries.
All other trademarks are property of their respective owners. No portion hereof may be reproduced or transmitted in any
form or by any means, for any purpose other than the recipient's personal use, without the express written permission
of Polycom.
End User License Agreement By installing, copying, or otherwise using this product, you acknowledge that you
have read, understand and agree to be bound by the terms and conditions of the End User License Agreement for this
product. The EULA for this product is available on the Polycom Support page for the product.
Patent Information The accompanying product may be protected by one or more U.S. and foreign patents and/or
pending patent applications held by Polycom, Inc.
Open Source Software Used in this Product This product may contain open source software. You may receive
the open source software from Polycom up to three (3) years after the distribution date of the applicable product or
software at a charge not greater than the cost to Polycom of shipping or distributing the software to you. To receive
software information, as well as the open source software code used in this product, contact Polycom by email at
OpenSourceVideo@polycom.com.
Disclaimer While Polycom uses reasonable efforts to include accurate and up-to-date information in this document,
Polycom makes no warranties or representations as to its accuracy. Polycom assumes no liability or responsibility for
any typographical or other errors or omissions in the content of this document.
Limitation of Liability Polycom and/or its respective suppliers make no representations about the suitability of the
information contained in this document for any purpose. Information is provided "as is" without warranty of any kind and
is subject to change without notice. The entire risk arising out of its use remains with the recipient. In no event shall
Polycom and/or its respective suppliers be liable for any direct, consequential, incidental, special, punitive or other
damages whatsoever (including without limitation, damages for loss of business profits, business interruption, or loss of
business information), even if Polycom has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
Customer Feedback We are striving to improve our documentation quality and we appreciate your feedback. Email
your opinions and comments to DocumentationFeedback@polycom.com.
Polycom Support Visit the Polycom Support Center for End User License Agreements, software downloads,
product documents, product licenses, troubleshooting tips, service requests, and more.
2
Contents
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Audience, Purpose, and Required Skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Get Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Polycom and Partner Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
The Polycom Community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Getting Started with a Polycom® RealPresence® Group Series System . . . . . . 19
Polycom® RealPresence® Group Series Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
RealPresence Group 300 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
RealPresence Group 310 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
RealPresence Group 500 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
RealPresence Group 700 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Polycom® RealPresence Touch™ Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Polycom® Touch Control™ Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Polycom® VisualBoard™ Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Setting Up System Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Setting Up Your Hardware and Remote Control Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Recharge the Remote Control Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Position the RealPresence Group System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Positioning the Polycom® EagleEyeTM Acoustic Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Positioning the Polycom® EagleEyeTM Director . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Powering the System On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Power On RealPresence Group 300, 310, and 500 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Powering RealPresence Group 700 Systems On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Remote Control Operation on RealPresence Group 700 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Power Button on the Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
RealPresence Group System Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
RealPresence Group 700 Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
EagleEye Acoustic Camera Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
EagleEye Director Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Polycom, Inc.
3
Contents
EagleEye Producer Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Install the System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Installing the System Software Locally or Remotely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Naming Conventions for the System Admin ID and Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Run the Setup Wizard Locally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Run the Setup Wizard From a Remote Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Update Polycom System Software and Apply Software Options . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Preparing to Update a RealPresence Group System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Ensuring System Compatibility with Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Polycom EagleEye Producer and EagleEye Director Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Serial and License Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Create a Serial and License Number File for Multiple Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Software and System Option Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Key File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Available Software Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Obtain Software or System Option Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Create a Single Key File to Update Multiple Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Activate System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
RealPresence Group System Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Dynamic RealPresence Group System Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Configure Your Web Server as the Update Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Updating System Software from a Web Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Manually Update Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Automatically Update Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Update System Software from a USB Storage Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Update System Software from a .tar File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Installing an Older Software Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Determine the Software Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Delete System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Downgrading Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Manage the System Remotely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
System Web Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Access the System Web Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Enable Room and Call Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Remotely Monitor a Room or Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Managing System Profiles on the Web Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Store a Setting Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Polycom, Inc.
4
Contents
Upload a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Send a Message to a System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Set Up and Configure Directory Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Setting Up a Directory Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Configuring a Directory Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Configure the Polycom GDS Directory Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Configure the LDAP Directory Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
SNMP Condition Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Download MIBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Configure SNMP Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Using a Provisioning Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Enable the Provisioning Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Configure the Provisioning Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Disable a Provisioning Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Multitiered Directory Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Polycom® RealPresence® Cloud Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Enable RealPresence Cloud Mode in the System Web Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Configure System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Configuring the RealPresence Group System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Enable PKI Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Set Up the System Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
View System Software Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Activate System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Customize What Users See on the System Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Enable Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Add Speed Dial Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Image File Requirements for Speed Dial Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Upload an Image File for Speed Dial Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Remove Speed Dial Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Calendaring Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Configure the Calendaring Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Change the Background Image on the Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Change the Background Startup Image on the Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Kiosk Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Enable Kiosk Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Home Screen Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Address Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Choose Where to Display Elements on the Address Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Polycom, Inc.
5
Contents
Enable Access to User Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Restrict Access to User and Administrative Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Microsoft Interoperability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Microsoft Directory Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
SIP Settings for Integration with Microsoft Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
RTV and Skype-Hosted Conference Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
AES Encryption for Skype Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
RealConnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
RealConnect Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Skype for Business Client 2015 Content Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
RDP Content Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Microsoft Skype Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Configuring System Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Connecting to the LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
LAN Status Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Configure LAN Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
LLDP and LLDP-MED Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Behavior When LLDP is Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Enable LLDP Using a USB Storage Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Enable LLDP After the Setup Wizard Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
IP Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Configure H.323 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Configure the System to Use a Gatekeeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
SIP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Configure SIP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
SIP Settings for Integration with the Telepresence Interoperability Protocol (TIP) . . . 81
AS-SIP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Enable the AS-SIP Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Configure AS-SIP Settings for MLPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Add an AS-SIP Service Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Delete an AS-SIP Service Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Define AS-SIP Outbound Precedence Call Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Multilevel Precedence and Preemption (MLPP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Define MLPP Network Domains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Add an MLPP Network Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Alternative Network Address Type (ANAT) for RealPresence Group Systems . . . . . 84
Configure Network Quality Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Lost Packet Recovery and Dynamic Bandwidth Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Polycom, Inc.
6
Contents
Configure the Room System for Use with a Firewall or NAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
H.460 NAT Firewall Traversal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Configure the H.460 NAT Firewall Traversal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Basic Firewall/NAT Traversal Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Setting Call Preferences for SVC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Configure Dialing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Enable Automatic Answering of SVC Point-to-Point Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Enable SVC Preference (H.264) for Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Configure Preferred Call Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Monitors and Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Receiving and Displaying Video in High Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Full-Motion HD Video and Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Configuring Monitor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Configure Monitor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Monitor Profiles and Video Layout Panel Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Configure Monitor Profile Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Touch Monitor User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Configure Secondary Monitors for Content in a Multiple Touch Monitor Environment . . . 98
Monitor Resolutions for the RealPresence Group System Model Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Recording Calls with Polycom® RealPresence® Media Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Enable Recording Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Recording Calls Remotely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Enable Recording on a RealPresence Group System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Configure Monitor Settings for Recording on a RealPresence Group 700 System . . . . 102
Maximize HDTV Video Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Sleep Settings Prevent Monitor Burn-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
CEC Monitor Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Enabling Monitors to Support CEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Enable CEC Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Disable CEC Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Polycom Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Polycom EagleEye IV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Polycom EagleEye Acoustic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Polycom® EagleEye™ Producer Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Polycom EagleEye Director . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Connecting Cameras to RealPresence Group Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Powering Cameras with RealPresence Group Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Sleep and Wake States for Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Configuring Camera Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Polycom, Inc.
7
Contents
Configure Camera and Video Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Configure General Camera Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Configuring Video Input Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Configure a Third-Party Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
EagleEye IV Camera Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Enable an Inverted Camera Position for the EagleEye IV Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Enable a Normal Camera Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Setting Up the EagleEye Producer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Updating EagleEye Producer with RealPresence Group Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Change Camera Tracking Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Turn on Camera Tracking for the EagleEye Producer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Turn Off camera Tracking for the EagleEye Producer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Automatically Calibrate the EagleEye Producer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
View System Status for the EagleEye Producer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Configure the Polycom EagleEye Director . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Calibrate the EagleEye Director Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Adjust the Room View of the EagleEye Director . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Enable Camera Tracking with EagleEye Director . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Disable Camera Tracking with EagleEye Director . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
EagleEye Director Camera Tracking in the Local Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Camera Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Configure FECC on a Far-end Site Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Microphones and Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Available Microphone Inputs by System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Audio Input Tips by Microphone Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Polycom RealPresence Group System Table or Ceiling Microphone Arrays . . . . . . 121
Polycom EagleEye Acoustic Microphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Polycom SoundStation IP 7000 Conference Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Audio Input Configuration Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Microphone Inputs for RealPresence Group 300/310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Microphone Inputs for RealPresence Group 500/700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Third-Party Microphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
SoundStructure Digital Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Polycom Microphone Placement to Send Stereo from Your Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Audio Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Speaker Placement to Receive Stereo from Far Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Set the Speaker Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Configure Audio Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Configure Audio Input Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Polycom, Inc.
8
Contents
3.5mm Audio Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Enable 3.5mm Audio Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Enable 3.5mm Audio Input for Content Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Configure Audio Output Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Stereo Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Test StereoSurround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Set Up Third-party Microphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Acoustic Fence Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Configure the Acoustic Fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Content Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Sharing Content During Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Configure Content Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Connect Computers to Polycom RealPresence Group Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Configuring DVD Player Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Configure DVD Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Multipoint Resolution and Frame Rates for People and Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Configure and Install a Polycom Content Display Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Configure Closed Captioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Dial-Up Connection to the System’s RS-232 Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Enter Closed Captions Using Equipment Connected to a Serial RS-232 Port . . . . . . . . 139
Enter Closed Captions on the Web Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Placing and Answering Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Configure Call Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Configure Call Answering Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Enable Flashing Incoming Call Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Multipoint Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Enter a Multipoint Option Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Select a Multipoint Viewing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Configuring and Placing Audio-Only Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Enable Audio-Only Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Disable Audio-Only Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Select the Call Type Order for Audio-Only Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Place an Audio-Only Call from the System Web Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Including Multiple Sites in a Cascaded Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Place a Cascaded Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Managing Directories in the Web Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Searching Directory Contacts to Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Prerequisite for Using the Global Directory Service (GDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Polycom, Inc.
9
Contents
Search for Directory Contacts to Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Manage Favorites Contacts and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Create a Favorites Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Create a Favorites Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Edit a Favorites Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Delete a Favorites Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Importing and Exporting Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Export Favorites Groups and Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Import Favorites Groups and Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Types of Favorites Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Join Scheduled Meetings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Using the Web Interface Place a Call Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Perform a Search for Web Interface Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Place a Call to Favorite Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Place a Call to Speed Dial Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Place a Call to Recent Call Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Configure the Recent Calls List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Security Settings in the Web Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Configure Security Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Managing System Access and External Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Enable External Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Login and Credentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Configure Local Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Configure Remote Access Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Managing User Access to Settings and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Detecting Intrusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Secure API Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Access the API with SSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Local Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Configure Password Policies Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Account Lockout to Prevent Unauthorized System Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
View Connections to Your System in a Sessions List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Enabling a Whitelist for IPv4 and IPv6 Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Enable a Whitelist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Add IP Addresses to a Whitelist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
IPv4 Address Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
IPv6 Address Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Port Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Polycom, Inc.
10
Contents
Configure the Port Lockout Setting to Lock the Login Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Configure Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Configure Encryption Settings for SVC Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Set AES Encryption for SVC Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Configure Encryption Settings for Skype for Business 2015 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Verify H.323 Media Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Visual Security Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Enable Visual Security Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Managing Certificates and Revocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Configure Certificate Validation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Install Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Certificate Signing Requests (CSRs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Create Certificate Signing Requests (CSRs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Certificate Revocation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Configure the Certificate Revocation List (CRL) Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Certificates and Security Profiles within a Provisioned System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Delete Certificates and CRLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
RealPresence Server Address Configuration in PKI-enabled Environments . . . . . . 181
Configure a Security Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Configure a Meeting Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Control and Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Configure Remote Control Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Configuring the Remote Control Channel ID for a Specific System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Confirm a Channel ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Save a Channel ID for a Specific System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Configure a Channel ID for the Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Connecting Control and Accessibility Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Third-Party Touch Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Configure RS-232 Serial Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Polycom® RealPresence® Medialign™ Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Polycom® Concierge Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Add the System Pairing Code to the System Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Check the Polycom Concierge Service Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
SmartPairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
SmartPairing Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Configure SmartPairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
View Remote Sessions on the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Polycom, Inc.
11
Contents
Configure Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Configure System Location Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Configure Room System Language Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Configure System Date and Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Configure Sleep Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Diagnostics, Status, and Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Polycom RealPresence Manageability Instrumentation Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Diagnostics Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Access Diagnostic Screens in the Local Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Access Diagnostics Screens in the Web Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
System Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Audio and Video Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
System Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Configure System Log Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Configure System Log Level and Remote Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Retrieving Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Download System Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Transfer System Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Transfer EagleEye Director Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Call Detail Report (CDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Download a Call Detail Report (CDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Polycom Touch Device Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Required Prerequisites for RealPresence Touch Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Required Prerequisites for Polycom Touch Control Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Dynamic Polycom Touch Device Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Configure Your Web Server as the Update Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Configure Your Web Server as the Update Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Managing Polycom Touch Device Software on Your Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Set a RealPresence Touch Software Version as Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Remove a RealPresence Touch Software Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Set a Polycom Touch Control Software Version as Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Remove a Polycom Touch Control Software Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Update Software from the RealPresence Touch Web Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Update Software from the RealPresence Touch Local Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Updating RealPresence Touch Software from a USB Storage Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Polycom, Inc.
12
Contents
Update the RealPresence Touch With a USB Storage Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Update RealPresence Touch Software from a USB Storage Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Update Polycom Touch Control Software Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Update Polycom Touch Control Software Automatically in the Web Interface . . . . . . . . 214
Update Polycom Touch Control Software Automatically in the Local Interface . . . . . . . 215
Manually Update Polycom Touch Control Software in the Local Interface . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Update Polycom Touch Control Software from a USB Storage Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Troubleshooting for Software Upgrade Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Test the Download URL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Polycom Touch Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Positioning the RealPresence Touch Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Positioning the Polycom Touch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Powering On the Polycom Touch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Polycom Touch Control Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Enable the RealPresence Touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Enable the Polycom Touch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Set Up the RealPresence Touch Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Pairing the RealPresence Touch with a RealPresence Group System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
RealPresence Touch Pairing and Connection States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Pair the RealPresence Touch and a System For the First Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Pair a Previously Paired System to a RealPresence Touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Unpair the RealPresence Touch and a System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Remove a System from the Paired System List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Power Off the RealPresence Touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Wake the RealPresence Touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Remote Management of the RealPresence Touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Open a Remote Management Window for the RealPresence Touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Download Logs Using the RealPresence Touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Pair the RealPresence Touch and a System on the Web Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Use the RealPresence Touch to Unpair a System on the Web Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Change the User Name and Password for the RealPresence Touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Customize the RealPresence Touch Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Choose Icon Buttons to Display on the RealPresence Touch Home Screen . . . . . . . . . 225
Customize the Place a Call Screen Icon Buttons on the RealPresence Touch Device . 225
Change the Home Screen Background Image on the RealPresence Touch . . . . . . . . . 226
Troubleshooting the RealPresence Touch Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
View System Details and Connection Status on the RealPresence Touch . . . . . . . . . . 226
View Call Statistics on the RealPresence Touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Transfer RealPresence Touch Logs to a USB Storage Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Polycom, Inc.
13
Contents
Perform a Factory Restore on the RealPresence Touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Perform a RealPresence Touch Factory Restore Using a USB Storage Device . . . . . . 228
Set Up the Polycom Touch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Pairing States for the Polycom Touch Control Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Pair the Polycom Touch Control and a RealPresence Group System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Unpair the Polycom Touch Control and a RealPresence Group System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Power Off the Polycom Touch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Wake the Polycom Touch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Configuring the Polycom Touch Control Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Configure Polycom Touch Control LAN Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Configure Polycom Touch Control Location and Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Configure Admin ID and Password for the Polycom Touch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Managing the Polycom Touch Control Remotely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Open the Remote Management Window for the Polycom Touch Control . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Troubleshooting on the Polycom Touch Control Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
View Call Statistics for an Active Point-to-Point Call on the Polycom Touch Control . . . 235
View Call Statistics for an Active Multipoint Call on the Polycom Touch Control . . . . . . 235
Transfer Polycom Touch Control Logs to a USB Storage Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
View Polycom Touch Control System Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Factory Restore on the Polycom Touch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Perform a Factory Restore on a Polycom Touch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Perform a Factory Restore on a Polycom Touch Control Using a USB Storage Device
237
VisualBoard Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
VisualBoard Application Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Prerequisites for the VisualBoard Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Touch Monitor Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Enable the VisualBoard Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Prerequisites to Install a Second Monitor for Use with the VisualBoard Application . . . . . . . 240
Install a Second Monitor for Use With the VisualBoard Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Configure Monitor 1 as the Content Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Configure Monitor 2 as the Content Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Polycom® UC Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Configure the Polycom UC Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
General Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Placing a Test Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Viewing System Details on the Local Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Access the Information Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Polycom, Inc.
14
Contents
Access the Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Access the System Diagnostics Screen in the Local Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Audio Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Set Audio Meter Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
View Call Statistics for an Active Point-to-Point Call With the Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . 250
View Call Statistics for an Active Multipoint Call with the Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Power-On Self Test (POST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
System Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Reset a System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Factory Restore on the RealPresence Group System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Perform a Factory Restore of a System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Perform a Factory Restore to Install a Specific Software Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Delete Data and Configuration System Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Perform a Factory Restore on the Polycom EagleEye Director . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Perform a Factory Restore on the EagleEye Producer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Before You Contact Polycom Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Locate the System Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Locate the Software Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Locate Active Alert Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Locate the IP Address and H.323 Extension Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Locate the LAN Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Locate Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Contacting Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Knowledge Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Polycom Solution Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
System Panel Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Polycom RealPresence Group 300 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Polycom RealPresence Group 310 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Polycom RealPresence Group 500 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Polycom RealPresence Group 700 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Port Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Connections to RealPresence Group Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Connections from RealPresence Group Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Security Profile Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Maximum Security Profile Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Change Maximum Security Profile Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Other Restrictions when Using the Maximum Security Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Polycom, Inc.
15
Contents
High Security Profile Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Change High Security Profile Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Medium Security Profile Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Change Medium Security Profile Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Low Security Profile Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Call Speeds and Resolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Point-to-Point Call Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Multipoint Call Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
High-Profile Call Speeds and Resolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Multipoint Resolutions for High Definition Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Resolution and Frame Rates for Content Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Polycom, Inc.
16
Before You Begin
The Polycom RealPresence Group Series Administrator Guide is for administrators who need to install
system software, options, and accessories, and to configure, customize, manage, and troubleshoot
Polycom® RealPresence® Group systems. This guide covers the RealPresence Group 300, RealPresence
Group 310, RealPresence Group 500, RealPresence Group 550, and RealPresence Group 700 systems.
Please read the Polycom RealPresence Group system documentation before you install or operate the
system. The following related documents for RealPresence Group systems are available at
support.polycom.com:
● Polycom RealPresence Group Series Setup Sheet: Describes the contents of your package, how to
assemble the system and accessories, and how to connect the system to the network. The setup
document is included in the system package.
● Polycom RealPresence Group Series Quick Tips: Quick reference on how to use basic features
● Polycom RealPresence Group Series User Guide: Describes how to perform video conferencing
tasks in the local interface
● Polycom RealPresence Group Series Integrator Reference Guide: Provides cable information and
API command descriptions
● Polycom RealPresence Group Series Regulatory Notices: Describes safety and legal considerations
for using Polycom RealPresence Group systems
● Release notes
Polycom recommends that you record the serial number and option key of your RealPresence Group
system here for future reference. The serial number for the system is printed on the unit.
System Serial Number: ____________________________________________
Option Key: ____________________________________________________
Audience, Purpose, and Required Skills
The primary audience for this guide is administrators who need to configure, customize, manage, and
troubleshoot RealPresence Group systems. This guide provides concepts and general guidance to the
system administrator. Polycom expects the administrator to be a mid-grade IT professional who is
experienced in system administration.
Get Help
For more information about installing, configuring, and administering Polycom products, refer to
Documents and Downloads at Polycom Support.
Polycom, Inc.
17
Before You Begin
For support or service, please contact your Polycom distributor or go to Polycom Support at
support.polycom.com.
Polycom and Partner Resources
To find all Polycom partner solutions, see Strategic Global Partner Solutions.
The Polycom Community
The Polycom Community gives you access to the latest developer and support information. Participate in
discussion forums to share ideas and solve problems with your colleagues. To register with the Polycom
Community, simply create a Polycom online account. When logged in, you can access Polycom support
personnel and participate in developer and support forums to find the latest information on hardware,
software, and partner solutions topics.
Polycom, Inc.
18
Getting Started with a Polycom®
RealPresence® Group Series System
The following topics provide an overview of the Polycom video conferencing systems.
● Polycom® RealPresence® Group Series Systems
● Polycom® RealPresence Touch™ Device
● Polycom® Touch Control™ Device
● Polycom® VisualBoard™ Application
Polycom® RealPresence® Group Series Systems
Your RealPresence Group system is a state-of-the-art visual collaboration tool. With crisp, clean video and
crystal-clear sound, RealPresence Group systems provide natural video conferencing interaction using the
most robust video communications technology. To fit your space and functional requirements, several
RealPresence Group systems are available.
For technical specifications and detailed descriptions of features available for RealPresence Group
systems, please refer to the product literature available at www.polycom.com.
RealPresence Group 300 Systems
For smaller meeting rooms, huddle rooms, and offices, the RealPresence Group 300 system delivers
high-quality and easy-to-use video collaboration at an affordable price.
Single-cable connections to the camera and display simplify setup, and sharing content is easy with the
Polycom People+Content™ IP application. Its sleek design allows it to be easily hidden away, or taken
outside the room or building for mobile applications.
RealPresence Group 310 Systems
For conference rooms and other meeting environments, the RealPresence Group 310 system delivers
powerful video collaboration performance in a sleek design that is easy to configure and use.
Polycom, Inc.
19
Getting Started with a Polycom® RealPresence® Group Series System
You can share content using the Polycom People+Content application and a wired HDMI or VGA
connection. Its sleek design allows it to be hidden away, or taken outside the room or building for mobile
applications. This system supports single monitor output; an option key is required to connect a second
monitor. Multipoint conference calls are not supported.
RealPresence Group 500 Systems
For conference rooms and other meeting environments, the RealPresence Group 500 system delivers
powerful video collaboration performance in a sleek design that is easy to configure and use.
Support for dual monitors and the ability to share content make it an ideal fit for most standard-sized meeting
rooms.
Single-cable connections for video and audio simplify setup, while the efficient design enables discreet
placement of the device. Plus, the small design makes it ideal for mobile applications, whether moved to
different locations within a building, or used as part of a mobile video kit.
RealPresence Group 700 Systems
For boardrooms, lecture halls, and other environments where only the best will do, the RealPresence Group
700 system offers extreme video collaboration performance and flexibility.
Powerful video processing and several inputs and outputs make it ideal for rooms with complex
requirements, such as multiple displays, cameras, and content sources. The intuitive interface that comes
standard on all RealPresence Group systems makes it easy for even novice users to control the system and
get the most out of their video collaboration experience with no hassles.
Polycom, Inc.
20
Getting Started with a Polycom® RealPresence® Group Series System
Polycom® RealPresence Touch™ Device
The Polycom® RealPresence Touch™ is a highly-intuitive touch control device that enables you to quickly
initiate video conferences. By allowing participants to focus on their meeting, the device accelerates your
return on investment in telepresence and video solutions while making your organization more productive
and efficient.
After you have paired the RealPresence Touch device to a room system, you can control the room system
using the device’s touch interface.
You can use speed dial for quick access to people, rooms, or virtual meeting rooms. You can also search a
directory to quickly connect to the right person or location. Once in a call, you have easy access to share
content, adjust camera views, and change participant layouts.
The design includes a 10” touch display so you can see everything clearly, while staying compact enough
to be out of sight during your meetings. The background image can be customized to match your branding
or provide information about the room. The home screen buttons and default screens can be selected by
administrators.
Polycom® Touch Control™ Device
The Polycom® Touch Control™ graphical interface solution is an intuitive touch screen device that enables
users to quickly initiate video conferences. The device features a high-resolution display that provides
simplified navigation and menu selection. It allows users to control all aspects of their conference
experience, including finding colleagues, placing calls and sharing content.
Users can connect to one another using a shared address book, on-screen keypad, and calendar entry. For
quick access to room information, the Polycom Touch Control communicates with the RealPresence Group
Polycom, Inc.
21
Getting Started with a Polycom® RealPresence® Group Series System
Series room telepresence solution, which can be integrated with Microsoft Exchange software to provide
complete location detail.
The Polycom Touch Control device uses Power Over Ethernet (PoE) for connectivity. Individual Polycom
Touch Control devices can be paired and dedicated to any network-connected RealPresence Group
system. Polycom Touch Control devices can be deployed in an identical configuration to provide users with
a consistent experience regardless of environment, or devices can be individually tailored to unique
workflows.
Polycom® VisualBoard™ Application
The Polycom® VisualBoard™ application allows you to show and annotate content in real time from
RealPresence Group systems by using an electronic annotation device such as a touch screen monitor. You
can use the monitor as your only content monitor or you can use it in addition to your current content monitor.
When using a touch screen monitor, you can annotate the content using finger, a stylus, or a mouse. When
using a standard monitor, you can use the UC Board device or a mouse to annotate.
Polycom, Inc.
22
Setting Up System Hardware
The following topics provide information on how to set up and configure Polycom video systems and
peripherals:
● Setting Up Your Hardware and Remote Control Device
● Position the RealPresence Group System
● Powering the System On and Off
● Indicator Lights
Setting Up Your Hardware and Remote Control Device
This manual provides information to supplement the setup sheets provided with your RealPresence Group
system and its elective peripherals. A printed copy of the setup sheet is provided with each system. PDF
versions of the setup sheets are available at support.polycom.com.
Recharge the Remote Control Battery
Your system setup sheet shows how to charge the battery in the remote control the first time. When the
remote control battery power is at 10% or less, a notification is displayed on the home screen. The low
battery notification returns after you dismiss other notifications, and is not displayed while the system is in
a call.
To recharge the remote control battery:
1 Pull the battery out of the end of the remote control.
2 Insert the USB plug into any USB 2.0 port, such as the one on your system. The RealPresence
Group 300, RealPresence Group 310, and RealPresence Group 500 systems have two USB 2.0
ports on the back of the systems, while the RealPresence Group 700 system has one USB 2.0 port
on the front.
3 Insert the USB plug into any USB 2.0 port, such as the one on your system.
4 While the battery is charging, the status light is orange. After the status light on the battery turns
green, remove it from the port.
5 Insert the charged battery into the remote control.
Note: Recharging the battery might take anywhere from 20 minutes to several hours.
The following figure illustrates these steps for the RealPresence Group 300, RealPresence Group 310,
RealPresence Group 500, and RealPresence Group 700 systems.
Polycom, Inc.
23
Setting Up System Hardware
Ref.
Number
Description
1
Pull the battery out of the end of the remote control.
2
Insert the USB plug of the battery into a USB 2.0 port.
3
Wait until the status light on the battery turns green.
4
Insert the charged battery into the remote control.
Position the RealPresence Group System
RealPresence Group systems are designed to be placed on tabletops or in equipment racks. If the system
or any accessories are installed in an enclosed space, such as a cabinet, ensure that the air temperature in
the enclosure does not exceed 40°C (104° F). You might need to provide forced cooling to keep the
equipment within the operating temperature range.
Polycom, Inc.
24
Setting Up System Hardware
Caution: Keep ventilation openings free of any obstructions.
To position the system:
1 Do one of the following:
 If you plan to place the system on a table or open shelf, attach the self-adhesive feet to the bottom
of the system.
 If you plan to mount a RealPresence Group 700 system in an equipment rack, install the mounting
brackets, as shown in the following figure.
RealPresence Group 300, 310, and 500 systems use a different type of mounting bracket. For more
information, refer to support.polycom.com or contact your Polycom distributor.
2 Place the system in the desired location, keeping in mind the following pointers:
 Position the system so that the camera does not face toward a window or other source of bright
light.
 Leave enough space to connect the cables easily.
 Place the camera and display together so that people at your site face the camera when they are
looking at the display.
Positioning the Polycom® EagleEyeTM Acoustic Camera
The Polycom® EagleEyeTM Acoustic camera is designed to be placed on top of your monitor, as shown
next.
Positioning the Polycom® EagleEyeTM Director
The Polycom® EagleEye Director is an automatic HD tracking system that works with RealPresence Group
systems. Refer to Polycom EagleEye Director for more information about the automatic camera positioning
system.
Follow these guidelines when you use the EagleEye Director with your RealPresence Group system:
● Avoid setting the Polycom EagleEye Director in the corner of a room. The EagleEye Director should
be at least 12 inches away from all of the walls.
Polycom, Inc.
25
Setting Up System Hardware
● Make sure the EagleEye Director is on a level surface or mounting bracket.
● The camera’s viewing angle is approximately 9 degrees above and 30 degrees below its direct line
of sight, as shown next.
+9º
-30º
● To ensure optimal performance of the Polycom EagleEye Director facial recognition feature, follow
these suggestions:
 Provide ample lighting on faces of participants. This allows the system to correctly frame faces,
using the eyes, noses, and mouths as guidelines.
 Allow only minimal backlighting.
● To ensure the best view from the Polycom EagleEye Director voice-tracking feature, follow these
suggestions:
 Make sure ambient room noise is quiet enough to allow the system to locate the participant who
is speaking.
 Be sure to set up the audio connection from the RealPresence Group system to the EagleEye
Director, whether you connect it directly to the audio output of the RealPresence Group system
or to an audio processor managing the room audio.
 Set the EagleEye Director on top of a monitor. Ideally, place the camera between 5.5 and 7 feet
from the ground.
The following figure shows EagleEye Director placement:
 Ensure that people are sitting within the viewing range of between 3 and 22 feet from the device.
The following figure shows the EagleEye Director viewing range.
Polycom, Inc.
26
Setting Up System Hardware
Powering the System On and Off
After you have connected all of the equipment that you will use with the RealPresence Group system,
connect the power cable and power on the system. Note that Polycom RealPresence Group 300, 310, 500,
and 700 systems do not have what you might think of as a power button—they have a power proximity
sensor. Instead of pressing an actual button that moves, you touch the sensor (or near the sensor) that
indicates power
on the front of the system.
Note: Make sure that the system is powered off before you connect devices to it or before
you unplug the power cable. Do not unplug the power cable when the system is powered
on.
Power On RealPresence Group 300, 310, and 500 Systems
You can use the remote control or the power sensor to power on the RealPresence Group 300, 310, and
500 systems.
To power on the RealPresence Group 300, 310, or 500 system, do one of the following:
● If the system is asleep, press any button on the remote control or pick up the remote control to wake
the system up.
● Press
on the remote control.
For more information about programming the remote control, refer to Configure Remote Control
Behavior.
● Touch the power sensor on the front of the system.
The Polycom screen is displayed within about 10 seconds.
Polycom, Inc.
27
Setting Up System Hardware
Power Off RealPresence Group 300, 310, and 500 Systems
You can use the remote control or the power sensor to power off the RealPresence Group 300, 310, and
500 systems.
To power off the RealPresence Group 300, 310, or 500 system, do one of the following:
● Press and hold
on the remote control.
For more information about programming the remote control, refer to Configure Remote Control
Behavior.
● Touch and hold the power sensor on the front of the system. The indicator light changes color and
blinks, indicating that the system is shutting down. Release the power sensor when the indicator light
changes color.
Powering RealPresence Group 700 Systems On and Off
You can use the remote control or the power sensor to power off the RealPresence Group 700 system. The
RealPresence Group 700 system can be powered on and off with the remote using the same buttons as
shown for the other RealPresence Group systems; however, the RealPresence Group 700 system supports
a low-power standard that limits the power supplied to the camera when the system is powered off. So, if
the EagleEye IV or EagleEye III camera is receiving its power only from the HDCI connector attached to the
system, it will not have an active IR receiver capable of powering on the system using the handheld remote
when in the Power Off state.
If the camera IR is the only exposed IR and you normally power the system on and off with the handheld
remote control, use one of these solutions:
● Provide direct power to the EagleEye III or EagleEye IV camera with the optional EagleEye camera
power supply, 1465-52748-040. This allows the IR sensor to remain in a Power On state, so that the
camera is capable of receiving IR commands from the remote control.
● Position the RealPresence Group system so that the IR receiver on the front of the system has a
line-of- sight to the remote control.
● Use a third-party IR extender to extend the IR signal from the room to the IR receiver on the front of
the RealPresence Group system.
Remote Control Operation on RealPresence Group 700 Systems
The RealPresence Group 700 system can be powered on and off with the remote using the same buttons
as shown for the RealPresence Group 300, 310, and 500 systems; however, the Group 700 system
supports a low-power standard that limits the power supplied to the camera when the system is powered
off. So, if the EagleEye IV or EagleEye III camera is receiving its power only from the HDCI connector
attached to the system, it will not have an active IR receiver capable of powering on the system using the
handheld remote when in the Power Off state.
If the camera IR is the only exposed IR and you normally power the system on and off with the handheld
remote control, use one of these solutions:
● Provide direct power to the EagleEye III or EagleEye IV camera with the optional EagleEye camera
power supply, 1465-52748-040. This allows the IR sensor to remain in a Power On state, so that the
camera is capable of receiving IR commands from the remote control.
● Position the RealPresence Group system so that the IR receiver on the front of the system has a
line-of-sight to the remote control.
Polycom, Inc.
28
Setting Up System Hardware
● Use a third-party IR extender to extend the IR signal from the room to the IR receiver on the front of
the RealPresence Group system.
Power Button on the Remote Control
Use the remote control to power on and off your system, or to put the system to sleep or wake it. You can
program this behavior using the web interface at Admin Settings > System Settings > Remote Control,
Keypad, and Power. For information about remote control programming, refer to Configure Remote Control
Behavior. For details about how to use the remote control, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series
User Guide.
Indicator Lights
Indicator lights and power sensors display when the system or device is powered on.
RealPresence Group System Indicator Lights
The following figure shows the location of the power sensor and indicator light on the front of the Polycom
RealPresence Group 300, 310, and 500 system.
Ref.
Number
Description
1
LED indicator light
2
Power sensor
The following figure identifies the features on the front of the RealPresence Group 700 system.
Polycom, Inc.
29
Setting Up System Hardware
Ref.
Number
Description
1
LED indicator light
2
Power sensor
3
Status display area
4
USB 2.0 port
5
Restore button
Use the USB port for any USB 2.0 device.
Note: If your RealPresence Group 700 system operates with the Maximum Security Profile, the status
display area does not display the software version or IP address.
RealPresence Group 700 Indicator Lights
Brief status and diagnostic messages are displayed in the status display area of the RealPresence Group
700 system. The LED on the front of all RealPresence Group systems provides the following information.
Indicator Light
System Status
Off
System is powered off.
Blinking blue light
In a POST sequence, no errors are occurring and tests are successful. The
system continues to blink blue and initializes after the sequence is complete
if no severe errors occur.
Blinking amber light
In a POST sequence, at least one test has resulted in a warning error. The
system continues to blink amber but initializes after the sequence is
complete if no severe errors occur.
Blinking red light
In a POST sequence, at least one test has resulted in a severe error. The
system continues to blink red and will not start up.
Steady blue light
System is initializing.
System is awake.
Blinking blue light
System received an IR (infrared) signal.
System is receiving a call.
Steady amber light
System is asleep.
Alternating blue and amber lights
System is in software update mode.
System is in factory restore mode.
Fast blinking amber light
System is shutting down.
Steady green light
System is in a call.
Polycom, Inc.
30
Setting Up System Hardware
EagleEye Acoustic Camera Indicator Lights
The following figure shows the location of the LED on the front of the EagleEye Acoustic camera.
Ref.
Number
Description
1
IR Sensor
2
System Status
The system status light provides the following information.
Indicator Light
System Status
Steady blue light
System is on and awake.
Blinking blue light
Camera firmware is being updated.
Steady amber light
System is asleep.
Steady green light
System is in a call.
EagleEye Director Indicator Light
The following figure shows the location of the power indicator light on the back of the EagleEye Director.
This indicator light provides the following information.
Polycom, Inc.
31
Setting Up System Hardware
Indicator Light
Status
Steady green light
Cameras are ready; camera tracking is off
Steady red light
Cameras are powering on
Blinking red light
Factory restore on the cameras is starting
Blinking blue light
Camera tracking is on
EagleEye Producer Indicator Lights
A light-emitting diode (LED) is integrated into the front of the EagleEye Producer device. These LED lights
emit colors that refer to various system states and allow you to identify the current state for the EagleEye
Producer system. Detailed LED and system states mappings are shown in the following table.
LED
System State
Blue
Power On, EagleEye Producer normal state
Blinking Blue
On, not in a call, receive IR
EagleEye Producer boot up
Fast Blinking Blue
Calibrate webcam room view
Amber
Standby - asleep
Alternate Amber and Blue
Software update, Factory restore, USB image update
Blinking Amber
USB disk plugged in
Green
On, In a call
Blinking Green
On, in a call, receive IR in a call
Fast Blinking Red
System error
Blink
Needs attention, receive IR
Polycom, Inc.
32
Install the System Software
The following topic provides information on how to install your system software:
● Installing the System Software Locally or Remotely
Installing the System Software Locally or Remotely
When you power on your system or enter the IP address for the first time, the setup wizard detects the
system’s IP connections and leads you through the minimum configuration steps. The setup wizard is also
called the out-of-box (OOB) wizard. The setup wizard is available during initial setup, after a software update
or system reset with system settings deleted, or after using the restore button.
You can install the system software in either of two ways:
● In the room with the system — Use the remote control to navigate the screens and enter information.
You can use the number pad on the remote control to enter text. Point the remote control at the
camera to control the RealPresence Group system.
● From a remote location — If you know the IP address of the system, you can access and configure
the system by using the system's web interface. For more information about using the web interface,
refer to System Web Interface.
Naming Conventions for the System Admin ID and Password
Polycom recommends that you change the default Admin ID and the default password for your system.
Keep the following tips in mind:
● The string “root” cannot be used as an ID.
● ID and password strings are not case sensitive.
Note: Make sure you can recall the admin password if you set one. If you forget the password, you
must use the restore button to run the setup wizard again to access the Admin Settings and reset the
password.
Polycom, Inc.
33
Install the System Software
Run the Setup Wizard Locally
You must launch and run the setup wizard to begin configuring your system.
To run the setup wizard locally:
» After you power on the system for the first time and the setup wizard launches, navigate the screens
and perform the required steps to configure the system.
The setup wizard allows you to set an Admin ID and password, where you can limit access to the
Admin Settings. The default Admin ID is admin and the default admin password is the 14-digit
system serial number on the Settings > System Information > Information > System Detail screen
in the local interface or on the back of the system.
Run the Setup Wizard From a Remote Location
You can launch and run the setup wizard from a remote location to begin configuring your system on the
web interface. If you know the IP address of the RealPresence Group system, you can access and configure
it using the web interface. For more information about using the web interface, refer to System Web
Interface.
To run the setup wizard from a remote location:
1 Enter the IP address of your system in the web interface.
2 Navigate the screens and perform the required steps to configure the system.
After the RealPresence Group system starts up from the setup wizard (OOB) wizard, you might be
unable to gain access to web interface for up to a minute. This can occur after the IP address displays
on the local interface.
Polycom, Inc.
34
Update Polycom System Software and
Apply Software Options
The following topics provide information on how to update software, and to add system software options for
your Polycom system:
● Preparing to Update a RealPresence Group System
● Ensuring System Compatibility with Peripherals
● Polycom EagleEye Producer and EagleEye Director Software Updates
● Serial and License Numbers
● Software and System Option Keys
● RealPresence Group System Software Updates
● Configure Your Web Server as the Update Site
● Updating System Software from a Web Server
● Update System Software from a USB Storage Device
● Update System Software from a .tar File
● Installing an Older Software Version
Preparing to Update a RealPresence Group System
Polycom recommends that you upgrade your software to the latest available release. You can easily update
your RealPresence Group system software and system options by performing a few tasks outlined here.
Be aware of these points when performing system upgrades:
● If you did not purchase additional system options, you need only to provide a serial number to activate
the software. You do not need an option key.
● If you do not have a support agreement, contact an authorized Polycom dealer to get an upgrade key.
● If you are running a major or minor software version (x.y), you can update to a maintenance version
(x.y.z) without an upgrade key. For example, you do not need a software key to update from version
4.3.0 to 4.3.1 or from 4.1.0 to 4.1.5.
● If you are running a major software version and the software has had a major upgrade, you need a
software update key. For example, you need a key to update from version 4.0.0 to 5.0.0.
● If you are running a major or minor software version and the software has had a minor upgrade within
the same major version (x.y1 to x.y2), you need a software update key to get the new software. For
example, you need a key to update from version 4.2.0 to 4.3.0.
Note: For DoD Unified Capabilities Approved Product List (UC APL) software releases, go to
www.polycom.com/solutions/industry/federal_government/certification_accreditation.html.
Polycom, Inc.
35
Update Polycom System Software and Apply Software Options
Ensure you have the required information ready before you begin installing and activating software updates
or options:
● License numbers and system serial numbers. For more information, refer to Serial and License
Numbers.
● Software or option keys. Obtain these by logging in to support.polycom.com and requesting them
from the Activation/Upgrade link. If you do not have a support agreement, contact an authorized
Polycom dealer to get a key. For more information, refer to Obtain Software or System Option Keys.
RealPresence Group systems perform several internal restarts while running software updates. Each restart
takes about 2 or 3 minutes and improves the reliability of the update process by freeing up memory. If you
are updating a system using a web browser, the internal restart is not visible from the web interface.
You can downgrade software to an earlier version at any time. For more information on downgrading
software, refer to Installing an Older Software Version.
Note: You need an account on support.polycom.com before you begin. Be sure to set up an account
if you don’t already have one.
Ensuring System Compatibility with Peripherals
If your system is used with an EagleEye Producer, EagleEye Director, or a Polycom touch device, such as
a RealPresence Touch or Polycom Touch Control device, you must ensure that the version of the system is
compatible with the peripheral software version.
For additional details on software compatibility, see the release notes for the system version you are going
to use at support.polycom.com.
If you need to update your Polycom system and your RealPresence Touch, or Polycom Touch Control, complete your
updates in this order:
● RealPresence Group system (which includes the Polycom EagleEye Producer and the Polycom®
EagleEye™ Director update)
● RealPresence Touch or Polycom Touch Control device
Polycom EagleEye Producer and EagleEye Director
Software Updates
Updates to EagleEye Producer and EagleEye Director software is included with the RealPresence Group
system software updates. No license number or key is needed to update these peripherals.
To update your EagleEye Producer or EagleEye Director, connect it to the RealPresence Group system
before you run a software update. The software update program detects the device and updates it if
necessary.
Serial and License Numbers
Make a note of your system serial number and license number. You must provide these numbers in order
to get the keys that activate software updates and system options.
Polycom, Inc.
36
Update Polycom System Software and Apply Software Options
● The 14-digit serial number is the unique number that identifies your system. You can find it on the
System Information screen and on a label on the system. Serial numbers are case sensitive.
● The license number is the number that you receive when you purchase a software update or system
option. License numbers have the following format:
Software update license: U1000-0000-0000-0000-0000
System option license: K1000-0000-0000-0000-0000
Create a Serial and License Number File for Multiple Systems
If you have multiple systems, you can save time when your request keys for purchased software updates
or system options from Polycom. To do this, create a text file that has all of the necessary information in it
before you visit the Polycom support site. This saves you the time of entering each serial and license file
number individually on the site. Instead, you can just upload your text file.
To create a serial and license number text file:
1 Create a new file in a text editor.
2 Do one of the following:
 If you do not have a software service plan on all of your systems, enter the license numbers and
serial numbers of your systems in the text file.
 If you do have a software service plan on all of your systems, enter only the serial numbers of the
systems in the text file.
3 Save and close the text file.
Use the following format for text files that contain license numbers and serial numbers:
license number<TAB>system serial number
A text file with software update license numbers and serial numbers might look like this:
U1000-000-000-0000<TAB>82040903F01AB1
U1000-000-000-0000<TAB>82043604G18VR2
A text file with system option license numbers and serial numbers might look like this:
K1000-000-000-5001<TAB>82040903F01AB1
K1000-000-000-5003<TAB>82043604G18VR2
A text file with only serial numbers might look like this:
82040903F01AB1
82043604G18VR2
Software and System Option Keys
To perform a major or minor software update or activate options, obtain a key before you run the software
update. A key is the number that activates software or options on a specific system. A key is valid only on
the system for which it is generated.
There are two types of keys:
● Software keys are valid for the software updates you are installing as well as for any point,
maintenance, or patch releases that may later become available.
● Option keys activate software options and are valid across all software releases.
Polycom, Inc.
37
Update Polycom System Software and Apply Software Options
To obtain these keys, log in to support.polycom.com and request them using the Activation/Upgrade link. If
you do not have a support agreement, contact an authorized Polycom dealer to get a key.
Key File Formats
Most key files use this format:
License Number <TAB>Serial Number<TAB>Key
For example, a text file with update license numbers, serial numbers, and keys might look like this:
U1059-3131-6042-3609<TAB>8213190FFAE7D5<TAB>UBA5-1D6E-EB00-0000-0192
The following example shows a software update key file:
U1000-0000-0000-0000-0003<TAB>82041003E070B0<TAB>U8FB-0D4E-6E30-0000-0009
U1000-0000-0000-0000-0004<TAB>820327024193AK<TAB>U982-4507-5D80-0000-0009
The following example shows an option key file:
K1000-0000-0000-0000-0001<TAB>82041003F082B1<TAB>K15B-DC2D-E120-0000-0009
K1000-0000-0000-0000-0002<TAB>82041503E093B0<TAB>K27E-30F9-2D20-0000-0009
Systems covered by a software service agreement use a slightly different key file format. The following is
an example of a software update key file for such a system:
U<TAB>82041003F082B1<TAB>U7B6-698E-1640-0000-02C1
U<TAB>82041503E093B0<TAB>UCC1-C9A6-FE60-0000-02C1
U<TAB>82041003E070B0<TAB>UEC6-FDA0-8F00-0000-02C1
U<TAB>820327024193AK<TAB>U7B7-D6BD-3610-0000-02C1
Available Software Options
The following system options are available for your RealPresence Group system. Activated system options
have checkmarks next to them. Some options are not available for certain systems. For example,
RealPresence Group 300 and 310 systems do not support Multipoint Video Conferencing.
● Multipoint Video Conferencing: This option enables your system to make video calls to more than
one site at a time. It is available for RealPresence Group 500 and RealPresence Group 700 systems.
For more information, refer to Multipoint Calling.
● Telepresence Interoperability Protocol (TIP): This option improves the interoperability of systems
in environments with certain Cisco telepresence systems. For more information, refer to RTV and
Skype-Hosted Conference Support.
● Skype for Business Interoperability License: This option enhances the video experience by
enabling the following Microsoft features for all RealPresence Group systems:
 Real-time video (RTV) provides higher resolutions during video calls when integrated with
Skype for Business Server 2015.
 The Microsoft version of H.264 SVC delivers a continuous presence style experience.
 Simulcast H.264 streams are now supported, allowing RealPresence Group systems in
SVC-enabled Skype calls to transmit multiple streams of the local video depending upon the
capabilities of the far-end systems. For example, far-end systems displaying high resolution
images receive high resolution images from the RealPresence Group, while simultaneously
far-end systems displaying low resolution images receive low resolution images from the
system.
 Centralized Conferencing Control Protocol (CCCP) enables seamless participation in
multipoint video conferences hosted on Skype's audio/video server.
Polycom, Inc.
38
Update Polycom System Software and Apply Software Options
 The Skype AVMCU Spotlight feature enables the system to display only the broadcaster’s
video when a participant is made the broadcaster in a call.
 RealPresence Group systems support Forward Error Correction (FEC) DV0 and DV1 in Skype
for Business Server 2015 and Skype for Business 2015 client environments for both H.264
SVC and RTV endpoints. The scheme introduces recovery packets on the transmitter which
recover lost video packets on the receiver. Enabling or disabling the Lost Packet Recovery
feature in the web interface does not affect the negotiation of FEC.
 IPv6 is supported in Skype for Business Server 2015 and Skype for Business 2015 client
environments with IPv6 networks.
● Advanced Video 1080p: This option makes 1080p video and content available to room systems.
For information about integrating with Skype for Business Server 2015, refer to the Polycom Unified
Communications Deployment Guide for Microsoft Environments at support.polycom.com.
Obtain Software or System Option Keys
You can obtain software or option keys for a single system or for multiple systems. If you do not have a
support agreement, contact an authorized Polycom dealer to get a key.
To obtain software or option keys:
1 Open a browser and navigate to support.polycom.com.
2 Under Licensing & Product Registration, click Activation/Upgrade.
3 Log in to your account.
4 Do one of the following:
 To update one system, click Site & Single Activation/Upgrade. Follow the onscreen instructions
to enter your system license number and serial number.
 To update multiple systems that are covered by a software service agreement, click Batch
Upgrade and then select your product. Follow the onscreen instructions to upload the text file that
contains your system license numbers and serial numbers, or serial numbers only.
 To update multiple systems not covered by a software service agreement, click Batch Activation.
Follow the onscreen instructions to upload the text file that contains your system license numbers
and serial numbers, or serial numbers only.
Polycom sends a text file containing the requested keys for each system.
Create a Single Key File to Update Multiple Systems
After you receive your key files from Polycom, you can create a single key file to upgrade multiple systems.
To create a single key file to upgrade multiple systems:
1 Open the key files with a text editor, such as Notepad.
2 Copy the contents of one file to the end of the other file. Repeat, as necessary.
3 Save the combined file with the name sw_keys.txt.
You now have a single text file that contains all of your keys for software updates. Use the keys in the
file to upgrade the applicable systems.
Polycom, Inc.
39
Update Polycom System Software and Apply Software Options
Activate System Options
To activate certain features on your room system, you must use the system’s web interface. Some of the
features of a RealPresence Group system are optional. If you want to activate your system options without
upgrading your software, you do not need to download software or run the software update. The only thing
you need is your system option key. For more information about software and option keys, refer to Software
and System Option Keys.
To activate system options:
1 Open a supported browser and go to the system’s web interface.
2 Navigate to Admin Settings > General Settings > Options.
3 Enter the option key and click Save.
RealPresence Group System Software Updates
You can configure your system to get software updates using any of the following methods:
● A Polycom® RealPresence® Resource Manager system
● A server on your network
● The online software server hosted by Polycom
● Distribution files uploaded from your computer using a web interface to access the system
● A USB 2.0 storage device that you connect to the system
Note: If you use your system within a Department of Defense (DoD) environment, contact your
Information Assurance Office (IAO) for approval before using a USB device with your system.
For additional details on RealPresence Group hardware and software compatibility, see the product release
notes available at support.polycom.com.
Dynamic RealPresence Group System Software Updates
You can use a Polycom RealPresence Resource Manager system to update multiple endpoint systems after
you complete the steps in the following topics:
Serial and License Numbers
Software and System Option Keys
For more information about updating system software in dynamic mode, setting an automatic software
update policy, and testing a trial version software update package, refer to the Polycom RealPresence
Resource Manager System Operations Guide available at support.polycom.com.
Configure Your Web Server as the Update Site
You can post system software to your web server and then configure the system to get updates from that
location.
Polycom, Inc.
40
Update Polycom System Software and Apply Software Options
To set up your web server as the update site:
1 Make sure that your server allows clients to download files with the following extensions:
 .plcm
 .txt
 .sig
2 Define a URL on your server that the system can use for software updates, and create a
corresponding root directory to it.
3 Using a browser, navigate to support.polycom.com.
4 Under Documents and Downloads, select Telepresence and Video.
5 Navigate to the page that has the update for your system.
6 Save and extract a software package (.tar) file from the Polycom website to the root directory of the
your web server.
7 If you are updating to a major or minor release, obtain a software update key (.txt) file from the
Polycom website. Save the file as sw_keys.txt and place it in rseries/platform/ on your
web server.
Updating System Software from a Web Server
You can manually or automatically install software updates from the Polycom web server or from your own
web server.
For a list of supported browsers, refer to the appropriate version of the Polycom RealPresence Group Series
Release Notes.
Manually Update Software
You can manually install software updates from the Polycom server or your own web server.
To manually install software updates:
1 Open a supported browser, and configure it to allow cookies.
2 In the browser address line, enter the IP address of the RealPresence Group system using the
format http://IPaddress (for example, http://10.11.12.13).
3 In the system web interface, select Admin Settings.
If necessary, enter the Admin ID as the user name (default is admin), and then enter the Admin
remote access password, if one is set.
The first time you open the web interface each day, you might need to enter a user name and
password after you select any of the interface options.
4 Go to General Settings > Software Updates.
5 Under Software Server in the Server Address field, enter the path and address of the update site
where you posted the system software (for example, http://10.11.12.100/rpsystem_repo). To
use the Polycom server, enter polycom.
6 Click Check for Software Updates to have the system detect updates. The system contacts the
designated server to find available updates.
Polycom, Inc.
41
Update Polycom System Software and Apply Software Options
7 If the system indicates an update is available, click Start Update to install it.
8 When the Export Restrictions notice appears, click Accept Agreement. Follow the on-screen
instructions to complete the update.
Automatically Update Software
You can automatically install software updates from the Polycom server or your own web server.
To automatically install software updates:
1 Open a supported browser and configure it to allow cookies.
2 Next, enter the IP address of the RealPresence Group system using the format http://IPaddress
(for example, http://10.11.12.13).
3 In the system web interface, select Admin Settings.
If necessary, enter the Admin ID as the user name (default is admin), and then enter the Admin remote
access password, if one is set.
The first time you open the web interface each day, you might need to enter a user name and
password after you select any of the interface options.
4 Go to General Settings > Software Updates.
5 Under Software Server in the Server Address field, enter the path and address of the update site
where you posted the system software (for example, http://10.11.12.100/rpsystem_repo). To use
the Polycom server, enter polycom.
6 Under Automatic Software Updates, select Automatically Check for and Apply Software
Updates.
7 When the Export Restrictions notice appears, click Accept Agreement.
8 Specify the automatic update options:
a Set the Hour, Minute, and AM/PM to specify the beginning of the time window within which the
system checks for updates.
b From the Duration list, select the length of the time within which the system can check for
updates.
c After the Start Time and Duration settings are configured, the system calculates a random time
within the defined update window at which to check for updates. It then checks for updates at this
time on a daily basis as long as the Start Time and Duration values do not change. If the Start
Time or Duration values change, a new random time within the new time window is calculated.
9 Click Save.
For information about the latest software version, including version dependencies, refer to the release notes
for your system.
You can also have your system automatically check for and apply software updates.
Note: If your organization uses a management system for provisioning endpoints, your
system might get software updates automatically.
Polycom, Inc.
42
Update Polycom System Software and Apply Software Options
Update System Software from a USB Storage Device
You can use a USB storage device to update one or multiple RealPresence Group systems. A setup wizard
guides you through the simple process. The setup wizard is available during initial setup, after a system
reset with system settings deleted, or after using the factory restore button.
If the system is paired with a Polycom touch device, you cannot use the touch device USB port to update the system
software. If you use your system within a DoD environment, be sure to contact your Information Assurance Office (IAO)
for approval before using a USB device with your system.
To update system software using a USB device:
1 If you are updating to a major or minor release (x.y), obtain keys (.txt) for each system that you want
to update from the Polycom website. Save the text file as sw_keys.txt and place it in the root
directory of the USB storage device.
2 Open a browser and navigate to support.polycom.com.
3 Under Documents and Downloads, select Telepresence and Video.
4 Navigate to the page that has the desired update for the RealPresence Group system or systems.
5 Save a software package (.tar) file from the Polycom website to the root directory of a USB storage
device.
6 Connect the USB storage device to the USB port on the back of the system. The system detects the
USB storage device and prompts you to confirm that you want to update the software.
7 Click OK. Follow the setup wizard instructions to complete the update.
Update System Software from a .tar File
You can manually install system software from a .tar file.
To manually install software by uploading a .tar file in the web interface:
1 Open a supported browser.
2 Configure the browser to allow cookies.
3 In the browser address line, enter the IP address of the RealPresence Group system using the
format http://IPaddress (for example, http://10.11.12.13).
4 In the system web interface, select Admin Settings.
If necessary, enter the Admin ID as the user name (default is admin), and then enter the Admin
remote access password, if one is set.
The first time you open the web interface each day, you might need to enter a user name and
password after you select any of the interface options.
5 Go to General Settings > Software Updates > Manual Software Updates > Browse.
6 Select a .tar software file to upload and click Open.
7 Select Start Transfer.
8 After the .tar file transfers to the system, select Start Update.
9 Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the update.
Polycom, Inc.
43
Update Polycom System Software and Apply Software Options
Installing an Older Software Version
When your RealPresence Group system is provisioned with a provisioning server, such as Polycom
RealPresence Resource Manager, the system automatically detects software on the provisioning sever and
downgrades to the software version on the provisioning server.
If your system is not provisioned, you can put the software package on a USB device to downgrade the
system to an earlier version. For information on using a USB device for loading system software, refer to
Update System Software from a USB Storage Device.
Determine the Software Version
Before you downgrade system software, Polycom recommends that you check the current system software
version you are running.
To determine the software version you are running:
» In the local interface go to Settings > System Information > Information > System Detail or click
the System link in the web interface.
Delete System Settings
When you want to reinstall an older version of software with a USB device after upgrading to a later version,
Polycom recommends first deleting your system settings.
To delete your system settings:
» In the local interface, go to Settings > System Information > Diagnostics > Reset System and
select Delete System Settings.
Downgrading Tips
Polycom recommends you review the following tips before downgrading your RealPresence Group system
software:
● When you use your system within a DoD environment, be sure to contact your Information Assurance
Office (IAO) for approval before using a USB device with your system.
● Before downgrading, use the release notes to verify the interoperability of the camera, peripheral,
hardware, and software versions you plan to install.
● When you downgrade the RealPresence Group system software, the Polycom EagleEye Producer
and the Polycom EagleEye Director are automatically downgraded to a compatible version.
● When you downgrade the system software, the Polycom RealPresence Touch software is
automatically downloaded to a compatible version after being paired. However, the RealPresence
Touch platform version 2.0 might not automatically downgrade to version 1.0. In this case, to
manually downgrade from version 2.0 to 1.0, you must use a USB storage device or initiate a
downgrade from a server repository that includes version 1.0.
● You must downgrade Polycom Touch Control software with a USB storage device.
Polycom, Inc.
44
Update Polycom System Software and Apply Software Options
● Because of changes in software functionality and the user interface, some settings might be lost
when you upgrade or downgrade. Polycom recommends that you store your system settings using
profiles and download your system directory before updating your system software. Do not manually
edit locally saved profile and directory files.
Polycom, Inc.
45
Manage the System Remotely
You can configure, manage, and monitor Polycom systems from a computer using the system web
interface. You can also use RealPresence Resource Manager, SNMP, or the API commands.
● The system web interface requires only a web browser.
● RealPresence Resource Manager requires the management application to be installed on your
network.
● SNMP requires network management software on your network management station.
For more information about the API commands, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Integrator
Reference Guide.
See the following topics for remote management details:
● System Web Interface
● Set Up and Configure Directory Servers
System Web Interface
You can use the system web interface to perform most of the calling and configuration tasks you can perform
on the local system. The system web interface supports the most commonly used web browsers. For a list
of supported browsers, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Release Notes at
support.polycom.com.
To configure your browser to use the web interface, you must do the following:
● Use a supported web browser.
● Configure your browser to allow cookies.
Access the System Web Interface
To access your system’s web interface, you must open a web browser and enter the system’s IP address.
To access the system using the web interface:
1 In your web browser address line, enter the system’s IP address, for example,
http://10.11.12.13.
2 Enter the Admin ID as the user name (default is admin).
3 Enter the Admin Remote Access Password, if one is set.
Polycom, Inc.
46
Manage the System Remotely
Enable Room and Call Monitoring
Before you can use room and call monitoring, you must enable the feature in the local interface.
To enable room and call monitoring:
1 In the local interface, go to
> Settings > Administration > Security > Remote Access.
2 To allow the room or call to be viewed remotely, enable Allow Video Display on Web.
Remotely Monitor a Room or Call
The monitoring feature in the web interface allows system administrator to view a call or the room where the
system is installed.
To remotely monitor a room or call:
1 In the web interface, go to Utilities > Tools > Remote Monitoring.
2 You can perform the following tasks out of a call:
 Wake the system
 Show content
 Adjust the near camera
 Adjust system volume
 View camera presets
3 You can perform these additional tasks in a call:
 Change camera sources
 Adjust the far camera
 End a call
Managing System Profiles on the Web Interface
Administrators who manage systems that support multiple applications can use profiles to change system
settings. You can store a system profile on a computer as a .profile file using the web interface. The
number of profiles you can save is unlimited.
The following settings are included in a profile:
● Home screen settings
● User access levels
● Icon selections
● Option keys
● System behaviors
Passwords are not included when you store a profile.
Note: Polycom recommends only using profiles as a way to back up system settings. Attempting to
edit a stored profile or upload a stored profile from one system to a different system can result in
instability or unexpected results.
Polycom, Inc.
47
Manage the System Remotely
Store a Setting Profile
You can store the current setting profile on your computer.
To store a profile:
1 In the web interface, go to Utilities > Services > Profile Center.
2 Click Download next to Current Settings Profile to download the profile file from the system.
3 Save the file to a location on your computer.
Upload a Profile
You can upload a setting profile from your computer.
To upload a profile:
1 Reset the system to restore default settings.
2 In your web browser address line, enter the system’s IP address.
3 In the web interface, go to Utilities > Services > Profile Center.
4 Next to Upload Settings Profile, click Browse and browse to the location of the profile .csv file on
your computer.
5 Click Open to upload the .csv file to your system.
Send a Message to a System
If you are experiencing difficulties with connectivity or audio, you might want to send a message to the
system that you are managing. Only the near-end site can see the message; it is not broadcast to all the
sites in the call.
To send a message to a system:
1 In the web interface, go to Utilities > Send a Message.
2 On the Send a Message screen, enter a message (up to 100 characters in length), then click Send.
The message is displayed for 15 seconds on the screen of the system that you are managing.
Set Up and Configure Directory Servers
To allow your users to search the directory servers to add contacts, you must set up and configure the
directory servers in the RealPresence Group system web interface at Admin Settings > Servers >
Directory Servers.
Setting Up a Directory Server
The global directory provides a list of other systems that are registered with the Global Directory Server and
available for calls. The other systems appear in the directory, allowing users to place calls to other users by
selecting their names.
Polycom, Inc.
48
Manage the System Remotely
You can also use the RealPresence Touch device to set up directory servers. In the RealPresence Touch
web interface, go to Admin Settings > Servers > Directory Servers. The following topics for system setup
also apply to the RealPresence Touch.
Configuring a Directory Server
You can configure the system to use one of the following directory servers in standard operating mode.
Directory Servers
Supported
Authentication
Protocols
Global Directory
Groups
Microsoft
Skype for Business
Server 2015
NTLM v2 only
Contact groups but
not distribution
lists
Might include:
• SIP address (SIP URI)
LDAP
with H.350 or Active
Directory
Any of the
following:
• NTLM v2
only
• Basic
• Anonymous
Not Supported
Might include:
• H.323 IP address (raw IPv4 address, DNS
name, H.323 dialed digits, H.323 ID, or
H.323 extension)
• SIP address (SIP URI)
• ISDN number
• Phone number*
Polycom GDS
Proprietary
Not Supported
Might include:
• H.323 IP address (raw IPv4 address, DNS
name, or H.323 extension)
• ISDN number
Entry Calling Information
* To successfully call a phone number from the LDAP directory, the phone number must be stored in one of the
following formats:
• +Country Code.Area Code.Number
• +Country Code.(National Direct Dial Prefix).Area Code.Number
You can configure the system to use the following directory server when the system is automatically
provisioned by a RealPresence Resource Manager system.
Directory Servers
Supported
Authentication
Protocol
Global Directory
Groups
Entry Calling Information
Skype for Business
Server 2015
NTLM v2 only
Contact groups but not
distribution lists
Might include:
• SIP address (SIP URI)
* To successfully call a phone number from the LDAP directory, the phone number must be stored in one of the
following formats:
• +Country Code.Area Code.Number
• +Country Code.(National Direct Dial Prefix).Area Code.Number
For Microsoft configuration information, refer to Microsoft Directory Servers.
Configure the Polycom GDS Directory Server
You can configure the Polycom GDS Directory Sever in standard operating mode.
Polycom, Inc.
49
Manage the System Remotely
To configure the Polycom GDS directory server:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Servers > Directory Servers and select the Polycom
GDS Service Type.
2 Configure these settings on the Directory Servers screen.
Setting
Description
Server Address
Specifies the IP address or DNS address of the Global Directory Server. You can enter up to
five addresses.
Password
Lets you enter the global directory password, if one exists.
Configure the LDAP Directory Server
You can configure the LDAP Directory Server in standard operating mode.
To configure the LDAP directory server:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Servers > Directory Servers and select the LDAP
Server Type.
2 Configure these settings on the Directory Servers screen.
LDAP Setting
Description
Server Address
Specifies the address of the LDAP directory server. With Automatic Provisioning, this setting
is configured by the server and appears as read only.
Server Port
Specifies the port used to connect to the LDAP server. With Automatic Provisioning, this
setting is configured by the server and appears as read only.
Base DN
(Distinguished
Name)
Specifies the top level of the LDAP directory where searches will begin. With Automatic
Provisioning, this setting is configured by the server and appears as read only.
Multitiered
Directory
Default Group
DN
Specifies the top level group of the LDAP directory required to access the hierarchical
structure. With Automatic Provisioning, this setting is configured by the server and appears as
read only.
Authentication
Type
Specifies the protocol used for authentication with the LDAP server: NTLM, BASIC, or
Anonymous.
Use SSL
(Secure Socket
Layer)
Enables SSL for securing data flow to and from the LDAP server.
Domain Name
Specifies the domain name for authentication with the LDAP server.
User Name
Specifies the user name for authentication with LDAP server.
Password
Specifies the password for authentication with the LDAP server.
Polycom, Inc.
50
Manage the System Remotely
SNMP Condition Reports
RealPresence Group systems support SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) versions 1, 2c,
and 3. A system sends SNMP reports to indicate conditions, including the following:
● All alert conditions found on the system alert screen
● Details of jitter, latency, and packet loss
● Low battery power is detected in the remote control
● A system powers on
● Administrator logon is successful or unsuccessful
● A call fails for a reason other than a busy line
● A user requests help
● A telephone or video call connects or disconnects
SNMP features specific to version 3 include the following:
● Allows for secured connectivity between the console and the SNMP agent
● Supports both IPv4 and IPv6 networks
● Logs all configuration change events
● Supports a user-based security model
● Supports trap destination addresses
Download MIBs
To allow your SNMP management console application to resolve SNMP traps and display human readable
text descriptions for those traps, you need to install Polycom MIBs (Management Information Base) on the
computer you intend to use as your network management station. The MIBs are available for download from
the system web interface.
To download a Polycom MIB:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Servers > SNMP.
2 Click the desired link:
 Download Legacy MIB
 Download MIB
Configure SNMP Management
You can configure SNMP Management to give system administrators access to manage the system
remotely.
To configure the system for SNMP Management:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Servers > SNMP.
2 Configure these settings on the SNMP screen, then click Save.
Polycom, Inc.
51
Manage the System Remotely
Setting
Description
Enable SNMP
Allows administrators to manage the system remotely using SNMP.
Enable Legacy
Notifications
Supports sending notifications that are compatible with the legacy MIB.
Enable New
Notifications
Supports sending notifications that are compatible with the new MIB.
Version1
Enables the use of the SNMPv1 protocol.
Version2c
Enables the use of the SNMPv2c protocol.
Version3
Enables the use of the SNMPv3 protocol.
You must select this setting to use the subsequent settings that apply only to SNMPv3.
Read-Only
Community
Specifies the SNMP management community in which you want to enable this system. The
default community is public.
Note: Polycom does not support SNMP write operations for configuration and provisioning;
the read-only community string is used for both read operations and outgoing SNMP traps.
Contact Name
Specifies the name of the person responsible for remote management of this system.
Location Name
Specifies the location of the system.
System Description
Specifies the type of video conferencing device.
User Name
Specifies the SNMPv3 User Security Model (USM) account name that will be used for
SNMPv3 message transactions. The maximum length is 64 characters.
Authentication
Algorithm
Specifies the type of SNMPv3 authentication algorithm used:
• SHA
• MD5
Authentication
Password
Specifies the SNMPv3 authentication password. The maximum length is 48 characters.
Privacy Algorithm
Specifies the type of SNMPv3 cryptography privacy algorithm used:
• CFB-AES128
• CBC-DES
Privacy Password
Specifies the SNMPv3 privacy (encryption) password. The maximum length is 48
characters.
Engine ID
Specifies the unique ID of the SNMPv3 engine. This setting might be needed for matching
the configuration of an SNMP console application. The Engine ID is automatically
generated, but you can create your own ID, as long as it’s between 10 and 32 hexadecimal
digits. Each group of 2 hex digits can be separated by a colon character (:) to form a full
8-bit value. A single hex digit delimited on each side with a colon is equivalent to the same
hex digit with a leading zero (therefore, :F: is equivalent to :0f:).
The ID cannot be all zeros or all Fs.
Listening Port
Specifies the port number SNMP uses to listen for messages. The default listening port is
161.
Polycom, Inc.
52
Manage the System Remotely
Setting
Description
Transport Protocol
Specifies the transport protocol used:
• TCP
• UDP
Destination
Address1
Destination
Address2
Destination
Address3
Specifies the IP addresses of the computers you intend to use as your network
management station and to which SNMP traps will be sent.
Each address row has four settings:
1 IP Address (accepts IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, host names, and FQDNs)
2 Message Type (Trap, Inform)
3 SNMP protocol version (v1, v2c, v3)
4 Port (the default is 162)
Disabling the checkbox next to the Port setting disables the corresponding Destination
Address.
Using a Provisioning Service
If your organization uses a RealPresence Resource Manager (RPRM) system or a BroadSoft BroadWorks®
Device Management System (DMS) system, you can manage systems in dynamic management mode. In
dynamic management mode, the following might be true:
● Polycom systems are registered to a standards-based presence service, so presence states are
shared with Contacts.
● Polycom systems have access to a corporate directory that supports LDAP access.
 The Domain, User Name, Password, and Server Address fields are populated on the Provisioning
Service screen.
 Configuration settings that are provisioned, or that are dependent on provisioned values, are
read-only on the system.
 The system checks for new software from the provisioning service every time it restarts and at an
interval set by the service. It automatically accesses and runs any software updates made
available by the service.
 A provisioning service system administrator can upload a provisioned bundle from an already
configured system. When systems request provisioning, the provisioned bundle and any
automatic settings are downloaded. A system user with administrative rights can change the
settings on the system after the provisioned bundle is applied. If you later download a new
provisioned bundle from the provisioning service, the new bundle overwrites the manual settings.
● If the system has previously registered successfully with a provisioning service but fails to detect the
service when it restarts or checks for updates, an alert appears on the System Status screen. If the
system loses registration with the provisioning service, it continues operating with the most recent
configuration that it received from the provisioning service.
● If a Polycom Touch Control is connected to a provisioned RealPresence Group system, a
RealPresence Resource Manager system can receive status updates from the Polycom Touch
Control and can provide software updates to the Polycom Touch Control. For supported
RealPresence Resource Manager versions, go to
http://support.polycom.com/PolycomService/support/us/support/service_policies.html and click the
Current Interoperability Matrix link.
If you use BroadSoft DMS provisioning, note the following points:
● Bundled provisioning is not supported.
Polycom, Inc.
53
Manage the System Remotely
● Provisioning uses the same XML-based profile used for dynamic provisioning.
● Provisioned fields are read only.
Enable the Provisioning Service
You can register your video conferencing system with the RealPresence Resource Manager system in
several ways:
● If the system detects a provisioning service on the network while running the setup wizard, it prompts
you to enter information for registration with the service.
The setup wizard is available during initial setup, after a system reset with system settings deleted,
or after using the restore button. For information about configuring the RealPresence Resource
Manager system so that Polycom systems detect and register with it, refer to the Polycom
RealPresence Resource Manager System Operations Guide.
● You can enter the registration information and attempt to register by going to the Admin Settings in
the Polycom system web interface.
To enable a provisioning service in the Admin Settings:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Servers > Provisioning Service.
2 Select the Enable Provisioning setting.
Configure the Provisioning Service
After you enable the provisioning service, the RealPresence Group system should complete the following
fields automatically. If the system does not complete the fields automatically, get the information from your
network administrator. Multiple Polycom systems can be registered to a single user.
To configure a provisioning service for Automatic Provisioning:
1 In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Servers > Provisioning Service.
2 At Enable Provisioning, select the checkbox.
3 Configure these settings for automatic provisioning.
Setting
Description
Server Type
Specifies the type of provisioning server. Select RPRM, DMS, or CLOUD.
• RPRM is the RealPresence Resource Manager.
• DMS is the Broadsoft BroadWorks Device Management System.
• CLOUD is the RP Cloud server.
Domain Name
Specifies the domain for registering to the provisioning service.
User Name
Specifies the endpoint’s user name for registering to the provisioning service.
Password
Specifies the password that registers the system to the provisioning service.
Server Address
Specifies the address of the system running the provisioning service.
4 Select Save or Update. The system tries to register with the RealPresence Resource Manager or
with a DMS system using NTLM authentication.
Polycom, Inc.
54
Manage the System Remotely
5 Verify that Registration Status changes from Pending to Registered. You might need to wait for a
minute or two before the status changes.
Note: Troubleshoot provisioning registration
If automatic provisioning is enabled but the system does not register successfully with the
provisioning service, you might need to change the Domain, User Name, Password, or Server
Address used for registration. For example, users might be required to periodically reset passwords
used to log into the network from a computer. If such a network password is also used as the
provisioning service password, you must update it on the RealPresence Group system, too. To
avoid unintentionally locking a user out of network access in this case, systems do not automatically
retry registration until you update the settings and register manually on the Provisioning Service
screen.
Disable a Provisioning Service
You can disable the provisioning service.
To disable a provisioning service:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Servers > Provisioning Service.
2 Disable the Enable Provisioning setting.
Note: For information on the provisioning discovery process, refer to the topic “Provision
Server Discovery” in the Polycom Zero Touch Provisioning Guide at
http://downloads.polycom.com/voice/ZTP/ZTP_ProvisioningGuide.pdf.
Multitiered Directory Navigation
You can use the RealPresence Resource Manager to navigate the RealPresence Group system directories
or contacts. Contacts are displayed in a hierarchical format, where you can select the top directory and
search for contacts within each level of the directory hierarchy.
This feature is supported using a RealPresence Resource Manager server (LDAP) and does not include
standalone LDAP servers or other global directory servers.
The following limitations apply to this feature:
● You can use RealPresence Resource Manager 7.1 and higher only.
● You can search and navigate up to three directory levels.
● You cannot use Polycom Touch Control to navigate the RealPresence Group system LDAP
directories.
● This feature is supported on dynamically-managed video conferencing systems only.
To use multitiered directory navigation, you must configure the following web interface settings:
● Go to Admin Settings > Servers > Directory Servers and make selections for each setting. For
more information about these settings, refer to the Setting Up a Directory Server.
● Go to Admin Settings > Servers > Provisioning Service and enable provisioning. For more
information about these settings, refer to Using a Provisioning Service.
Polycom, Inc.
55
Manage the System Remotely
Polycom® RealPresence® Cloud Service
The Polycom® RealPresence® Cloud service enables service providers to configure RealPresence Group
systems with a provisioning service. During the first-time system setup, the RealPresence Cloud service
might be automatically configured and provisioned according to the service provider's parameters. If
needed, you can enable and configure RealPresence Cloud mode in the system web interface.
Enable RealPresence Cloud Mode in the System Web Interface
If your system was not automatically configured and provisioned, you can enable and configure
RealPresence Cloud mode in the system web interface.
To enable RealPresence Cloud mode:
1 In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Servers > Provisioning Service.
2 At Enable Provisioning, select the checkbox.
3 At Server Type, select CLOUD.
4 Click Save.
The registration status changes to Registered after 1 to 2 minutes.
Polycom, Inc.
56
Configure System Software
The following topics provide information on how to configure the software for Polycom video room systems
and peripherals:
● Configuring the RealPresence Group System
● View System Software Options
● Customize What Users See on the System Home Screen
● Enable Access to User Settings
● Restrict Access to User and Administrative Settings
Configuring the RealPresence Group System
This section describes how to configure your RealPresence Group system by using the configuration
screens on the local interface.
If you are in the room with the system, you can navigate the screens and enter information by using the
remote control and the onscreen keyboard. When you reach a text field, press the Select button on the
remote control to display the onscreen keyboard. Note that the onscreen keyboard is automatically
displayed when you reach the System Name field in the setup wizard.
Be aware that only those configuration screens needed to get the system connected are included in the local
interface. Most of the administrative settings are available only in the web interface.
Go to
> Settings > Administration in the system’s local interface. The local interface has a subset of
the administration settings that are available in the web interface. For information on accessing the web
interface, refer to System Web Interface.
When a RealPresence Group system is paired with a Polycom Touch Control, the following statements are true:
● You can change the system’s configuration using the web interface only.
● During pairing, when prompted to enter the Admin ID and Admin Password, but no Admin password
has been configured, you must submit a blank password.
If you enable a provisioning service, any settings provisioned by the Polycom® RealPresence® Resource
Manager system might be displayed as read-only settings in the Admin Settings. For more information about
automatic provisioning, refer to the RealPresence Resource Manager system documentation at
support.polycom.com.
Enable PKI Certificates
If your system will be provisioned by the RealPresence Resource Manager and you plan to use PKI certificates, you
must ensure that you configure the Host Name setting.
Polycom, Inc.
57
Configure System Software
To enable PKI Certificates
1 On the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > LAN Properties > LAN Options.
2 At Host Name, use the same name that the RealPresence Resource Manager uses to provision the
system.
This name must be the same so that certificate signing requests (CSRs) generated during certificate
installation have the correct host name information.
For more information about PKI certificates, refer to Managing Certificates and Revocation. For more
information about provisioning, refer to Using a Provisioning Service.
Set Up the System Name
The system name appears on the screen of the far-end site when you make a call. The RealPresence Group
system interface supports the 16 language fonts listed in the following figure. Other languages might not
display correctly. The first character of a System Name must be a letter or a number instead of a dollar sign ($) or
underscore (_) character. Polycom supports double-byte characters for the system name.
To configure a system name:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > System Settings > System
Name.
2 In the System Name field, enter a name and click Save.
View System Software Options
You can view the software options available on your system.
To view system options:
» In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Options.
Activate System Options
If you want to activate your system options without upgrading your software, you do not need to download
software or run the software update. The only thing you need is your system option key.
To activate system options:
1 Open a supported browser and go to the system’s web interface.
Polycom, Inc.
58
Configure System Software
2 Navigate to Admin Settings > General Settings > Options.
3 Enter the option key and click Save.
For more information about software and system option key codes, refer to Available Software Options.
Customize What Users See on the System Home
Screen
You can use the RealPresence Group system web interface to configure how information is displayed on
the Home screen of the local interface.
To configure the Home screen using the web interface:
1 In your web browser address line, enter the RealPresence Group system’s IP address.
2 Go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Home Screen Settings.
3 Configure the settings on the Home Screen Settings screen that are described in the following
sections.
Speed Dial
You use speed dialing to quickly call an IP address designated as a Favorite. Speed Dial contacts are
displayed on the system’s local interface and on a paired RealPresence Touch device. Speed dial entries do
not appear when the RealPresence Group system is paired with a Polycom Touch Control.
Enable Speed Dial
You must enable the Speed Dial setting in the system web interface before users can use Speed Dial in the
local interface.
To enable speed dialing:
1 In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Home Screen Settings >
Speed Dial.
2 Click Choose Favorites.
3 Search for contacts that you want to add to Speed Dial.
4 Select each contact and click Add.
5 After you have selected all of the contacts, click Save.
Add Speed Dial Contacts
You can add contacts from the system directory to the Speed Dial contacts list on the system’s local interface
and on a paired RealPresence Touch device.
To add speed dial contacts:
1 In the system web interface at Speed Dial, click Edit.
2 Enter a contact name and click Search.
Polycom, Inc.
59
Configure System Software
3 For the contact you want to add, click Add.
4 To save your changes, click Save.
Image File Requirements for Speed Dial Contacts
You can upload a photo or graphic for contacts in the Speed Dial list for the system and for a paired
RealPresence Touch device. Note the following requirements for Speed Dial images:
● JPEG format (.jpg or .jpeg extension)
● Image dimensions within a range of 300 to 2000 pixels (both width and height)
● File size less than 5 MB
Upload an Image File for Speed Dial Contacts
You can upload a photo or graphic for contacts in the system Speed Dial list.
To add an image file for speed dial contacts:
1 In the system web interface at Speed Dial, click Edit.
2 Click Choose File, navigate to the file, and click Open and Upload.
3 To save your changes, click Save.
The image is now displayed for the Speed Dial contact on the system Home screen and on a paired
RealPresence Touch.
Remove Speed Dial Contacts
You can remove contacts from the Speed Dial list.
To remove speed dial contacts:
1 In the system web interface at Speed Dial, click Edit.
2 For the contact you want to delete, click Remove.
3 To save your changes, click Save.
For details about calling Speed Dial contacts, refer to Place a Call to Speed Dial Contacts.
Calendaring Service
RealPresence Group systems can connect to Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 to retrieve calendar
information for a specific Microsoft Outlook or a Microsoft Office 365 individual or system account. The room
system connects to Microsoft Exchange Server using the credentials you provide, or by automatically
discovering the connection information based on an email address or SIP server address.
Connection to a calendaring service allows the room system to:
● Display the day’s scheduled meetings, along with details about each
● Display a Join button on all scheduled meetings for the current day
● Let users join the meeting without knowing the connection details
● Hide or show details about meetings marked Private, depending on the configuration of the system
● Display a meeting reminder before each scheduled meeting, along with a reminder tone
Polycom, Inc.
60
Configure System Software
Note: Professional Services for Microsoft integration is mandatory for Polycom Conferencing for
Microsoft Outlook and Microsoft Office Communications Server integrations. For additional
information and details, please refer to
http://www.polycom.com/services/professional_services/index.html or contact your local Polycom
representative.
Configure the Calendaring Service
Before users can view their scheduled meetings on the local interface, you must configure the Calendaring
Service on the web interface. Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 and Skype for Business 2015 are supported.
To configure the Calendaring Service:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Servers > Calendaring Service.
2 Configure these settings, as appropriate:
Setting
Description
Enable Calendaring
Service
Enables the room video system to connect to a calendaring service and retrieve
meeting information.
Email
Specifies the mailbox account this system should monitor for calendar information.
This should match the Primary SMTP Address for the account on Microsoft
Exchange Server 2013/Skype for Business 2015, which displays as the value of the
mail attribute in the account properties.
Domain
Specifies the domain for registering to the Microsoft Exchange Server 2013/Skype
for Business 2015, in either NETBIOS or DNS notation, for example, either
company.local or COMPANY.
If you are using the Auto Discover Using setting, do not provide a value in this
field.
User Name
Specifies the user name for registering to Microsoft Exchange Server 2013/Skype
for Business 2015, with no domain information included. This can be the system
name or an individual’s name.
If you want the Calendaring Service to use the calendar associated with a Microsoft
Office 365 account, enter the user name for that account in this field.
Password
Specifies the system password for registering with Microsoft Exchange Server
2013/Skype for Business 2015. This can be the system password or an individual’s
password.
If you want the Calendaring Service to use the calendar associated with a Microsoft
Office 365 account, enter the password for that account in this field.
Polycom, Inc.
61
Configure System Software
Setting
Description
Auto Discover Using
Specifies how the system obtains the Microsoft Exchange Server/Skype for
Business 2015 address. If you select Email Address, the system uses the value
provided in the Email field. If you select SIP Server, the system uses the registered
SIP server domain name configured for the RealPresence Group system.
When using this feature, you must provide values in the Email, User Name, and
Password fields that correspond to the Microsoft Outlook or Microsoft Office 365
individual or system account you want the RealPresence Group system to use for
the Calendaring Service. The system may prompt you to confirm the password.
If after configuring the Calendaring Service a message displays that the system
was unable to discover the service, ensure the information you provided is correct.
For example, make sure the email address is in a valid <username@domain>
format.
You can also use an API command to automatically discover the Microsoft
Exchange Server address. For more information, refer to the Polycom
RealPresence Group Series Integrator Reference Guide.
Microsoft Exchange
Server
Specifies the Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) of the Microsoft Exchange
Client Access Server/Skype for Business 2015. If your organization has multiple
servers behind a network load balancer, this is the FQDN of the server’s Virtual IP
Address. If required, an IP address can be used instead of an FQDN, but Polycom
recommends using the same FQDN that is used for Outlook clients.
Provide a value in this field only if you want to manually provide connection
information to Microsoft Exchange Server/Skype for Business 2015. Otherwise, use
the Auto Discover Using setting that allows the system to automatically determine
the connection information for Microsoft Exchange Server/Skype for Business 2015
and populate this field.
Secure Connection
Protocol
Specifies the connection protocol to use to connect to the server. Select Automatic
or TLS 1.0.
Meeting Reminder Time in
Minutes
Specifies the number of minutes before the meeting that a reminder will display on
the system.
Play Reminder Tone When
Not in a Call
Specifies whether to play a sound along with the text reminder when the system is
not in a call.
Show Information for
Meetings Set to Private
Specifies whether to display details about meetings marked private.
For more information about using the calendar, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series User
Guide.
Change the Background Image on the Home Screen
You can upload a custom image to display as the background of all monitors for a multi-screen system or
on the main monitor of a single system. For a custom image on the RealPresence Group Series system,
use the following guidelines.
You must upload an image with pixel size of 1920 x 1080 (width by height) in a .jpg file format with a file size
less than 5 MB.
Polycom, Inc.
62
Configure System Software
For details on changing the RealPresence Touch background image, refer to Change the Home Screen
Background Image on the RealPresence Touch.
To upload a background monitor image:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Home Screen Settings >
Background.
2 Browse to the desired image file and click Choose File > Upload.
The custom image displays on the main monitor or monitors.
Change the Background Startup Image on the Home Screen
The RealPresence Group system local interface displays a default background image when the system first
powers on. You cannot delete this image, but you can upload your own image to replace it. When you
change the image in the web interface, the new image also appears on the RealPresence Touch device.
You must upload an image with pixel size of 1920 x 1080 (width by height) in a .jpg file format.
To upload and use a startup background image:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Home Screen Settings >
Startup Background.
2 Click Choose File to search for and select the image you want to upload.
3 When the image name appears next to Choose File, click Upload.
Kiosk Mode
In the local interface, Kiosk Mode simplifies the Home screen by displaying only speed dial entries and
calendar meetings (if enabled). In Kiosk Mode, therefore, users can call speed dial numbers, join calendar
meetings, and answer calls.
You must create your speed dial numbers before users can access Kiosk Mode.
Kiosk Mode is disabled by default. If Kiosk Mode is enabled, these conditions apply:
● The Home screen menu, Out of Call menu, and other icons are disabled.
● Alerts bring the local interface out of Kiosk Mode until you clear the alerts.
● You can still use the remote to adjust the volume, control the camera, and mute/unmute the
microphone when in calls.
● You can bring up the In a Call menu by pressing Menu on the remote during the call.
Enable Kiosk Mode
You must enable Kiosk Mode in the web interface before users can use it in the local interface. You also
must either enable and configure Speed Dial or Calendaring before Kiosk Mode is available.
To enable Kiosk Mode:
1 In the system web interface, do one of the following:
Polycom, Inc.
63
Configure System Software
 Enable and configure Speed Dial at Admin Settings > General Settings > Home Screen
Settings. For details, see Speed Dial.
 Enable and configure the Calendaring Service at Admin Settings > Servers > Calendaring
Service. For details, see Calendaring Service.
2 Open Kiosk Mode, select Enable Kiosk Mode and click Save.
Home Screen Icons
Home Screen Icons appear in the lower center of the local interface, three at a time. By default, users see
the icons shown in the following table in this location.
Icon
Name
Camera
This icon takes you to the Camera Control screen.
Place a Call
This icon takes you to the Place a Call screen, where you can manually dial a call, or can select a contact
name from a list.
Content
This icon appears only when a content source is detected.
Address Bar
The room system local interface displays an address bar at the bottom of the Home screen. The address
bar can contain the following information:
● None
● IP Address
● H.323 Extension
● SIP Address
● Pairing Code
Choose Where to Display Elements on the Address Bar
You can customize where address bar elements appear on the Home screen of the local interface.
To display system information in the address bar:
1 In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Home Screen Settings >
Address Bar.
2 Configure the following settings.
Polycom, Inc.
64
Configure System Software
Setting
Description
Address Bar (Left Element)
Allows you to select which element you want displayed on the left side of the
address bar on the local interface. The choices are:
• None
• IP Address
• H.323 Extension
• Pairing Code
Address Bar (Right
Element)
Allows you to select which element you want displayed on the right side of the
address bar on the local interface. The choices are:
• None
• SIP Address
• H.323 Extension
• Pairing Code
Enable Access to User Settings
You might want to enable user access to User Settings in the local interface. These settings allow users to
control some aspects of cameras and meetings; for example, to allow other people in a call to control your
camera, or to enable auto answer for point-to-point or multipoint calls.
To enable access to User settings:
1 Do one of the following:
 In the local interface, go to
> Settings > Administration > Security > Settings.
 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Global Security > Access.
2 Enable the Allow Access to User Settings setting.
Restrict Access to User and Administrative Settings
You can restrict access to User Settings and Administration settings in the local interface, making them
available only through the web interface.
To prevent users from using User Settings or Administration Settings in the local interface:
1 In Admin Settings > General Settings > Home Screen Settings > Home Screen Icons, disable
the Show Icons on the Home Screen setting.
2 Click Save.
If the following conditions are met, the ability to show icons is automatically enabled and read only:
● Speed Dial is disabled in the Admin Settings > General Settings > Home Screen Settings.
● The Calendar is not displayed because the system is not connected to the Microsoft Exchange
Server.
● Remote access through the web, telnet, and SNMP are disabled in Security > Global Security >
Access.
Polycom, Inc.
65
Microsoft Interoperability
The following topics provide information for RealPresence Group system administrators on interoperability
with Microsoft products and features:
● Microsoft Directory Servers
● RTV and Skype-Hosted Conference Support
● AES Encryption for Skype Calls
● RealConnect
● Skype for Business Client 2015 Content Viewing
● Microsoft Skype Mode
Microsoft Directory Servers
To allow your users to search the directory servers to add contacts, you must set up and configure the
Microsoft directory servers in the RealPresence Group system web interface. The global directory provides
a list of other systems that are registered with the Global Directory Server and available for calls. The other
systems appear in the directory, allowing users to place calls to other users by selecting their names.
The global directory searching feature does not support directory servers that are unable to store contents
locally on RealPresence Group systems, including Microsoft Skype in Web Query mode.
For information on how to configure directory servers for Microsoft environments, refer to the Polycom
Unified Communications for Microsoft Environments Solution Deployment Guide at support.polycom.com.
SIP Settings for Integration with Microsoft Servers
Integration with Microsoft servers allows Skype for Business 2015 and Polycom RealPresence Group
system users to place audio and video calls to each other. For information about SIP settings and other
Microsoft interoperability considerations, refer to the Polycom Unified Communications for Microsoft
Environments Solution Deployment Guide at support.polycom.com.
RTV and Skype-Hosted Conference Support
Real-time video (RTV) provides higher resolutions during video calls when integrated with Skype for
Business Server 2015. To use RTV in a Skype-hosted conference, you must have the Skype for Business
Interoperability License key enabled on your system.
For more information about configuring your Skype for Business Server 2015 video settings for RTV, refer
to the Polycom Unified Communications for Microsoft Environments Solution Deployment Guide at
support.polycom.com.
Polycom, Inc.
67
Microsoft Interoperability
AES Encryption for Skype Calls
AES encryption is a standard feature on all RealPresence Group systems. When it is enabled, the system
automatically encrypts calls to other systems that have AES encryption enabled. For details on configuring
AES encryption for Skype calls, refer to the Polycom Unified Communications for Microsoft Environments
Solution Deployment Guide at support.polycom.com.
RealConnect
With the Native Support for RealConnect for Skype for Business Server 2015, traditional video conference
users do not have to change their workflow or learn a new process to join together in a video meeting.
Native Support for RealConnect eliminates end user frustration in trying to determine how to connect with
people who might have varying devices. Integration between the RealPresence Group system, Polycom
DMA, Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server (RMX), and Skype for Business Server 2015
infrastructure automatically connects all of the environments together. This feature makes it easy for Skype
and traditional videoconferencing system users to click to join calls from a Skype meeting invitation.
RealConnect Limitations
● In an ad hoc call, when a point-to-point call adds another endpoint, the conference might revert back
to Skype for Business Server 2015 and the ad hoc conference is not able to use SmartCascading
functionality. However, it will still function like a Skype for Business Server 2015 call.
● Call participants cannot use their personal VMR ID. Instead, you must use an ID generated by the
Skype meeting invite.
● The RealPresence Collaboration Server (RMX) sends the active speaker that has joined on the
conference to Skype for Business Server 2015, so the Skype server displays only the active speaker.
For RealConnect setup and configuration information, refer to the Polycom Unified Communications for
Microsoft Environments Solution Deployment Guide at support.polycom.com.
Skype for Business Client 2015 Content Viewing
RealPresence Group systems can view content from Skype for Business 2015 clients in active calls.
Microsoft clients must initiate the content sharing request. The following content types from Skype clients
are available:
● All Monitors: Displays content from all monitors connected to the system with the Skype client.
● Primary Monitor: Displays content from the primary monitor connected to the system with the Skype
client.
● Secondary Monitor: Displays content from the secondary monitor connected to the system with the
Skype client.
● Program: Displays content from a particular program connected to the system with the Skype client.
There are a few limitations with Skype during content sharing and receiving, as follows:
● RealPresence Group systems can view content from Skype clients, but are not able to share content
with Skype clients.
Polycom, Inc.
68
Microsoft Interoperability
● RealPresence Group systems cannot share content, including content shared though
People+Content IP and through the VisualBoard application, while actively receiving content from
Skype clients.
● RealPresence Group systems do not support viewing PowerPoint (Office Web App), Whiteboard,
Poll, and Q & A content from Skype clients. In multipoint conferences with more than one Skype
client, Skype clients can choose these content sharing selections, but systems in the conference do
not receive the content.
● For content to display properly, the room system Monitor 2 must support Progressive mode, and the
output resolution should be set to a Progressive setting (for example, 1280x720p or 1920x1080p).
Interlaced output for Monitor 2 is not supported (do not use Resolution setting -1920x1080i-).
● For Skype content viewing on RealPresence Group systems, Polycom recommends you deploy
Skype Room System accounts instead of regular Skype user accounts for all room-based
RealPresence Group systems. By using these accounts, enterprises avoid sharing content within the
same room which results in an audio echo. To deploy these accounts, refer to the Microsoft Skype
for Business Room System Deployment Guide on the Microsoft site.
● You can scroll and zoom content on the RealPresence Group system monitor, and RealPresence
Group systems can control content received from Skype clients. For details, see the Polycom
RealPresence Group Series User Guide.
● RealPresence Group systems do NOT support audio transmission from a Skype client.
● RealPresence Group systems do not initialize a desktop control request.
● If a Skype client wants to share its content with a RealPresence Group system, it needs to connect
an A/V call with the system before sharing content.
● Because there is no cropping support for application sharing, the far site sees an application with a
black background.
● While receiving content, the system cannot send content. You are prompted with a message
indicating the restriction. As result, during content receiving, the system is not able to send a content
source such as PPCIP or the VisualBoard application. The Skype client must stop sharing before the
system is able to send content.
● For content to display properly, the RealPresence Group system Monitor 2 must support Progressive
mode, and the output resolution should be set to a Progressive setting (for example, 1280x720p or
1920x1080p). Interlaced output for Monitor 2 is not supported (do not use Resolution setting
-1920x1080i).
● For information on how to share content from Skype clients, refer to Microsoft documentation.
For details on configuring Skype for Business content viewing, refer to the Polycom Unified
Communications for Microsoft Environments Solution Deployment Guide at support.polycom.com.
Note: Assistance from Polycom Microsoft Integration Services is mandatory for Skype for Business
2015 integrations. For additional information and details, please refer to
http://www.polycom.com/services/professional_services/index.html or contact your local Polycom
representative.
RDP Content Sharing
You can use Remote Desktop Protocol (RDP) to send content from a Skype for Business client to a
RealPresence Group system.
Polycom, Inc.
69
Microsoft Interoperability
Ending a Skype conference while RDP content is being shared ends all audio, video, and RDP content
sessions. If a Skype client ends a call while sending RDP content, the video display might become
unresponsive. Do one of the following:
● Ask the Skype client to stop presenting RDP content either before or after ending the call.
● Ask a Skype client in the AVMCU call to remove the Skype participant who is sending the RDP
content from the call.
This issue can occur because RDP content is a separate session from the video call, so even when the
video call has ended, the RDP content does not end until it is separately stopped or removed from the call.
For RDP configuration information, refer to the Polycom Unified Communications for Microsoft
Environments Solution Deployment Guide at support.polycom.com.
Microsoft Skype Mode
When a RealPresence Group system is registered with Skype for Business Online, Skype for Business
2015 Server, or Lync 2013 Server, and is paired with a RealPresence Touch device, you can enable the
RealPresence Touch in Skype Mode user interface. In Skype Mode, the RealPresence Group system local
interface has limited operations.
For information on enabling Skype mode, refer to the Polycom Unified Communications Deployment Guide
for Microsoft Environments.
For information on using the Skype Mode user interface, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Touch in Skype
Mode Quick Tips or the Polycom RealPresence Group Series User Guide at support.polycom.com.
Polycom, Inc.
70
Configuring System Network Settings
Before you begin configuring network settings, make sure your network is ready for video conferencing.
Polycom offers contract high-definition readiness services. For more information, contact your Polycom
distributor.
The topics in this section cover network types used worldwide, but note that not all network types are
available in all countries. To get started configuring your network, see the following topics:
● Connecting to the LAN
● LLDP and LLDP-MED Support
● IP Network Settings
● Setting Call Preferences for SVC
● Configure Preferred Call Speeds
Connecting to the LAN
You must connect the system to a LAN to do any of the following with your RealPresence Group system:
● Make H.323 or SIP calls
● Use a Global Directory Server
● Register with a management system
● Access the web interface
● Use People+Content IP
● Connect to a RealPresence Touch device
● Connect to a Polycom Touch Control (see Configuring the Polycom Touch Control Software)
LAN Status Lights
The LAN connector on the RealPresence Group 300, 310, 500, and 700 systems has two lights to indicate
connection status and traffic.
Indicator Light
Connection Status
Left light off
No 1000Base-T connection.
Left light green
1000Base-T connection.
Right light off
No 10/100 Base-T connection and no network traffic with 1000 Base-T connection.
Polycom, Inc.
71
Configuring System Network Settings
Indicator Light
Connection Status
Right light on
10/100 Base-T connection and blinks with network traffic.
Right light blinking
Network traffic.
Configure LAN Properties
You can configure LAN properties for RealPresence Group systems.
To configure system LAN properties:
1 Do one of the following:
 In the local interface, go to
> Settings > Administration > LAN Properties.
 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > LAN Properties.
2 For IPv4, configure the following IP Address settings on the LAN Properties screen.
Setting
Description
IP Address
Specifies how the system obtains an IP address.
• Obtain IP address automatically—Select if the system gets an IP address from a
DHCP server on the LAN.
• Enter IP address manually—Select if the IP address will not be assigned
automatically.
Your IP Address is
If the system obtains its IP address automatically, this area displays the IP address
currently assigned to the system.
If you selected Enter IP address manually, enter the IP address here.
Subnet Mask
Displays the subnet mask currently assigned to the system.
If the system does not automatically obtain a subnet mask, enter one here.
Default Gateway
Displays the gateway currently assigned to the system.
If the system does not automatically obtain a gateway IP address, enter one here.
3 For IPv6, configure the following IP Address settings on the LAN Properties screen.
Setting
Description
Enable IPv6
Enables the IPv6 network stack and makes the IPv6 settings available.
IP Address
Specifies how the system obtains an IP address.
• Obtain IP address automatically—Select if the system gets an IP address from a
SLAAC or a DHCP server on the LAN.
• Enter IP address manually—Select if the IP address will not be assigned
automatically.
Polycom, Inc.
72
Configuring System Network Settings
Setting
Description
Enable SLAAC
Specifies whether to use stateless address autoconfiguration (SLAAC) instead of DHCP
to automatically obtain an IP address.
Using DHCP to get the IP address requires a DHCP server to get the address from the
network, but with SLAAC, existing routers help the system get the IP address from the
network.
Link-Local
Displays the IPv6 address used for local communication within a subnet.
This setting is configurable only when Enter IP Address Manually is selected.
Site-Local
Displays the IPv6 address used for communication within the site or organization.
This setting is configurable only when Enter IP Address Manually is selected.
Global Address
Displays the IPv6 internet address.
This setting is configurable only when Enter IP Address Manually is selected.
Default Gateway
Displays the gateway currently assigned to the system.
If the system does not automatically obtain a gateway IP address, enter one here.
This setting is configurable only when Enter IP Address Manually is selected.
4 Configure the following DNS Servers settings on the LAN Properties screen.
Setting
Description
DNS Servers
(in the local interface
DNS and is not
editable)
Displays the DNS servers currently assigned to the system.
When the IPv4 or IPv6 address is obtained automatically, the DNS Server addresses are
also obtained automatically. You can specify IPv4 DNS server addresses only when the
IPv4 or IPv6 address is entered manually.
Server 1 Address
Server 2 Address
Server 3 Address
Server 4 Address
(read-only in the local
interface)
If the system does not automatically obtain a DNS server address, you can enter one
here. Up to four DNS server addresses are allowed. If all four address fields show
addresses, you cannot add another.
5 Configure the following LAN Options settings in the web interface at Admin Settings > Network >
LAN Properties > LAN Options.
Polycom, Inc.
73
Configuring System Network Settings
Setting
Description
Host Name
(web interface only)
Indicates the system’s name. If the system discovers a valid System Name during the
software installation process, a Host Name is automatically created. However, if an
invalid system name is found, such as a System Name with a space, the system creates
a Host Name with the following format: SystemType-XXXXXX, where XXXXXX is a set of
random alphanumeric characters.
IPv4 networks: The system sends the host name to the DHCP server to enable it to
register the host name with the local DNS server, or it looks up the domain where the
endpoint is registered (if supported).
IPv6 networks: This function is not supported, so you can leave this field blank.
However, configuring the field to contain the registered host name is recommended.
Domain Name
(web interface only)
Displays the domain name currently assigned to the system.
If the system does not automatically obtain a domain name, enter one here.
Autonegotiation
(under General
Settings in local
interface)
Specifies whether the system should automatically negotiate the LAN speed and duplex
mode per IEEE 802.3 autonegotiation procedures. If this setting is enabled, the LAN
Speed and Duplex Mode settings become read only.
Polycom recommends that you use autonegotiation to avoid network issues.
LAN Speed
(under General
Settings in local
interface)
Specifies whether to use 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, or 1000 Mbps for the LAN speed. Note
that the speed you choose must be supported by the switch.
Duplex Mode
(under General
Settings in local
interface)
Specifies the duplex mode to use. Note that the Duplex mode you choose must be
supported by the switch.
Ignore Redirect
Messages
(web interface only)
Enables the system to ignore ICMP redirect messages.
You should enable this setting under most circumstances.
ICMP Transmission
Rate Limit (millisec)
(web interface only)
Specifies the minimum number of milliseconds between transmitted packets. Enter a
number between 0 and 60000. The default value of 1000 signifies that the system sends
1 packet per second. If you enter 0, the transmission rate limit is disabled.
This setting applies only to “error” ICMP packets. This setting has no effect on
“informational” ICMP packets, such as echo requests and replies.
Generate Destination
Unreachable
Messages
(web interface only)
Generates an ICMP Destination Unreachable message if a packet cannot be
delivered to its destination for reasons other than network congestion.
Respond to
Broadcast and
Multicast Echo
Requests
(web interface only)
Sends an ICMP Echo Reply message in response to a broadcast or multicast Echo
Request, which is not specifically addressed to the system.
Polycom, Inc.
74
Configuring System Network Settings
Setting
Description
IPv6 DAD Transmit
Count
(web interface only)
Specifies the number of Duplicate Address Detection (DAD) messages to transmit before
acquiring an IPv6 address. The system sends DAD messages to determine whether the
address it is requesting is already in use.
Select whether to transmit 0, 1, 2, or 3 DAD requests for an IPv6 address.
Enable PC LAN Port
This setting appears only for RealPresence Group 700 systems.
Specifies whether the PC LAN port is enabled on the back of the system. Disable this
setting for increased security.
Enable LLDP
(under General
Settings in local
interface)
Specifies whether Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is enabled.
Enable EAP/802.1X
(under EAP 802.1X in
local interface)
Specifies whether EAP/802.1X network access is enabled. The following authentication
protocols are supported on RealPresence Group systems.
• EAP-MD5
• EAP-PEAPv0 (MSCHAPv2)
• EAP-TTLS
• EAP-TLS
EAP/802.1X Identity
(under EAP 802.1X in
local interface)
Specifies the system’s identity used for 802.1X authentication. This setting is available
only when EAP/802.1X is enabled. The field cannot be blank.
EAP/802.1X
Password
(under EAP 802.1X in
local interface)
Specifies the system’s password used for 802.1X authentication. This setting is required
when EAP-MD5, EAP-PEAPv0 or EAP-TTLS is used.
Enable 802.1p/Q
(under 802.1p/Q in
local interface)
Specifies whether VLAN and link layer priorities are enabled.
VLAN ID
Specifies the identification of the Virtual LAN.This setting is available only when 802.1p/Q
is enabled. The value can be any number from 1 to 4094.
Video Priority
Sets the link layer priority of video traffic on the LAN. Video traffic is any RTP traffic
consisting of video data and any associated RTCP traffic. This setting is available only
when 802.1p/Q is enabled. The value can be any number from 0 to 7, although 6 and 7
are not recommended.
Polycom, Inc.
75
Configuring System Network Settings
Setting
Description
Audio Priority
Sets the priority of audio traffic on the LAN. Audio traffic is any RTP traffic consisting of
audio data and any associated RTCP traffic. This setting is available only when 802.1p/Q
is enabled. The value can be any number from 0 to 7, although 6 and 7 are not
recommended.
Control Priority
Sets the priority of control traffic on the LAN. Control traffic is any traffic consisting of
control information associated with a call:
• H.323—H.225.0 Call Signaling, H.225.0 RAS, H.245, Far End Camera Control (FECC,
which, for room systems, is the Allow Other Participants in a Call to Control Your
Camera setting under Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs > General
Camera Settings)
• SIP—SIP Signaling, FECC, Binary Floor Control Protocol (BFCP)
This setting is available only when 802.1p/Q is enabled. The value can be any number
from 0 to 7, although 6 and 7 are not recommended.
For more information about configuring LAN settings for Microsoft environments, refer to the Polycom
Unified Communications for Microsoft Environments Solution Deployment Guide at support.polycom.com.
LLDP and LLDP-MED Support
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) and Link Layer Discovery Protocol Media Endpoint Discovery
(LLDP-MED) are supported on RealPresence Group systems. LLDP is a vendor-neutral link layer protocol
in the Internet Protocol Suite used by network devices to advertise their identity and capabilities on an IEEE
802 local area network (LAN). This protocol runs over the data-link layer only, allowing connected systems
running different network layer protocols to discover information about each other. LLDP-MED is an
extension of LLDP.
Examples of applications that use information discovered by LLDP include:
● Network topology – A network management system (NMS) can accurately represent a map of the
network topology.
● Inventory – A management system can query a switch to learn about all the devices connected to
that switch. The LLDP protocol is formally specified in standards document IEEE 802.1AB.
In this implementation, LLDP-MED enables the following information discovery:
● Auto discovery of LAN policies enabling plug and play networking
● Inventory management, which allows network administrators to track their network devices.
Behavior When LLDP is Enabled
When LLDP is enabled on a RealPresence Group system, it discovers VLANs advertised by the network
switch and automatically configures the system for one of the VLANs. If the room system discovers any of
the following VLAN types in LLDP data from the network switch, the system automatically configures itself
for one of them. The chosen VLAN type is based on the order of precedence, as follows:
● Video Conferencing VLAN
● Voice VLAN
● Voice Signaling VLAN
Polycom, Inc.
76
Configuring System Network Settings
If none of the above VLAN types are found, the room system configures itself for the default or native LAN
of the switch port to which it is connected.
LLDP packets are transmitted regularly so that the network switch (and the neighboring endpoints) are
aware of the system presence on the network.
Enable LLDP Using a USB Storage Device
When you install a new room system on a network (or reset the system), you can enable LLDP just before
the setup wizard process using a USB storage device.
To use a USB storage device to enable LLDP:
1 Create a usbprovisioning.properties file with the following text string:
lldpenable=true
2 Copy the usbprovisioning.properties file to a USB storage device into the root folder.
3 Ensure that the system is powered off.
4 Insert the USB storage device into the system USB drive.
5 Power on the system.
After the room system detects the file, you cannot interact with the system while it detects and places
it into the VLAN network. Once the LLDP detection process is complete, you can continue the setup
wizard process.
Enable LLDP After the Setup Wizard Process
If you have already used the setup wizard and do not want to reset your RealPresence Group system to run
the setup wizard again, you can configure LLDP in the web interface.
To enable LLDP in the web interface:
» In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > LAN Properties. Select the check box at
Enable LLDP and click Save.
IP Network Settings
You can configure the following IP network protocols in the system web interface.
● H.323
● SIP
Configure H.323 Settings
If your network uses a gatekeeper, the system can automatically register its H.323 name and extension.
This allows others to call the system by entering the H.323 name or extension instead of the IP address.
Polycom, Inc.
77
Configuring System Network Settings
To configure H.323 Settings:
» In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > H.323 Settings to configure
the following settings:
Setting
Description
Enable IP H.323
Allows the H.323 settings to be displayed and configured.
H.323 Name
Specifies the name that gatekeepers and gateways use to identify this system.
You can make point-to-point calls using H.323 names if both systems are
registered to a gatekeeper.
The H.323 Name is the same as the System Name, unless you change it. Your
organization’s dial plan might define the names you can use.
H.323 Extension (E.164)
Lets users place point-to-point calls using the extension if both systems are
registered with a gatekeeper, and specifies the extension that gatekeepers and
gateways use to identify this system.
Your organization’s dial plan might define the extensions you can use.
Configure the System to Use a Gatekeeper
A gatekeeper manages functions such as bandwidth control and admission control. The gatekeeper also
handles address translation, which allows users to make calls using static aliases instead of IP addresses
that can change.
To configure the system to use a gatekeeper:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > H.323 Settings.
2 Configure the following settings.
Setting
Description
Use Gatekeeper
Select this setting to use a gatekeeper. Gateways and gatekeepers are required for
calls between IP and ISDN.
• Off—Calls do not use a gatekeeper.
• Auto—System attempts to automatically find an available gatekeeper.
• Specify—Calls use the specified gatekeeper. This setting must be selected to
enable H.235 Annex D Authentication.
When you select a setting other than Off, the Registration Status is displayed
below the Enable IP H.323 setting.
Require Authentication
Enables support for H.235 Annex D Authentication.
When H.235 Annex D Authentication is enabled, the H.323 gatekeeper ensures
that only trusted H.323 endpoints are allowed to access the gatekeeper.
This setting is available when Use Gatekeeper is set to Specify.
User Name
When authentication is required, specifies the user name for authentication with
H.235 Annex D.
Enter Password
When authentication is required, specifies the password for authentication with
H.235 Annex D.
Polycom, Inc.
78
Configuring System Network Settings
Setting
Description
Current Gatekeeper IP
Address
If you chose Off for the Use Gatekeeper field, the Current Gatekeeper IP
Address field is not displayed.
Displays the IP address that the gatekeeper is currently using.
Primary Gatekeeper IP
Address
•
If you chose Off for the Use Gatekeeper field, the Primary Gatekeeper IP
Address field is not displayed.
• If you chose to use an automatically selected gatekeeper, this area displays the
gatekeeper’s IP address.
• If you chose to specify a gatekeeper, enter the gatekeeper’s IP address or name
(for example, 10.11.12.13 or gatekeeper.companyname.usa.com).
The primary gatekeeper IP address contains the IPv4 address the system registers
with. As part of the gatekeeper registration process, the gatekeeper might return
alternate gatekeepers. If communication with the primary gatekeeper is lost, the
system registers with the alternate gatekeeper but continues to poll the primary
gatekeeper. If the system reestablishes communications with the primary
gatekeeper, the system unregisters from the alternate gatekeeper and reregisters
with the primary gatekeeper.
SIP Settings
If your network supports the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP), you can use SIP to connect IP calls.
The SIP protocol has been widely adapted for voice over IP communications and basic video conferencing;
however, many of the video conferencing capabilities are not yet standardized. Many capabilities also
depend on the SIP server.
The following are examples of features that are not supported using SIP:
● Cascaded multipoint in SIP calls.
● Meeting passwords. If you set a meeting password, SIP endpoints will be unable to dial in to a
multipoint call.
For more information about SIP compatibility issues, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series
Release Notes.
Configure SIP Settings
You can configure SIP settings in the system web interface.
To configure SIP settings:
1 In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > SIP.
2 Configure the following settings.
Setting
Description
Enable SIP
Allows the SIP settings to be displayed and configured.
Enable AS-SIP
Enables the room system to apply the settings configured for assured services SIP.
Polycom, Inc.
79
Configuring System Network Settings
Setting
Description
SIP Server
Configuration
Specifies whether to automatically or manually set the SIP server’s IP address.
If you select Auto, the Transport Protocol, Registrar Server, and Proxy Server settings
cannot be edited. If you select Specify, those settings are editable.
Transport Protocol
Indicates the protocol the system uses for SIP signaling. The SIP network infrastructure
determines which protocol is required for the room system.
Auto—Enables an automatic negotiation of protocols in the following order: TLS, TCP,
UDP. This is the recommended setting for most environments.
TCP—Provides reliable transport via TCP for SIP signaling.
UDP—Provides best-effort transport via UDP for SIP signaling.
TLS—Provides secure communication of the SIP signaling. TLS is available only when
the system is registered with a SIP server that supports TLS. When you choose this
setting, the system ignores TCP/UDP port 5060. Select TLS if you want to encrypt SVC
calls.
Force Connection
Reuse
This setting is disabled by default (recommended). When disabled, it causes the system
to use an ephemeral source port for all outgoing SIP messages. When enabled, it
causes the system to use the active SIP listening port as the source port (5060 or 5061,
depending on the negotiated SIP transport protocol in use). This can be useful to
establish correct operation with remote SIP peer devices, which require that the source
port match the contact port in SIP messages.
BFCP Transport
Preference
Controls the negotiation behavior for content sharing using the Binary Floor Control
Protocol (BFCP). Establishes the relationship between the floor control server and its
clients, while the available settings determine how network traffic flows between the
server and clients.
TCP is typically known as the older, slightly slower, and more reliable method, but is not
supported under some circumstances, such as with session border controllers (SBCs).
Prefer UDP—Starts resource sharing using UDP, but fall back to TCP if needed. This is
the default value when SIP is enabled.
Prefer TCP—Starts resource sharing using TCP, but fall back to UDP if needed.
UDP Only—Shares resources only through UDP. If UDP is unavailable, content sharing
in a separate video stream is not available.
TCP Only—Shares resources only through TCP. If TCP is unavailable, content sharing
in a separate video stream is not available.
Sign-in Address
Specifies the SIP address or SIP name of the system, for example,
mary.smith@department.company.com. If you leave this field blank, the system’s IP
address is used for authentication.
User Name
Specifies the user name to use for authentication when registering with a SIP Registrar
Server, for example, marySmith. If the SIP proxy requires authentication, this field and
the password cannot be blank.
Password
Specifies the password associated with the User Name used to authenticate the system
to the Registrar Server. The password can be up to 47 characters in length.
Polycom, Inc.
80
Configuring System Network Settings
Setting
Description
Registrar Server
Specifies the IP address or DNS name of the SIP Registrar Server. The address can be
specified as either an IP address or a DNS fully qualified domain name (FQDN). If
registering a remote system with an Edge Server, use the FQDN of the edge server.
By default for TCP, the SIP signaling is sent to port 5060 on the registrar server. By
default for TLS, the SIP signaling is sent to port 5061 on the registrar server.
Enter the address and port using the following format:
<IP_Address>:<Port>
<IP_Address> can be an IPv4 or IPv6 address, or a DNS FQDN such as
servername.company.com:6050.
Syntax Examples:
• To use the default port for the protocol you have selected:
10.11.12.13
• To specify a different TCP or UDP port:
10.11.12.13:5071
Proxy Server
Specifies the DNS FQDN or IP address of the SIP Proxy Server. If you leave this field
blank, the address of the Registrar Server is used. If you leave both the SIP Registrar
Server and Proxy Server fields blank, no Proxy Server is used.
By default for TCP, the SIP signaling is sent to port 5060 on the proxy server. By default
for TLS, the SIP signaling is sent to port 5061 on the proxy server.
The syntax used for this field is the same as for the Registrar Server field.
Registrar Server Type
Specifies the registrar server type. Select Microsoft or Unknown.
Note: If you have entered specific server addresses into the address fields Registrar server and
Proxy server at Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > SIP, before you change the SIP Server
Configuration setting from Specify to Auto, you must clear the address fields and then click Save. If
the server fields are not cleared, SIP registration might fail.
For more information about this and other Microsoft interoperability considerations, refer to the Polycom
Unified Communications for Microsoft Environments Solution Deployment Guide at support.polycom.com.
SIP Settings for Integration with the Telepresence Interoperability Protocol (TIP)
When SIP is enabled on a RealPresence Group system that has the TIP option key code, the system can
interoperate with TIP endpoints. For more information about Polycom support for the TIP protocol, refer to
Polycom Unified Communications Deployment Guide for Cisco Environments at support.polycom.com.
Note: You cannot configure TIP without purchasing and installing a Telepresence Interoperability
Protocol (TIP) option key code.
AS-SIP Settings
RealPresence Group systems support the Assured Services Session Initiation Protocol (AS-SIP), as
defined by the Unified Capabilities Requirements (UCR) technical standards for telecommunication
switching equipment developed by the DoD and Defense Information Systems Agency (DISA). AS-SIP is
the term used to describe the DoD version of SIP used as part of its initiative to build a reliable and secure
Polycom, Inc.
81
Configuring System Network Settings
IP communications network. AS-SIP incorporates Multilevel Precedence and Preemption, Secure Signaling
and Media, Quality of Service (QoS), and IPv6 support.
Enable the AS-SIP Setting
The AS-SIP settings define service codes, network domains, and precedence levels for MLPP. You must
enable AS-SIP settings before you can configure the settings for MLPP.
To enable AS-SIP:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > SIP.
2 Select the Enable AS-SIP setting.
Configure AS-SIP Settings for MLPP
You can configure AS-SIP settings for MLPP in the web interface.
To configure AS-SIP settings:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > AS-SIP.
2 Configure the following settings.
Setting
Description
Service Code
Defines one or more of the US Federal Communications Commission (FCC) N11
special services dialing codes or worldwide special dialing codes.
Outbound Precedence
Call Defaults
Defines the Default Domain (network domain) and the Default Precedence level
used when dialing a call.
MLPP Network Domains
Defines the MLPP network domains your network uses.
Add an AS-SIP Service Code
You can add an AS-SIP service code in the web interface.
To add an AS-SIP service code:
1 To add a Service Code, click
.
2 In the text field of the new line that appears, enter the numbers.
3 Click another line in the list to create the service code.
Delete an AS-SIP Service Code
You can delete an AS-SIP service code in the web interface.
To delete a AS-SIP service code:
You can delete an AS-SIP service code in the web interface.
» Click
Polycom, Inc.
.
82
Configuring System Network Settings
Define AS-SIP Outbound Precedence Call Defaults
You can define AS-SIP outbound precedence call default settings for your system.
To define AS-SIP outbound precedence call defaults:
1 Select the Default Domain to use for outbound calls, that is, the default network domain.
RealPresence Group systems come preconfigured for use on the uc and dsn network domains, but
you can add others. You can choose any defined network domain as the default domain to use for
outbound calls. uc and dsn are the preconfigured network domains and uc is the default network
domain for this setting.
2 Select the Default Precedence to use for outbound calls.
This setting accepts one of the defined precedence levels from the configured default domain. The
setting defaults to ROUTINE, which is the lowest precedence level defined in the default network
domain uc.
Although uc and dsn are preconfigured on the system, you can edit their settings or create other
network domains.
Multilevel Precedence and Preemption (MLPP)
Multilevel Precedence and Preemption (MLPP) provides call prioritization over network resources and
far-end system access. Authorized users place precedence calls to elevate the priority of the call through
the AS-SIP network. Systems already in a call can be preempted by an incoming call with a higher priority.
In addition, precedence call signaling and media packets are marked with DSCP values associated with the
precedence level to ensure network QoS commensurate with the call precedence level.
RealPresence Group systems provide support for placing precedence calls through the use of precedence
prefix codes in the dial string. Calls can be placed at any of the precedence levels defined within the network
domain configured as the default domain for outbound calls. The default network domains uc and dsn
define five precedence levels: Routine, Priority, Immediate, Flash, or Flash Override. The system signals
the precedence level according to the standards in UCR 2008, Change 3, and provides appropriate
feedback to the user placing the call.
Incoming calls are announced with the appropriate precedence level, and the authorized user can select
one of the following ways to handle the call:
● Answer directly
● Join into conference
● Hang up current call and answer
Define MLPP Network Domains
You can define MLPP network domain names for your system.
To define MLPP network domains:
1 To edit a domain, click
.
2 If needed, edit the Network Domain Name or change the Allow Incoming Calls setting. Disabling
the Allow Incoming Calls setting causes the system to reject any calls from this network domain.
3 Select a Precedence Level.
You can define a total of 10 precedence levels.
4 Configure these settings.
Polycom, Inc.
83
Configuring System Network Settings
Setting
Description
Precedence Level
The name associated with the precedence level.
You can click Add Precedence Level to create a level and you can click
level.
to remove a
Dial Digit
A single numeric field (0-9) that represents the dialing digit used to indicate the requested
call precedence.
The precedence dial string is indicated by a leading '9' followed by the Dial Digit, followed by
the 7- or 10-digit number.
Resource Priority
Header
Represents the value in the SIP Resource Priority Header used to signal the precedence
level. This field accepts a single UTF-8 character.
Audio DSCP
Indicates the DSCP value used for audio RTP/SRTP packets sent in calls using this
precedence level. The field accepts an integer value range from 0-63.
Video DSCP
Indicates the DSCP value used for video RTP/SRTP packets sent in calls using this
precedence level. The field accepts an integer value range from 0-63.
5 Click Save.
Add an MLPP Network Domain
You can add an MLPP network domain for your system.
To add an MLPP network domain:
1 To add a network domain, click
and then configure the same settings for the new network
domain in the define MLPP network domains task above.
2 Click Save when you are finished configuring the settings to save your changes.
Alternative Network Address Type (ANAT) for RealPresence Group Systems
ANAT signaling is used for IPv4 and IPv6 support in AS-SIP and is only useful in AS-SIP environments.
When AS-SIP is enabled, and dual stack (IPV4 and IPV6) is enabled, ANAT signaling is enabled.
Consider the following best practices when you enable AS-SIP on a RealPresence Group system:
● Be sure to register the system only to AS-SIP-aware proxy/registrar servers, because AS-SIP
signaling can be incompatible with other types of proxy/registrar servers.
● If the Cisco Telepresence Interoperability Protocol (TIP) software option is installed, turn off TIP
signaling on the RealPresence Group endpoint by going to Admin Settings > Network > Dialing
Preferences > Dialing Options and disabling the TIP setting. TIP signaling is incompatible with
AS-SIP signaling.
Configure Network Quality Settings
You can specify how your system responds to network quality issues by configuring the Network Quality
settings; these settings control how your network handles IP packets during video calls.
Polycom, Inc.
84
Configuring System Network Settings
To configure Network Quality settings:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > Network Quality.
2 Configure the following settings.
Setting
Description
Automatically Adjust
People/Content
Bandwidth
Specifies whether the system should automatically adjust the bandwidth necessary
for the People stream or Content stream depending on the relative complexity of the
people video, content video, or both. If this setting is enabled, the Quality
Preference setting is not available.
Quality Preference
Specifies which stream has precedence when attempting to compensate for network
loss:
• Both People and Content streams
• People streams
• Content streams
The stream defined to have precedence experiences less quality degradation during
network loss compensation than the stream not having precedence. Choosing Both
People and Content streams means that both streams experience roughly equal
degradation.
This setting is not available when the Automatically Adjust People/Content
Bandwidth setting is enabled.
Type of Service
Specifies your service type and lets you choose how to set the priority of IP packets
sent to the system for video, audio, FECC, and OA&M:
• IP Precedence—Represents the priority of IP packets sent to the system. The
value can be between 0 and 7.
• DiffServ—Represents a priority level between 0 and 63.
Note: If AS-SIP is enabled and you select DiffServ, the DSCP values for audio and
video defined for the negotiated call precedence level in the default network domain
that was configured for outbound calls override the Video and Audio settings
defined on this screen of the web interface. If you have not enabled AS-SIP, the
Video and Audio values defined here are used.
Video
Specifies the IP Precedence or Diffserv value for video RTP traffic and associated
RTCP traffic.
Audio
Specifies the IP Precedence or Diffserv value for audio RTP traffic and associated
RTCP traffic.
Control
Specifies the IP Precedence or Diffserv value for control traffic on any of the
following channels:
• H.323—H.225.0 Call Signaling, H.225.0 RAS, H.245, Far End Camera Control
(FECC, which, for room systems, is the Allow Other Participants in a Call to
Control Your Camera setting under Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video
Inputs > General Camera Settings)
• SIP—SIP Signaling, FECC, Binary Floor Control Protocol (BFCP)
OA&M
Specifies the IP Precedence or Diffserv value for traffic not related to video, audio, or
FECC.
Maximum Transmission
Unit Size
Specifies whether to use the default Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) size for IP
calls or select a maximize size.
Polycom, Inc.
85
Configuring System Network Settings
Setting
Description
Maximum Transmission
Unit Size Bytes
Specifies the MTU size, in bytes, used in IP calls. If the video becomes blocky or
network errors occur, packets might be too large; decrease the MTU. If the network
is burdened with unnecessary overhead, packets might be too small; increase the
MTU.
Enable Lost Packet
Recovery
Allows the system to use LPR (Lost Packet Recovery) if packet loss occurs. For
more details, see Lost Packet Recovery and Dynamic Bandwidth Settings.
Enable RSVP
Allows the system to use Resource Reservation Setup Protocol (RSVP) to request
that routers reserve bandwidth along an IP connection path. Both the near site and
far site must support RSVP in order for reservation requests to be made to routers
on the connection path.
Dynamic Bandwidth
Specifies whether to let the system automatically find the optimum call rate for a call.
For more details, see Lost Packet Recovery and Dynamic Bandwidth Settings.
MRC Bandwidth
Allocation
Adjusts media bit stream bandwidth, reducing packet loss. Specifically designed for
SVC-based calls. For more information on SVC, see Setting Call Preferences for
SVC.
Maximum Transmit
Bandwidth
Specifies the maximum transmit call rate between 64 kbps and the system’s
maximum line rate. This setting can be useful when the system is connected to the
network using an access technology that provides different transmit and receive
bandwidth (such as cable or DSL access).
Maximum Receive
Bandwidth
Specifies the maximum receive call rate between 64 kbps and the system’s
maximum line rate. This setting can be useful when the system is connected to the
network using an access technology that provides different transmit and receive
bandwidth (such as cable or DSL access).
Note: When a RealPresence Group 500 or RealPresence Group 700 system is hosting a multipoint call, the total
call rate for all sites in the call is 6 Mbps.
Lost Packet Recovery and Dynamic Bandwidth Settings
You can handle video quality issues by selecting the Enable Lost Packet Recovery (LPR) setting, the
Dynamic Bandwidth setting, or both settings.
If both settings are enabled, Dynamic Bandwidth adjusts the video rate to reduce packet loss to 3% or less.
When packet loss drops to 3% or less, LPR cleans up the video image on your monitor. The additional
processing power required might cause the video rate to drop while the system is using LPR. If this
happens, the Call Statistics screen shows the Video Rate Used as lower than the Video Rate. If Packet Loss
is 0 for at least 10 minutes, LPR stops operating and the Video Rate Used increases to match the Video
Rate.
If only LPR is enabled and the system detects packet loss, LPR attempts to clean the image but the video
rate is not adjusted. If only Dynamic Bandwidth is enabled and the system detects packet loss of 3% or
more, the video rate is adjusted but LPR does not clean the image.
You can view % Packet Loss, Video Rate, and Video Rate Used on the Call Statistics screen.
Polycom, Inc.
86
Configuring System Network Settings
Configure the Room System for Use with a Firewall or NAT
A firewall protects an organization’s IP network by controlling data traffic from outside the network. Unless
the firewall is designed to work with H.323 video conferencing equipment, you must configure the system
and the firewall to allow video conferencing traffic to pass in and out of the network.
Network Address Translation (NAT) network environments use private internal IP addresses for devices
within the network, while using one external IP address to allow devices on the LAN to communicate with
other devices outside the LAN. If your system is connected to a LAN that uses a NAT, you will need to enter
the NAT Public (WAN) Address so that your system can communicate outside the LAN.
To set up the system to work with a firewall or NAT:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > Firewall.
2 Configure the following settings.
Setting
Description
Fixed Ports
Lets you specify whether to define the TCP and UDP ports.
• If the firewall is not H.323 compatible, enable this setting. The system assigns a range
of ports starting with the TCP and UDP ports you specify. The system defaults to a
range beginning with port 3230 for both TCP and UDP.
Note: You must open the corresponding ports in the firewall. For H.323, you must
also open the firewall’s TCP port 1720; for SIP you must open either UDP port 5060,
TCP 5060, or TCP 5061 depending on whether you are using UDP, TCP, or TLS as
the SIP transport protocol.
• If the firewall is H.323 compatible or the system is not behind a firewall, disable this
setting.
For IP H.323 you need 2 TCP and 8 UDP ports per connection. For SIP you need TCP
port 5060 and 8 UDP ports per connection.
Range of UDP Ports: Because systems support ICE, the range of fixed UDP ports is
112. The system cycles through the available ports from call to call. After the system
restarts, the first call begins with the first port number, either 49152 or 3230.
Subsequent calls start with the last port used, for example, the first call uses ports 3230
to 3236, the second call uses ports 3236 to 3242, the third call uses ports 3242 through
3248, and so on.
Fixed Ports Range and Filters:
You might notice that the source port of a SIP signaling message is not in the fixed ports
range. When your firewalls are filtering on source ports, go to Admin Settings >
Network > IP Network > SIP and enable the Force Connection Reuse checkbox.
When this setting is enabled, the system uses port 5060/5061 for the source port and
for the destination port. These ports are required to be open in the firewall.
TCP Ports
UDP Ports
Specifies the beginning value for the range of TCP and UDP ports used by the system.
The system automatically sets the range of ports based on the beginning value you set.
Note: You must also open the firewall’s TCP port 1720 to allow H.323 traffic.
Enable H.460 Firewall
Traversal
Allows the system to use H.460-based firewall traversal for IP calls. For more
information, refer to H.460 NAT Firewall Traversal.
Polycom, Inc.
87
Configuring System Network Settings
Setting
Description
NAT
Specifies whether the system should determine the NAT Public WAN Address
automatically.
• If the system is not behind a NAT or is connected to the IP network through a Virtual
Private Network (VPN), select Off.
• If the system is behind a NAT that allows HTTP traffic, select Auto.
• If the system is behind a NAT that does not allow HTTP traffic, select Manual.
NAT Public (WAN)
Address
Displays the address that callers from outside the LAN use to call your system. If you
chose to configure the NAT manually, enter the NAT Public Address here.
This field is editable only when NAT Configuration is set to Manual.
NAT is H.323
Compatible
Specifies that the system is behind a NAT that is capable of translating H.323 traffic.
This field is visible only when NAT Configuration is set to Auto or Manual.
Address Displayed in
Global Directory
Lets you choose whether to display this system’s public or private address in the global
directory.
This field is visible only when NAT Configuration is set to Auto or Manual.
Enable SIP Keep-Alive
Messages
Specifies whether to regularly transmit keep-alive messages on the SIP signaling
channel and on all RTP sessions that are part of SIP calls. Keep-alive messages keep
connections open through NAT/Firewall devices that are often used at the edges of both
home and enterprise networks.
When a system is deployed or registered in an Avaya SIP environment, Polycom
recommends that you disable this setting to allow calls to connect fully.
In environments set up behind a firewall, firewall administrators can choose to limit access to TCP
connections only. Although TCP is an accurate and reliable method of data delivery that incorporates
error-checking, it is not a fast method. For this reason, real-time media streams often use UDP, which offers
speed but not necessarily accuracy. Within an environment behind a firewall, where firewall administrator
has restricted media access to TCP ports, calls can be completed using a TCP connection instead of UDP.
Caution: Systems deployed outside a firewall are potentially vulnerable to unauthorized access. Visit
the Polycom Security section of the Knowledge Base at s upport.polycom.com for timely security
information. You can also register to receive periodic email updates and advisories.
H.460 NAT Firewall Traversal
You can configure systems to use standards-based H.460.18 and H.460.19 firewall traversal, which allows
video systems to more easily establish IP connections across firewalls.
The following illustration shows how a service provider might provide H.460 firewall traversal between two
enterprise locations. In this example the Polycom Video Border Proxy™ (VBP®) firewall traversal device is
on the edge of the service provider network and facilitates IP calls between systems behind different
firewalls.
Polycom, Inc.
88
Configuring System Network Settings
Ref.
Number
Description
1
Polycom Video Border Proxy
2
Gatekeeper
3
IP network
4
Firewall
5
RealPresence Group system
6
Firewall
7
RealPresence Group system
Configure the H.460 NAT Firewall Traversal
You can enable and configure the H.460 NAT firewall traversal on your system.
To configure the RealPresence Group system and firewall traversal:
1 Enable firewall traversal on the system.
a In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > Firewall.
b Select Enable H.460 Firewall Traversal.
2 Register the system to an external Polycom VBP device that supports the H.460.18 and H.460.19
standards.
3 Ensure that firewalls to be traversed allow the system to open outbound TCP and UDP connections.
 Firewalls with a stricter rule set should allow the systems to open at least the following outbound
TCP and UDP ports: 1720 (TCP), 14085-15084 (TCP) and 1719 (UDP), 16386-25386 (UDP).
 Firewalls should permit inbound traffic to TCP and UDP ports that have been opened earlier in the
outbound direction.
Polycom, Inc.
89
Configuring System Network Settings
Basic Firewall/NAT Traversal Connectivity
Basic Firewall/NAT Traversal Connectivity allows systems to connect to the SIP-based RealPresence
solutions using the Acme Packet Net-Net family of Session Border Controllers (SBC). A system connects
to the Acme Packet Net-Net SBC as a remote enterprise endpoint. The remote enterprise endpoint is
registered to the enterprise’s SIP infrastructure and connects to an internal enterprise endpoint through the
enterprise firewall.
For details about the use and configuration of the Acme Packet Net-Net SBC used in conjunction with this
feature, refer to Deploying Polycom Unified Communications in an Acme Packet Net-Net Enterprise
Session Director Environment.
RealPresence Group systems also provide full mutual TLS support for SIP and XMPP Presence
connections. Full mutual TLS support gives administrators the ability to identify and authenticate devices
attempting to join conferences from outside the enterprise network.
Setting Call Preferences for SVC
Scalable Video Coding (SVC) conferencing provides several benefits, including fewer video resource
requirements, better error resiliency, lower latency, and more flexibility with display layouts.
You can make and receive SVC multipoint calls when the RealPresence Group system is connected to an
SVC-compatible bridge through the Polycom® RealPresence® Distributed Media Application (DMATM). In an
SVC-based conference, each SVC-enabled endpoint transmits multiple bit streams, called simulcasting, to
the Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server (RMX). The RealPresence Collaboration Server sends or
relays selected video streams to the endpoints without sending the entire video layout. The streams are
assembled into a layout by the SVC-enabled endpoints according to each of their different display
capabilities and layout configurations.
To make SVC point-to-point calls, the system must be registered to a Skype for Business 2015 server. In a
Skype for Business 2015 hosted multipoint or point-to-point call, you can view multiple far-end sites in
layouts. RealPresence Group 500 and 700 systems display up to five far-end sites on Skype for Business
2015 hosted (SVC) multipoint calls.
For information on enabling encryption for SVC calls, refer to Configure Encryption Settings for SVC Calls.
For more information on the features, limitations, and layouts of SVC-based conferencing, refer to the
Polycom RealPresence SVC-Based Conferencing Solutions Deployment Guide available at
support.polycom.com.
Configure Dialing Options
Dialing preferences help you manage the network bandwidth used for calls and establish an SVC call
configuration. You can specify the default and optional call settings for outgoing calls. You can also limit the
call speeds of incoming calls.
To configure dialing options:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > Dialing Preference > Dialing Options.
2 Configure these settings.
Polycom, Inc.
90
Configuring System Network Settings
Setting
Description
Scalable Video Coding
Preference (H.264)
Specifies whether to use scalable or advanced video coding:
• SVC then AVC—Use SVC when possible; otherwise, use AVC.
• AVC Only—This setting disables SVC.
This setting is not applicable to Skype-hosted calls, since SVC is negotiated
automatically by Skype for Business Server 2015 or the Skype for Business 2015
client.
Enable H.239
Specifies standards-based People+Content data collaboration. Enable this setting if
you know that H.239 is supported by the far -end sites you call.
Enable Audio-Only Calls
Specifies one additional outbound audio-only call from the RealPresence Group
system. This occurs when a multipoint conference call hits the maximum number of
calls allowed for the license type.
TIP
Specifies that TIP is enabled on a RealPresence Group system and that the
system can interoperate with TIP endpoints. For details, refer to SIP
Settings for Integration with the Telepresence Interoperability Protocol (TIP).
Video Dialing Order
Specifies how the system places video calls to directory entries that have more than
one type of number.
• IP H.323
• SIP
This setting also specifies how the system places video calls from the Place a Call
screen when the call type selection is either unavailable or set to Auto. If a call
attempt does not connect, the system tries to place the call using the next call type in
the list.
Audio Dialing Order
Preference 1
Specifies the first audio preference for calls. The choices are:
• IP H.323
• SIP
Preference 1 will be attempted first, while Preference 2 will be attempted second.
Audio Dialing Order
Preference 2
Specifies the second audio preference for calls. The choices are:
• IP H.323
• SIP
Preference 2 will be attempted second, while Preference 1 will be attempted first.
Enable Automatic Answering of SVC Point-to-Point Calls
A RealPresence Group system registered to a Skype for Business 2015 server and connected to an
SVC-compatible bridge can automatically answer incoming SVC calls. To enable this feature, complete the
following tasks on the system:
● Enable Auto Answer Point-to-Point Video
● Enable Scalable Video Coding Preference (H.264)
To enable Auto Answer Point-to-Point Video:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > System Settings > Call
Settings.
Polycom, Inc.
91
Configuring System Network Settings
2 From the Auto Answer Point-to-Point Video list, select Yes.
Enable SVC Preference (H.264) for Calls
You can enable the order preference for SVC and AVC calls.
To enable Scalable Video Coding Preference (H.264):
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > Dialing Preference > Dialing Options.
2 From the Scalable Video Coding Preference (H.264) list, select SVC then AVC.
Configure Preferred Call Speeds
You can configure calls speeds in the web interface.
To configure call speeds:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > Dialing Preference > Preferred Speeds.
2 Configure the following settings.
Setting
Description
Preferred Speed for
Placed Calls
IP Calls
SIP (TIP) Calls
Determines the speeds to use for IP or SIP (TIP) calls from this system when either
of the following statements is true:
• The call speed is set to Auto on the Place a Call screen
• The call is placed from the directory
If the far-site system does not support the selected speed, the system automatically
negotiates a lower speed.
Users cannot specify a call speed when placing calls from the Polycom Touch
Control.
The SIP (TIP) Calls setting is available only when the TIP setting is enabled.
Maximum Speed for
Received Calls
IP Calls
SIP (TIP) Calls
Allows you to restrict the bandwidth used when receiving IP or SIP (TIP) calls.
If the far site attempts to call the system at a higher speed than selected here, the
call is renegotiated at the speed specified in this field.
The SIP (TIP) Calls setting is available only when the TIP setting is enabled.
Note: For point-to-point calls, the Polycom RealPresence Group 300 and 310 systems use a
maximum of 3 Mbps of bandwidth, and the RealPresence Group 500 systems use a maximum of 6
Mbps.
Polycom, Inc.
92
Monitors and Cameras
These topics detail high-definition video conferencing, how to set up monitors and cameras with your room
system, and how to record calls:
● Receiving and Displaying Video in High Definition
● Configuring Monitor Settings
● Monitor Profiles and Video Layout Panel Views
● Touch Monitor User Interface
● Monitor Resolutions for the RealPresence Group System Model Types
● Recording Calls with Polycom® RealPresence® Media Suite
● Polycom Cameras
● Connecting Cameras to RealPresence Group Systems
● Powering Cameras with RealPresence Group Systems
● Configuring Camera Settings
● Configuring Video Input Settings
● Camera Presets
Receiving and Displaying Video in High Definition
RealPresence Group systems offer the following high-definition (HD) capabilities:
● Send people or content video to the far site in HD
● Receive and display video from the far site in HD
● Display near-site video in HD
● Full-motion HD
Systems with HD capability can send video in wide-screen, HD format. For information about frame rates
for content, refer to Content Sharing.
To send video in HD format, use any model of Polycom camera that supports HD video and a Polycom
RealPresence Group system capable of sending 720p or better video.
When the far site sends HD video, RealPresence Group systems with HD capability and an HD monitor can
display the video in wide-screen, HD format. The HD 720 format supported by these systems is 1280 x 720,
progressive scan format (720p). RealPresence Group systems with 1080 capability can receive 1080p
progressive format and can display 1080p progressive or 1080i interlaced format.
Near-site video is displayed in HD format when you use an HD video source and an HD monitor. However,
near-site video is displayed in SD if the system is in an SD or lower-resolution call.
Polycom, Inc.
93
Monitors and Cameras
To use HD for a multipoint call, keep the following requirements in mind:
● The call must be hosted by a system or a conferencing platform that supports HD such as Polycom
RealPresence Collaboration Server 1500 or 2000.
● The system host must have the appropriate option keys installed.
● All systems in the call must support HD (720p at 30 fps) and H.264.
● The call rate must be high enough to support HD resolution, as shown in Multipoint Call Speeds.
● The call cannot be cascaded.
For more information about multipoint calls, refer to Multipoint Call Speeds.
Full-Motion HD Video and Audio
With RealPresence Group systems, Polycom sets a higher bar for video and audio performance. Seeing
participants in full 1080p 60 fps, or full-motion HD, brings video to a new level of realism. Full-motion HD
provides those clear, vibrant visuals and flawless audio that are critical to replicating an “in the same room”
experience.
In group collaboration, the quality of content is as important as the quality of the people on video. Content
that is grainy, pixelated, or slow to update makes it hard to get the most out of your meetings. With
RealPresence Group systems, you share full-motion HD people and content at the same time, which helps
eliminate compromises when sharing across distances.
Configuring Monitor Settings
The RealPresence Group system constantly detects any monitors connected to it. You choose which
monitors with the Enable setting. You can also add a Monitor Profile to manage a group of monitor settings.
Note: Ensure that the system is powered off before you connect any devices.
For more information about connecting monitors to RealPresence Group systems, refer to System Panel
Views.
Configure Monitor Settings
You might need to configure monitor settings for the monitors connected to your system.
To configure monitors:
1 In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Monitors.
2 Configure these settings on the Monitors screen. The settings for Monitor 1, Monitor 2, and Monitor
3 are nearly the same, although the available features can be different. Monitor 3 is available for
RealPresence Group 700 systems only.
Polycom, Inc.
94
Monitors and Cameras
Setting
Description
Enable
Specifies the monitor setting:
• Auto–This is the default setting. Specifies that the Video Format and Resolution
settings are automatically detected and disables those settings.
• Manual–Enables you to select the Video Format and Resolution settings.
Resolution settings are filtered based on the Video Format you selected.
• Off–Disable this monitor (not available for Monitor 1)
Monitor Profile
Specifies which profile to use for this monitor. The choices depend on how many
monitors the system uses and which monitor you are configuring. For details, Monitor
Profiles and Video Layout Panel Views.
Video Format
Specifies the monitor’s format. Depending on which RealPresence Group system and
monitor you configure, the choices are:
• HDMI
• DVI
• Component
• VGA
This setting is unavailable when you select Auto for the Enable setting.
Note: To disable HDMI output when using 3.5mm audio output, do the following. In the
web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Monitors and set the Monitor 1
Enable setting to Manual. At Video Format, select DVI.
Resolution
Specifies the resolution for the monitor.
Note: This setting is unavailable when you select Auto for the Enable setting.
Monitor Profiles and Video Layout Panel Views
Monitor Profiles set the preferences for which video layout panel views are shown on each monitor
connected to the system. You can customize the monitor configuration to match your environment or your
desired meeting experience.
The Monitor Profile settings are just preferences. What you see can vary depending on layout panel views,
whether content is being shown, the number of active monitors, and so on.
The layout view names provide hints on the priority of the panels. So, for example in the Content, then
Far, then Near layout view, the system displays the panels in this order: Content first, then any remote
speakers (Far), then the local camera (Near). The panel that is listed first is the largest panel. In this
example, the Content panel is larger than the far or the near panels.
Configure Monitor Profile Settings
You can configure monitor layout profile settings for each monitor connected to the RealPresence Group
system.
To configure monitor layout profile settings:
1 In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Monitors > Monitor Profile.
2 For each monitor connected to the system, you can configure the following settings.
Polycom, Inc.
95
Monitors and Cameras
Description
Monitor 1
Monitor 2
Monitor 3
(RealPresence Group
700 only)
Content, then
Far, then Near
Sets Monitors 1 or 2 to share
content. The system displays the
panels in this order of priority:
Content first in the largest panel,
then any remote speakers (Far),
then the local camera (Near).
Default for Monitor 1 if only one
monitor is connected to the
system.
Default for Monitor 2 if 2 or more
monitors are connected to the
system.
Yes
Yes
No
Far, then Near
Sets Monitor 1 or 2 to show the
far-end in the largest panel, then
the near-end. Default for Monitor
1 if there are 2 or more monitors
connected to the system.
Yes
Yes
No
Far Only
Sets Monitors 1, 2, or 3 to show
the far-end only.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Content, then
Near
Sets Monitor 2 to display shared
content in the larger panel. If no
content is displayed, the monitor
shows the person speaking at
the near-end.
No
Yes
No
Content, then
Far
Sets Monitors 1 or 2 to display
shared content in the larger
panel. If no content is shared, the
monitor displays the far-end
speaker panel only.
Yes
Yes
No
Content Only
Sets Monitor 2 or 3 to display
shared content as the only panel.
If no content is shared, the
monitor shows the room
background.
No
Yes
Yes
Near Only
Sets Monitor 2 or 3 to show the
near-end site only. Another name
for this view is Self View.
No
Yes
Yes
Monitor Profile
Name
Polycom, Inc.
96
Monitors and Cameras
Description
Monitor 1
Monitor 2
Monitor 3
(RealPresence Group
700 only)
Record Mode
Sets Monitor 3 to display shared
content or the person speaking.
Content sharing takes priority
over displaying the person
speaking.
Select this setting to record near,
far, and content audio. If
someone is sharing content, the
video is recorded in full screen. If
no one is sharing content, the
speaker is recorded in full
screen.
Available only on RealPresence
Group 700 systems.
No
No
Yes
Record Mode
With Content
Sets Monitor 3 to show the
current person speaking,
regardless of the speaker’s
location.
Select this setting to record near,
far, and content audio. Only the
speaker is recorded in full
screen.
Available only on RealPresence
Group 700 systems.
No
No
Yes
Monitor Profile
Name
The Automatic Self View setting can also affect what displays on the monitors. For more information, refer
to Configure Call Settings.
Touch Monitor User Interface
RealPresence Group systems have touch user interface capability when connected to touch-capable
monitors. The local user interface works with both touch interaction and the RealPresence Group system
remote control. When VisualBoard or Skype for Business content is playing, the touch is redirected to those
interfaces for control and annotation. When these tools are minimized to show the main user interface, or
when a notification comes up, touch is directed to the primary monitor so that user can control the user
interface.These are the supported monitor scenarios:
● Single touch monitor: If only one touch monitor is detected, touch interactions are enabled by default.
You can now interact with the primary user interface using touch. When VisualBoard or Skype for
Business content is playing, the touch is redirected to those interfaces for control and annotation.
When these tools are minimized to show the main user interface, or when a notification is displayed,
touch is directed to primary so that user can control the primary user interface.
● Two or more monitors: For multiple monitor setups, and if at least one monitor is touch, touch
interaction is not enabled by default.
 If the touch monitor is attached as primary, and is configured as a touch monitor, touch interaction
is enabled on that monitor to control the primary user interface.
Polycom, Inc.
97
Monitors and Cameras
 The Diagnostic configuration setting appears only if there is more than one monitor attached, and
there is at least one touch monitor attached.
Note: To enable the touch monitor interface on RealPresence Group 300 and RealPresence
Group 310 systems, you must activate the dual monitor option key in the system’s web
interface. For information on the activation procedure, refer to Software and System Option
Keys.
Configure Secondary Monitors for Content in a Multiple Touch Monitor
Environment
If you have a multiple monitor setup with more than one touch monitor, and you want to use touch to control
content on secondary monitors, you must configure settings on both the local and web interfaces. The
primary touch monitor is the one that you use to control the system’s local interface. Secondary monitors
are any additional monitors connected to the system. If only one touch monitor is connected to the system,
the following configuration steps are not necessary.
To configure secondary monitors for content:
1 In the local interface, use a remote control to navigate to
Touch Monitor > Configure.
> Settings > Administration >
2 Under Enable touch interaction on this monitor, click Start.
3 Click the screen on the area indicated.
The system recognizes the monitor as a touch monitor.
4 In the system’s web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Monitors.
5 For Monitor 1 at Enable, select Auto or Manual. At Monitor Profile, select Far, Then Near or Far
Only.
6 For Monitor 2, at Monitor Profile, select Content Only or one of the other content profiles.
If you have 3 monitors, follow the steps above for monitors 1 and 2 and select Far Only, Content
Only, or Near Only for monitor 3.
Now you can use the primary monitor to control the system’s local interface, and a secondary monitor
to show content.
Polycom, Inc.
98
Monitors and Cameras
Monitor Resolutions for the RealPresence Group
System Model Types
You might need to know the monitor resolutions for the particular RealPresence Group system that you are
using. The following tables provide resolution rates for the video standards NTSC and PAL for Monitor 1,
Monitor 2, and Monitor 3 (RealPresence Group 700 system only).
Monitor 1 Resolution Rates
RealPresence Group
System Type
NTSC Video Standard
PAL Video Standard
RealPresence Group
300/500
HDMI/DVI:1080p60, 720p60,
1080i60
HDMI/DVI: 1080p50, 720p50,
108050
RealPresence Group
700
HDMI/DVI: 1080p60, 720p60,
1080i60
HDMI/DVI: 1080p50, 720p50,
108050
VGA: 1080p60, 720p60
VGA: 1080p60, 720p60
Component: 1080p60, 720p60,
1080i60
Component: 1080p50, 720p50,
1080i50
Monitor 2 Resolution Rates
RealPresence Group
System Type
NTSC Video Standard
PAL Video Standard
RealPresence Group
300/500
HDMI/DVI: 1080p60,
1280x1024p60,720p60, 1080i60,
1024x768p60
HDMI/DVI: 1080p50,
1280x1024p60,720p50, 1080i50,
1024x768p60
RealPresence Group
700
HDMI/DVI: 1080p60, 1280x1024p60,720p60,
1080i60, 1024x768p60
HDMI/DVI: 1080p50,
1280x1024p60,720p50, 1080i50,
1024x768p60
VGA: 1080p60, 1280x1024p60, 720p60,
1024x768p60
VGA: 1080p60, 1280x1024p60,
720p60, 1024x768p60
Component: 1080p60, 720p 60, 1080i60
Component: 1080p50, 720p
50,1080i50
Polycom, Inc.
99
Monitors and Cameras
Monitor 3 Resolution Rates
RealPresence Group
System Type
RealPresence Group
700
NTSC Video Standard
PAL Video Standard
HDMI/DVI 1080p60, 1280x1024p
60,720p60, 1080i60, 1024x768p60
HDMI/DVI 1080p50,
1280x1024p60,720p50, 1080i50,
1024x768p60
VGA: 1080p60, 1280x1024p60, 720p60,
1024x768p60
VGA: 1080p50, 1280x1024p60,
720p60, 1024x768p60
Component: 1080p60, 720p 60, 1080i60
Component: 1080p50, 720p 50,
1080i50
Recording Calls with Polycom® RealPresence® Media
Suite
Users can use Polycom® RealPresence® Media Suite solution to record calls directly from the
RealPresence Group Series system, remotely log in to Polycom RealPresence Media Suite to record or live
stream calls, or use Monitor 3 for the RealPresence Group 700 system.
RealPresence Media Suite is an enterprise recording, streaming and video content management solution
that offers users and administrators a self-service user portal to record calls on RealPresence Group
systems.
Enable Recording Controls
After you enable RealPresence Media Suite for a system, users can record video calls, create a live stream,
and control recordings on the system. Once enabled, recording controls display on the system, and users
can initiate and control a recording using the remote control and the touch interface.
To enable RealPresence Media Suite recording for a system, an administrator must enter user credentials
for the system.
To enable recording controls:
1 In the web interface, navigate to Admin Settings > Servers > Recording Service.
2 Select the Enable RealPresence Media Suite check box.
3 Enter the user credentials and server address for the system’s RealPresence Media Suite account.
Recording Calls Remotely
From RealPresence Media Suite’s User Portal, any user can start recording, create a live stream event, and
share video files. The Polycom RealPresence Media Suite is also a streaming and recording system that
participates in standards-based video and telepresence calls.
The RealPresence Media Suite solution allows users to record and live stream a call by dialing into a system
from a RealPresence Media Suite portal. If users have access to a RealPresence Media Suite portal, they
can log in to the portal to dial in to a system from which they want to record a call. This method is also ideal
for an administrator of a remote system. For information about using this method, refer to the Polycom
Polycom, Inc.
100
Monitors and Cameras
RealPresence Media Suite, Appliance Edition User Guide or Polycom RealPresence Media Suite, Virtual
Edition User Guide at support.polycom.com.
Users of a system can also remotely record calls in the following ways:
● Dial RealPresence Media Suite directly: Use the default recording settings defined by a
RealPresence Media Suite administrator. Before recording a call using this method, users must
obtain the IP address, H.323 extension, or SIP URL of the RealPresence Media Suite.
● Dial a RealPresence Media Suite Video Recording Room (VRR): A VRR is a virtual capture server
with a specific recording profile that is defined by a RealPresence Media Suite administrator. Before
recording a call using this method, users must obtain the VRR number and the IP address, H.323 ID,
or SIP address of the RealPresence Media Suite.
When a recording is initiated remotely from the RealPresence Media Suite user portal, users cannot control
the recording from the system.
For more information on recording with these two methods, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group
Series User Guide.
Note: If you have access to a RealPresence Media Suite portal, you can use additional
features, such as copying the URL for a recording to share with others. For more features,
see the Polycom RealPresence Media Suite User Guide at support.polycom.com.
RealPresence Media Suite Connection Methods
The following connection methods are supported for dialing a RealPresence Media Suite.
Media Suite
Type
Media Suite
system
Polycom, Inc.
Connection Method
Example
If the both the RealPresence Group and the
RealPresence Media Suite system are not registered to
the gatekeeper or to a SIP server, dial the
RealPresence Media Suite IP address.
10.11.12.13
If both the RealPresence Group and the
RealPresence Media Suite system are registered to a
gatekeeper, dial the RealPresence Media Suite E.164
extension for H.323.
1234
If both the RealPresence Group and the
RealPresence Media Suite system are registered to a
SIP server, dial the RealPresence Media Suite SIP
address.
CS123
101
Monitors and Cameras
Media Suite
Type
VRR
Connection Method
Example
For H.323 calls:
[RealPresence Media Suite IP]##[VRR number]
or
[RealPresence Media Suite E.164 prefix][VRR number]
If the RealPresence Media Suite IP
is 11.12.13.14 and the VRR
number is 4096,dial
11.12.13.14##4096.
If the RealPresence Media Suite
E.164 prefix is 8888 and the VRR
number is 4096, dial 88884096.
For SIP calls:
[VRR number]@[RealPresence Media Suite IP]
or
[SIP peer prefix][VRR number]
If the RealPresence Media Suite IP
is 11.12.13.14 and the VRR
number is 4096, dial
4096@11.12.13.14.
If the SIP peer prefix of the
RealPresence Media Suite is 8888
and the VRR number is 4096, dial
88884096.
Enable Recording on a RealPresence Group System
You can use a RealPresence Group system to record the audio and video of a call.
To enable recording on a RealPresence Group 700 system:
1 In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Servers > Recording Service.
2 At Enable RealPresence Media Suite, select the checkbox.
3 Enter the connection information in the following settings.
Setting
Description
Domain Name
Enter the server domain name for RealPresence Media Suite.
User Name
Enter the server user name for RealPresence Media Suite.
Password
Enter the server password for RealPresence Media Suite.
Server Address
Enter the IP address for the RealPresence Media Suite server.
4 Click Save to save the connection settings.
Configure Monitor Settings for Recording on a RealPresence Group
700 System
You can configure monitor settings for recording on a RealPresence Group 700 system.
Polycom, Inc.
102
Monitors and Cameras
To configure monitor settings for recording:
1 In the system web interface, select Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Monitors.
2 Select one of the following settings for Monitor 3:
 Record Mode with Content. Select this setting to record what the speaker says, along with any
content audio. This records near, far, and content audio.
 Record Mode. Select this setting to record only what the speaker says. This records near, far,
and content audio.
Maximize HDTV Video Display
When you use a television as your monitor, some HDTV settings might interfere with the video display or
quality of your calls. To avoid this potential problem, disable all audio enhancements in the HDTV menu,
such as SurroundSound.
In addition, many HDTVs have a low-latency mode called Game Mode, which could lower video and audio
latency. Although Game Mode is typically turned off by default, you might have a better experience if you
turn it on.
Before attaching your RealPresence Group system to a TV monitor, ensure the monitor is configured to
display all available pixels. This setting, also known as “fit to screen” or “dot by dot,” enables the entire HD
image to be displayed. The specific name of the monitor setting varies by manufacturer.
Sleep Settings Prevent Monitor Burn-In
Monitors and RealPresence Group systems provide display settings to help prevent image burn-in. Plasma
televisions can be particularly vulnerable to this problem. Refer to your monitor’s documentation or
manufacturer for specific recommendations and instructions. The following guidelines help prevent image
burn-in:
● Ensure that static images are not displayed for long periods.
● Set the Time before system goes to sleep to 60 minutes or less.
● To keep the screen clear of static images during a call, disable the following settings:
 Display Icons in a Call (Admin Settings > General Settings > System Settings > Call
Settings)
 Show Time in Call (Admin Settings > General Settings > Date and Time > Time in Call)
● Be aware that meetings that last more than an hour without much movement can have the same
effect as a static image.
● Consider decreasing the monitor’s sharpness, brightness, and contrast settings if they are set to their
maximum values.
CEC Monitor Controls
Consumer Electronics Control (CEC) monitor controls allow administrators to wake up monitors and place
the RealPresence Group system on standby for power saving. You can enable CEC on external monitors
connected via HDMI, if they support the CEC protocol.
The following CEC features are available:
● One Touch Play–Use the system remote to wake up the monitors. All connected CEC-capable
monitors are powered on, and their displays are switched to room system input.
Polycom, Inc.
103
Monitors and Cameras
● System Standby–When the room system enters sleep mode, all connected CEC-capable monitors
are switched to standby mode for power saving. When waking up, the monitors are powered up
before they display system video.
Note the following points about using CEC controls with RealPresence Group systems:
● If you connect to the monitor with an HDMI splitter, ensure the HDMI splitter is CEC-capable. Due to
HDMI splitter limitations, monitors behind a 1xM (one-input multiple-output) HDMI splitter powers on,
but might not switch to the correct input when it wakes up.
● The room system does not respond to CEC commands issued by a television remote control.
● If a CEC-capable monitor is connected to a room system and another endpoint, the monitor displays
the active endpoint when the system is in standby mode.
Enabling Monitors to Support CEC
CEC functionality is enabled by default on RealPresence Group systems. All connected monitors must
support CEC, so that the feature can operate with RealPresence Group systems. Not all HDMI monitors
support CEC commands. Refer to the following list of CEC-enabled monitors: CEC-XBMC
To verify that CEC is enabled, navigate to your monitor CEC settings. Many monitors also have sub-feature
settings under the main CEC setting that control whether or not the monitor responds to CEC commands.
For example, CEC Auto Power Off controls whether or not the monitor powers off when receiving a CEC
standby command. Make sure to enable all CEC sub-features.
Note: Each monitor brand might have different CEC feature and sub-feature settings. Ensure that all
monitors connected to the RealPresence Group system are all enabled for CEC.
Enable CEC Controls
You can enable CEC on RealPresence Group systems.
To enable CEC controls:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Monitors > Consumer Electronics
Control.
2 At Enable Consumer Electronics Control, select the checkbox.
Disable CEC Controls
You can disable CEC on RealPresence Group systems.
To disable CEC controls:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Monitors > Consumer Electronics
Control.
2 At Enable Consumer Electronics Control, clear the checkbox to disable CEC.
Note: On the HDMI channel, the RealPresence Group system is identified as Polycom.
Polycom, Inc.
104
Monitors and Cameras
Polycom Cameras
RealPresence Group 700 systems provide inputs for multiple PTZ cameras. RealPresence Group 310 and
500 systems can support a second non-PTZ camera, but do not support camera control for a second
camera.
All Polycom cameras can receive IR signals. RealPresence Group systems have built-in IR receivers to
receive signals from the remote control. Point the remote control at the RealPresence Group system or your
Polycom camera to control it.
Polycom EagleEye IV
The Polycom EagleEye IV cameras are completely digital with a 4k sensor that is specifically designed to
work with RealPresence Group systems. They support 1080p60 resolution and are available with either 12x
or 4x zoom capabilities. Additional digital cables of 300mm, 457mm and 1m lengths are available.
These cameras also have an available privacy cover, wide-angle lens, and digital extender. For more
information, refer to Installing the Polycom EagleEye IV Wide Angle Lens, Setting Up the Polycom EagleEye
IV Cameras, Setting Up the Polycom EagleEye IV Camera Privacy Cover, and Setting Up the Polycom
EagleEye Digital Extender which are available at support.polycom.com.
Polycom EagleEye Acoustic
The Polycom EagleEye Acoustic camera can provide 1080p 25/30 fps resolution with embedded image
sensor processing (ISP) technology and has an auto focus lens system, two microphones for stereo audio
pickup, an IR detector, a status LED, and a captured HDCI cord for connection to the system.
Polycom® EagleEye™ Producer Camera
The Polycom® EagleEye™ Producer is a camera-peripheral technology that works with Polycom®
EagleEye™ III and IV cameras to provide room framing and participant counting. Using facial recognition
technology, the device continually scans the room and commands the movable camera to pan, tilt, and
zoom. EagleEye IV cameras are available with either 4x or 12x zoom capability. The EagleEye Producer
includes a ‘bunk bed’ mount for use with the universal camera mounting solution. Available accessories
include the EagleEye Digital Extender and the Digital Breakout Adapter.
When an EagleEye Producer is connected to a RealPresence Group system, camera tracking starts
automatically when you initiate a call and stops automatically when you hang up from a call. You can also
manually start camera tracking in the local interface of the RealPresence Group system. EagleEye Producer
Polycom, Inc.
105
Monitors and Cameras
detects the people in the room and sets up framing. You can set the tracking mode and speed, and specify
the type of group framing, which enables automatic tracking of group participants in the room and frames
the active speaker.
Polycom EagleEye Director
The EagleEye Director is a high-end automatic camera positioning system that works in conjunction with a
RealPresence Group system to provide accurate close-up views of the person who is speaking. The
EagleEye Director also provides smooth transitions between the close-up view of the person who is
speaking and the room view.
Note: The EagleEye Director is compatible with Polycom EagleEye III cameras.
The EagleEye Director uses a dual-camera system. While one camera tracks the person who is speaking,
the other camera captures the room view. The EagleEye Director shows the room view while the camera
moves from one speaker to another. When the tracking camera locates a person who is speaking, the
EagleEye Director camera switches to a close-up of that person. By providing automatic and intelligent
views in various speaking scenarios during a conference, the EagleEye Director delivers a user experience
similar to a newscast video production.
Connecting Cameras to RealPresence Group Systems
Refer to your system setup sheet and to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Integrator Reference
Guide for connection details. Refer to the release notes for a list of supported PTZ cameras. If you connect
a supported PTZ camera, the system detects the camera type and sets the appropriate configuration.
Ensure that the system is powered off before you connect devices to it.
Note: Do not connect more than one EagleEye Director to a single RealPresence Group system.
Powering Cameras with RealPresence Group Systems
The RealPresence Group systems can provide power to the EagleEye III and EagleEye IV cameras through
an HDCI connector. The cameras do not require any additional power supply or IR extender. However, the
RealPresence Group 700 system supports a low-power standard that limits the power supplied to the
Polycom, Inc.
106
Monitors and Cameras
camera when the system is powered off. So, if the camera is receiving its power only from the HDCI
connector attached to the system, it does not have an active IR receiver capable of powering on the
RealPresence Group system using the handheld remote.
If the camera IR is the only exposed IR and you normally power the system on and off with the remote
control, use one of these solutions:
● Provide direct power to the EagleEye III or EagleEye IV camera with the elective EagleEye camera
power supply, 1465-52748-040. This allows the IR sensor to remain powered on, so that the camera
is capable of receiving IR commands from the remote control.
● Position the RealPresence Group system so that the IR receiver on the front of the system has a
line-of-sight to the remote control.
● Use a third-party IR extender to extend the IR signal from the room to the IR receiver on the front of
the RealPresence Group system.
Sleep and Wake States for Cameras
The RealPresence Group systems support sleep and wake states in which the system provides power to
the EagleEye IV or EagleEye III camera. This allows the cameras to wake from a Sleep state through a
signal received by the camera's IR sensor. The camera does not require any additional power supply or IR
extender.
Configuring Camera Settings
For an illustrated view of the inputs and outputs available for each system, refer to System Panel Views.
Although you can connect devices that are not automatically discovered, the available choices in the
interface might not be the same as they would for automatically discovered devices. For example, if you
connect an unsupported camera, the system attempts to show video. Polycom does not guarantee that the
results will be optimal or that you can set up the camera the same as for a supported camera.
Configure Camera and Video Settings
You can configure camera settings for cameras connected to your system.
To configure camera settings:
» In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs. Configure the following
settings as needed:
Polycom, Inc.
107
Monitors and Cameras
Configure General Camera Settings
Setting
Description
Allow Other Participants In a
Call to Control Your Camera
Specifies whether the far site can pan, tilt, or zoom the near-site camera.
When this setting is selected, a user at the far site can control the framing and
angle of the camera for the best view of the near site. This is sometimes also
called Far End Camera Control (FECC).
Power Frequency
Specifies the power line frequency for your system.
In most cases, the system defaults to the correct power line frequency, based
on the video standard used in the country where the system is located. This
setting allows you to adapt the system in areas where the power line frequency
does not match the video standard used. You might need to change this
setting to avoid flicker from the fluorescent lights in your conference room.
Make This Camera Your Main
Camera
Specifies which is the primary camera. You specify the main camera when you
set up the system, but you can change that selection here.
Input 1 is typically your main camera.
Enable People+Content™ IP
Enables the ability to use the People+Content IP application.
Enable Camera Preset
Snapshot Icons
Enables the use of snapshot icons that represent camera preset
configurations. The default setting is controlled by the Security Profile, but you
can change the default here.
If you change your security profile setting from Low or Medium to High or
Maximum, or if you disable the setting, the RealPresence Group system
replaces each preset image with a blue, striped box. Presets that have not
been configured show as empty rectangles.
When you disable the Enable Camera Preset Snapshot Icons setting in the
web interface, the blue, striped boxes in the local interface show you which
presets are configured, but enabling the setting does not redisplay the
snapshot icons. You can see snapshot icons that represent preset
configuration images only when you configure a preset with the Enable
Camera Preset Snapshot Icons setting enabled.
Configuring Video Input Settings
Settings for each video input connected to your room system are available in the system web interface at
Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs.
Note: Settings that don’t apply to the selected video input are not displayed. For example, if a specific
camera is not connected to your room system, the related settings are not displayed.
To configure video input settings:
» Configure the following video input settings for your system.
Polycom, Inc.
108
Monitors and Cameras
Setting
Description
Enable
Specifies the video input type. You can also choose to Auto select the video
input type.
For RealPresence Group 300/310/500 systems, Input 1 is always HDCI, so
the Enable setting is not displayed.
Note: RealPresence Group 300 systems have only one video input.
RealPresence Group 310 systems and RealPresence Group 500 systems
have two video inputs, but only HDMI and VGA are allowed for the second
input.
Model
Displays the type of device using the video input port.
Name
Displays the default name of the video input, but you can enter your own name
for the device.
Display as
Specifies whether the video input is to be used for People or Content.
The selection you make here determines the available settings for the device
in the embedded interface. For example, a People source has settings for PTZ
and near/far camera control, but a Content source has different settings.
Input format
Specifies the source type of the device. This setting is read only unless the
system does not detect the device.
Orientation
Specifies the orientation of the camera. You can choose one of the following
camera positions:
• Normal— This default setting is a non-inverted camera orientation.
• Inverted—This is an upside-down camera orientation.
Note: This setting is available only when you have installed an EagleEye IV
camera. To learn how to enable the setting, refer to EagleEye IV Camera
Orientation.
Optimized for
Specifies Motion or Sharpness for the video input.
• Motion—This setting is for showing people or other video with motion.
• Sharpness—The picture will be sharp and clear, but moderate to heavy
motion at low call rates can cause some frames to be dropped. Sharpness
is available in point-to-point H.263 and H.264 calls only. It is required for HD
calls between 512 kbps and 2 Mbps.
Tracking Mode (EagleEye
Director)
Specifies the type of camera tracking:
• Voice—Tracks the speaker. When another speaker starts talking, the view
switches from the first speaker to the room, then to the next speaker.
• Direct Cut—Tracks directly from speaker to speaker if silence intervals are
less than 3 seconds. You must recalibrate the left camera when you select
Direct Cut mode.
If camera tracking has not been calibrated, Tracking Mode is unavailable.
Note: Setting is available only when you have installed an EagleEye Producer.
Tracking Speed (EagleEye
Director)
Determines how quickly the system finds someone new and switches to that
person.
Note: Setting is available only when you have installed an EagleEye Producer.
Polycom, Inc.
109
Monitors and Cameras
Setting
Description
Backlight Compensation
Specifies whether to have the camera automatically adjust for a bright
background. Backlight compensation is best used in situations where the
subject appears darker than the background.
Enabling this setting helps to relieve a bright background, which can impact
the tracking performance of the EagleEye Director.
White Balance
Specifies how the camera compensates for variations in room light sources.
Select Auto, Manual, or a color temperature value.
• Auto - Polycom recommends this setting for most situations. It calculates
the best white balance setting based upon lighting conditions in the room.
• Manual - Use this setting for rooms where the Auto and fixed values do not
provide acceptable color reproduction.
 After you set the White Balance to Manual, fill the camera’s field of
view with a flat white object, such as a piece of paper. For best results,
the object should be uniformly illuminated with light that is
representative of the room lighting that will be used in the conference,
rather than light from a display, another area, or a shadow. After the
object is in place, click Calibrate.
• Color Temperature Value - The color temperature values, measured in
degrees Kelvin, correspond to the color of ambient light in a room. Because
the available color temperature values vary by camera, this list is a
sampling of some of the values you might see in the interface:
• 3200 K (tungsten bulb)
• 3680 K (warm office fluorescent)
• 4160 K (cool office fluorescent)
• 5120 K (neutral daylight)
• 5600 K (cool daylight)
Brightness
Provides a slider to adjust how bright the image is.
Color Saturation
Provides a slider to adjust how saturated the color is.
Tracking Mode (Polycom
EagleEye Producer)
Specifies the tracking mode:
• Frame Speaker - This is the default setting. Enables automatic tracking of
group participants in the room and frames the active speaker. Note that
when the tracking mode is set to Frame Speaker and the local microphone
is muted, the camera tracking mode automatically switches to Frame
Group.
• Frame Group - Enables automatic tracking and framing of the group
participants in the room without displaying the camera motion between
frames.
• Frame Group with Transition - Enables automatic tracking and framing of
the group of participants in the room.
• Off - Disables automatic tracking. All camera control must be handled
manually.
Note: Setting is available only when you have installed an EagleEye
Producer.
Polycom, Inc.
110
Monitors and Cameras
Setting
Description
Tracking Speed (Polycom
EagleEye Producer)
Specifies the tracking speed:
• Slow - Detects meeting participants at a slow speed rate.
• Normal - This is the default tracking speed. Detects meeting participants at
a normal speed rate.
• Fast - Detects meeting participants at a fast speed rate.
Note: Setting is available only when you have installed an EagleEye
Producer.
Framing Size (Polycom
EagleEye Producer)
Specifies the group framing view:
• Wide - Establishes a wide view of meeting participants.
• Medium - This is the default group framing view. Establishes a medium
view of meeting participants.
•
Automatic Image Calibration
Tight - Establishes a close-up view of meeting participants.
EagleEye Producer can detect the position of a person within six meters or
less.
Note: Setting is available only when you have installed an EagleEye
Producer.
Specifies the EagleEye Producer to automatically calibrate its integrated
camera and an attached EagleEye camera. This is important when the
cameras are projecting images that are not aligned.
For details about using EagleEye Producer, refer to the Polycom EagleEye Producer User Guide at
support.polycom.com.
Configure a Third-Party Camera
The RealPresence Group systems support some third-party cameras. For a list of supported third-party
cameras and their connectors, see the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Integrator Reference Guide.
If your camera has a breakout cable that allows the video to be connected to the HDCI port, you can get the
serial data to and from the camera.
To configure a third-party camera:
1 Use the HDCI port:
a On the system’s back panel, connect the camera to the HDCI video input port.
b In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs and configure the
settings.
2 Use the external serial port:
a On the system’s back panel, connect the camera to the serial port.
b In the web interface, select Admin Settings > General Settings > Serial Ports.
c For the RS-232 Mode setting, select Camera Control to enable the external serial port.
d Configure the Serial Port Options. Use the following settings:
Polycom, Inc.
111
Monitors and Cameras
Setting
Value
Baud Rate
9600
Parity
None
Data Bits
8
Stop Bits
1
RS-232 Flow Control
None
You can use the external serial port with any one of the following video inputs:
RealPresence Group System
Video Input 1
Video Input 2
Video Input 3
Video Input 4
RealPresence Group 300 System
Yes
N/A
N/A
N/A
RealPresence Group 310 System
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
RealPresence Group 500 System
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
RealPresence Group 700 System
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Note: Some cameras come with a breakout cable that allows you to use the camera with the HDCI
serial port. If you use the HDCI serial port, the cable has embedded serial capabilities, so you can use
either method mentioned in this section to connect the camera. However, if you connect a camera to
a Composite or HDMI port on the RealPresence Group system, you must control the camera through
the external serial port.
EagleEye IV Camera Orientation
After you have connected your EagleEye IV camera, you might want to change the camera’s orientation.
EagleEye IV cameras can be mounted upside down to accommodate special video conferencing situations.
The orientation of the video display and pan/tilt functions work transparently so that the inverted position is
transparent to end users. The default orientation is normal, or not inverted.
Enable an Inverted Camera Position for the EagleEye IV Camera
You might want to invert the EagleEye IV camera in your environment.
To enable the inverted mount camera position:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs, and choose EagleEye
IV camera.
2 At Orientation, select Inverted and click Save.
Enable a Normal Camera Position
You might want to disable the inverted camera position in your environment.
Polycom, Inc.
112
Monitors and Cameras
To enable the normal camera position:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs, and choose EagleEye
IV camera.
2 At Orientation, select Normal and click Save.
For other EagleEye IV video input setting details, refer to Configuring Video Input Settings.
Setting Up the EagleEye Producer
Information on required cables and how to set up EagleEye Producer are included in Set Up the Polycom
EagleEye Producer. Additional information is available in the Polycom RealPresence Group Series
Integrator Reference Manual. Both documents are located at support.polycom.com.
You can connect one EagleEye Producer to a RealPresence Group system at a time. Multiple EagleEye Producer
connections are not supported.
Updating EagleEye Producer with RealPresence Group Systems
Updates to Polycom EagleEye Producer software are included with the RealPresence Group system
software updates. To update your EagleEye Producer, connect it to the system before you run a software
update. The software update program detects the EagleEye Producer and updates it if necessary. No
license number or key code is needed to update the EagleEye Producer.
Note: The software for an EagleEye IV camera can now be updated when the camera is
attached to a RealPresence Group system with an EagleEye Producer. This feature is
automatic and does not require any configuration or intervention.
EagleEye Producer must run a software version that is compatible with the RealPresence Group system
software version. For more information on supported versions, go to
http://support.polycom.com/PolycomService/support/us/support/service_policies.html and click the
Current Polycom Interoperability Matrix link.
Change Camera Tracking Settings
The Polycom EagleEye Producer detects the people in the room and provides framing during a conference.
Frame Speaker with a Normal tracking speed and Medium view is enabled by default.
Polycom recommends calibrating the Polycom EagleEye Producer before adjusting camera features. For
instructions on how to calibrate the Polycom EagleEye Producer, refer to the Polycom RealPresence
EagleEye Producer User Guide at support.polycom.com.
To change camera tracking settings:
1 Do one of the following:
 In the local interface of the RealPresence Group Series system, go to
Administration > Camera Tracking > Settings.
> Settings >
 In the web interface of the RealPresence Group Series system, go to Admin Settings >
Audio/Video > Video Inputs> General Camera Settings and select the input used by the
Polycom EagleEye Producer.
Polycom, Inc.
113
Monitors and Cameras
2 Configure the following settings.
Setting
Description
Tracking Mode
Specifies the tracking mode:
• Frame Speaker - This is the default setting. During a conference, this mode
frames the active speaker, then when someone else starts speaking, the camera
view changes to frame the new speaker. Note that when the tracking mode is set
to Frame Speaker and the local microphone is muted, the camera tracking mode
automatically switches to Frame Group.
• Frame Group - Enables automatic tracking and framing of the group participants
in the room without displaying the camera motion between frames.
• Frame Group with Transition - Enables automatic tracking and framing of the
group of participants in the room.
• Off - Disables automatic tracking. All camera control must be handled manually.
Tracking Speed
Specifies the tracking speed:
• Slow - Detects meeting participants at a slow speed rate.
• Normal - This is the default tracking speed. Detects meeting participants at a
normal speed rate.
• Fast - Detects meeting participants at a fast speed rate.
Framing Size
Specifies the framing view:
• Wide - Establishes a wide view of meeting participants.
• Medium - This is the default group framing view. Establishes a medium view
of meeting participants.
•
Tight - Establishes a close-up view of meeting participants.
Turn on Camera Tracking for the EagleEye Producer
You can turn on camera tracking in the local interface. If camera tracking is enabled, when you start a call,
camera tracking starts automatically; when you end a call, camera tracking stops automatically.
To turn on camera tracking:
» In the local interface of the RealPresence Group system, go to Camera and select Camera Tracking
On.
Turn Off camera Tracking for the EagleEye Producer
You can turn off camera tracking in the local interface.
To turn off camera tracking:
» In the local interface of the RealPresence Group system, go to Camera and select Camera Tracking
Off.
Note: After a call ends, camera tracking stops automatically and group framing is disabled.
Polycom, Inc.
114
Monitors and Cameras
Automatically Calibrate the EagleEye Producer
You can configure the EagleEye Producer to automatically calibrate its integrated camera and an attached
EagleEye IV camera. This is important when the cameras are projecting images that are not aligned.
To enable auto calibration:
1 Attach the EagleEye camera to the EagleEye Producer, as shown in Setting Up the Polycom
EagleEye Producer.
2 Ensure that camera tracking is enabled, as described in Change Camera Tracking Settings.
3 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs > Input [input
number], and select the Automatic Image Calibration checkbox.
View System Status for the EagleEye Producer
You might need to view the system status of an EagleEye Producer on a RealPresence Group system
interface.
To view system status for an EagleEye Producer:
» Do one of the following:
 In the local interface of the system, go to Settings> System Information> Status.
 In the web interface of the system, go to Diagnostics > System > System Status.
If a Polycom EagleEye Producer is connected, the connection status displays. If the camera is not
connected or is not selected as the current camera source, this choice is not visible on the screen.
To view more information about Polycom EagleEye Producer, select More Info.
For more information about using EagleEye Producer, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series
User Guide on support.polycom.com.
Configure the Polycom EagleEye Director
You can use the remote control or web interface to configure the EagleEye Director. You cannot configure
the EagleEye Director using a Polycom touch device, but you can start and stop camera tracking.
For detailed setup instructions, refer to Set up the Polycom EagleEye Director on support.polycom.com.
To set up the EagleEye Director:
1 Power on the EagleEye Director.
You can verify that the device is detected and compatible with the RealPresence Group system’s
software on the System Status screen. Do one of the following:
 In the local interface, go to Settings > System Information > Status > EagleEye Director.
 In the web interface, go to Diagnostics > System > System Status > EagleEye Director.
As long as you see EagleEye Director among the status settings, the device has been detected.
2 Calibrate the cameras. Refer to Calibrate the EagleEye Director Cameras for instructions. If you
notice that the speaker is not framed accurately, ensure that the vertical bar of the EagleEye
Director is vertical. Placing the EagleEye Director on a horizontal surface can help to ensure that the
vertical bar is vertical. You might also need to recalibrate the cameras.
Polycom, Inc.
115
Monitors and Cameras
3 Adjust the room view. For details, refer to Adjust the Room View of the EagleEye Director.
Note: When the system first detects the EagleEye Director, a calibration wizard starts. If the EagleEye
Director is not detected, try one of the following solutions:
• Ensure all cables are tightly plugged in, then attempt camera detection again. If you are using
EagleEye Director version 1.0 software, you might need to ensure that the ball stubs are tightly
pressed into the hole on the base after checking the cables.
• Restart the RealPresence Group system.
• Manually power off the EagleEye Director by unplugging its power supply and unplugging the HDCI
cable from the RealPresence Group system. Then power on the EagleEye Director, plug the HDCI
cable into the RealPresence Group system, and attempt camera detection again.
Calibrate the EagleEye Director Cameras
In Voice Tracking mode, you only need to calibrate the right camera. In Direct Cut mode, calibrate the right
camera and then left one.
To calibrate the cameras:
1 Do one of the following:
 In the local interface, go to
> Settings > Administration > Camera Tracking > Calibration.
 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs and select Calibrate
Voice Tracking.
2 Follow the directions in the Auto Calibration screen that appears. When you click Start,
auto-calibration begins. When the automatic process ends, you have these choices:
 Yes, I see a green box around my mouth. Selecting this choice means auto-calibration was
successful and you can move forward with adjusting the room view, if you like.
 No, I see a green box, but it is not around my mouth. Selecting this choice means you can try
auto-calibration again or manually calibrate the camera.
 No, I do not see a box at all. Selecting this choice means you must manually calibrate the
camera.
3 If necessary, follow these steps to manually calibrate the camera:
a Use the arrow buttons and zoom controls on the remote control or web interface to zoom
completely in, then aim the camera at your mouth.
b Select Begin Calibration or Start and follow the onscreen instructions until a message displays
indicating successful calibration.
Note: Ensure that only one person speaks while you are calibrating the cameras and keep the
background quiet. If you rearrange or move the EagleEye Director, recalibrate it.
If you cannot successfully calibrate the cameras, ensure that all seven EagleEye Director tracking
microphones are working correctly. Five of those microphones are horizontal and two are vertical reference
audio microphones. Calibration fails if any of the microphones do not work. For ways to test microphone
functionality, refer to the Camera Tracking settings in Diagnostics, Status, and Utilities.
Polycom, Inc.
116
Monitors and Cameras
Adjust the Room View of the EagleEye Director
You can adjust the room view to get the best perspective for your video calls.
To adjust the room view:
1 Do one of the following:
 From the local interface, go to
> Settings > Administration > Camera Tracking >
Calibration, and then select Begin Calibration.
 From the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs, and then select
the Input used by the EagleEye Director.
2 Do one of the following:
 In the local interface, select Skip to move to the Adjust Room View screen.
 In the web interface, select Adjust Room View.
3 Use the arrow buttons and zoom controls on the remote control or web interface to show the room
view you want far site participants to see.
4 Select Finish to save the settings and return to the Camera Settings screen.
Enable Camera Tracking with EagleEye Director
If EagleEye Director tracking is enabled, the camera follows the person or people who are speaking. This
tracking action, also called automatic camera positioning, can be manually started.
To enable camera tracking:
» Do one of the following:
 In the local interface, go to
> Settings > Administration > Camera Tracking > Settings.
 For the Tracking Mode setting, select Voice.
This is the default tracking mode. In this mode, the camera automatically tracks the current
speaker in the room using a voice tracking algorithm.
When you select the Voice Tracking Mode, you can also choose the Tracking Speed. This
speed determines how quickly the camera moves to each person who speaks. The default
speed is Normal.
If voice tracking does not work as expected, make sure the microphones are functioning
properly. For ways to test microphone functionality, refer to the Camera Tracking settings in
Diagnostics, Status, and Utilities.
 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs, and then select the
Input used by the EagleEye Director.
 Enable the Use Voices to Track People setting.
 If the RealPresence Group system is paired with a Polycom touch device, follow these steps:
1
On the touch device, touch Cameras on the Home screen or the Call screen.
2
If the EagleEye Director is not currently selected, select it.
3
Touch Select Cameras and select the EagleEye Director camera.
4
Touch Control Camera.
5
Select Start Camera Tracking.
Polycom, Inc.
117
Monitors and Cameras
Disable Camera Tracking with EagleEye Director
You can manually stop EagleEye Director tracking, which is also called automatic camera positioning.
To disable camera tracking:
» Do one of the following:
 In the local interface, go to
> Settings > Administration > Camera Tracking > Settings.
 For the Tracking Mode setting, select Off.
In this mode, the tracking function is disabled. You must manually move the camera using the
remote control or a touch device.
 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs, and then select the
Input used by the EagleEye Director.
 Disable the Use Voices to Track People setting.
 If the RealPresence Group system is paired with a Polycom touch device, touch Cameras on the
Home screen or the Call screen and select Stop Camera Tracking.
EagleEye Director Camera Tracking in the Local Interface
You can start or stop camera tracking in the local interface. Whether you are or are not in a call, go to Menu
> Cameras and select Start Camera Tracking or Stop Camera Tracking.
Camera tracking can also start or stop automatically, based on the following actions:
● Camera tracking starts automatically when you make a call.
● Camera tracking stops after you hang up a call.
● Camera tracking temporarily stops when you mute the RealPresence Group system in a call. It
resumes when you unmute the system. If camera tracking is disabled, pressing Mute on the remote
control does not affect tracking.
Note: Tracking performance can be affected by room lighting. If the room is too bright for camera
tracking to work properly, you can improve the tracking performance by adjusting the Backlight
Compensation setting on the Cameras screen. To find this setting in the web interface, go to Admin
Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs and select the appropriate Input. For more hints on setting
up the EagleEye Director, see Configure the Polycom EagleEye Director.
Camera Presets
Camera presets are stored camera positions that you can create in the local interface before or during a
call. Presets allow you to do the following:
● Automatically point a camera at pre-defined locations in a room.
● Select a video source.
If your camera supports pan, tilt, and zoom movement, and it is set to People, you can create up to 10 preset
camera positions for it using the remote control or a touch device, such as the RealPresence Touch. Each
preset stores the camera number, its zoom level, and the direction it points (if appropriate).
If a Polycom touch device is paired with a RealPresence Group system, you must use the touch device to
create presets. For more information about creating and using presets, refer to the Polycom RealPresence
Group Series User Guide or the Polycom RealPresence Group Series and the Polycom Touch Control User
Polycom, Inc.
118
Monitors and Cameras
Guide. Once presets are in place, you can view them in the web interface by going to Utilities > Tools >
Remote Monitoring.
Note: If you use a EagleEye Director with your RealPresence Group system, you cannot use presets
for voice tracking.
Configure FECC on a Far-end Site Camera
If far-end camera control (FECC) is allowed, you can create 10 presets for a far-site camera. These presets
are saved only for the duration of the call. You might also be able to use presets created at the far site to
control the far-site camera.
To configure FECC on the far-end site camera:
» In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs > General Camera
Settings and select Allow Other Participants in a Call to Control Your Camera.
For details on how to create camera presets, or how to move a camera to a stored preset, refer to the
Polycom RealPresence Group Series User Guide.
Polycom, Inc.
119
Microphones and Speakers
To receive and send audio, you must connect and configure both microphones and speakers. This section
contains placement information for various audio inputs and speakers. It also covers audio settings
available from the system web interface.
● Available Microphone Inputs by System
● Audio Input Tips by Microphone Type
● Audio Input Configuration Selections
● Audio Output
● Configure Audio Settings
● Test StereoSurround
● Acoustic Fence Technology
For specific details regarding how to connect audio inputs and speakers, refer to the appropriate
RealPresence Group system setup sheet and System Panel Views. For information about required audio
cables, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Integrator Reference Guide.
Available Microphone Inputs by System
The number of audio inputs varies based on the RealPresence Group system you are using.
As shown in the following figures, the RealPresence Group 300, RealPresence Group 310, and
RealPresence Group 500 systems have one microphone input, while the RealPresence Group 700 system
has two. You can freely configure the way you connect devices to a system, as long as you do not exceed
the limits mentioned in the following sections. If you are using the RealPresence Group 700 system, you
can connect devices to either or both inputs as long as you stay within the guidelines for the total number
of devices allowed for the system.
RealPresence Group 300, 310, and 500 microphone inputs
.
RealPresence Group 700 microphone inputs
Polycom, Inc.
120
Microphones and Speakers
Audio Input Tips by Microphone Type
Make sure that the RealPresence Group system is powered off before you connect audio devices to it.
Polycom RealPresence Group System Table or Ceiling Microphone Arrays
Polycom microphone arrays contain three microphone elements for 360° coverage. You can connect
multiple Polycom microphone arrays to a RealPresence Group system.
For the best audio experience, do the following:
● Place the microphone array on a hard, flat surface (table, wall, or ceiling) away from obstructions, so
the sound will be directed into the microphone elements properly.
● Place the microphone array near the people closest to the monitor.
● In large conference rooms, consider using more than one microphone array. Each Polycom
microphone array covers a 3-6 foot radius, depending on the noise level and acoustics in the room.
The following table describes the behavior of the microphone lights on a Polycom table microphone.
Polycom EagleEye Acoustic Microphones
EagleEye Acoustic cameras include built-in stereo microphones. The following tips can help you achieve
the best audio when using these cameras:
● Enable Polycom StereoSurround.
● Place the camera at least 1 foot away from any walls to minimize boundary effects.
● Ensure that the people speaking are no more than 7 feet away from the EagleEye Acoustic camera.
The maximum distance covered depends on the noise level and acoustics in the room. If you connect
a Polycom microphone, Polycom SoundStation® conference phone, or Polycom SoundStructure® to
the room system microphone input while an EagleEye Acoustic camera is connected to the system,
the camera’s built-in microphones are automatically disabled.
● Polycom recommends connecting other audio input devices in conference rooms larger than 12 feet
by 15 feet.
Polycom SoundStation IP 7000 Conference Phone
When you connect a Polycom SoundStation IP 7000 conference phone to a Polycom RealPresence Group
system, the conference phone becomes another way to dial audio or video calls. The conference phone
also operates as a microphone, and as a speaker in audio-only calls. For more information, refer to the
following documents at support.polycom.com:
● Polycom SoundStation IP 7000 Conference Phone Connected to a Polycom RealPresence Group
System in Unsupported VoIP Environments Integration Guide
● Polycom SoundStation IP 7000 Conference Phone Connected to a Polycom RealPresence Group
System in Unsupported VoIP Environments User Guide
Audio Input Configuration Selections
You can use a variety of audio inputs with your RealPresence Group system. See the following sections to
determine what audio inputs work with your system. For tips specific to the type of audio input you use, refer
to Configure Audio Input Settings.
Polycom, Inc.
121
Microphones and Speakers
Microphone Inputs for RealPresence Group 300/310
RealPresence Group 300 and RealPresence Group 310 systems can support any of the following devices:
● Two RealPresence Group microphone arrays or two Polycom HDX microphone arrays
● One SoundStation IP 7000 conference phone and one RealPresence Group or Polycom HDX
microphone array
● One SoundStructure C-Series device and up to four RealPresence Group or Polycom HDX
microphone arrays
● EagleEye Acoustic with microphones enabled
Microphone Inputs for RealPresence Group 500/700
RealPresence Group 500 and RealPresence Group 700 systems can support any of the following devices:
● Four Polycom RealPresence Group microphone arrays or three Polycom HDX microphone arrays
● One SoundStation IP 7000 conference phone and two RealPresence Group or Polycom HDX
microphone arrays
● One SoundStructure C-Series device and up to four RealPresence Group or Polycom HDX
microphone arrays
● EagleEye Acoustic with microphones enabled
Third-Party Microphones
You can connect third-party microphones directly to audio input 1 on a RealPresence Group system, or
through a line-level mixer to the AUX audio input on any RealPresence Group system. For information about
configuring third-party microphones, refer to Set Up Third-party Microphones.
SoundStructure Digital Mixer
You can connect several microphones to a system through a Polycom audio mixer. Connecting a Polycom
audio mixer to room systems provides flexibility in audio setup. The SoundStructure C-Series mixer
connects to the digital microphone connector on a RealPresence Group system, and no configuration is
necessary.
When incorporating a SoundStructure digital mixer, remember the following:
● Connect a SoundStructure digital mixer using the digital microphone input on the room system.
● Adjusting the volume on a room system changes the volume of the SoundStructure digital mixer that
is connected.
● The following configuration settings are not available on a RealPresence Group system when a
SoundStructure digital mixer is connected: Audio input 1 (Line In), Bass, Treble, Enable Polycom
Microphones, Enable MusicMode™, and Enable Keyboard Noise Reduction.
● The system Line Output is muted when a SoundStructure digital mixer is connected.
● All echo cancellation is performed by the SoundStructure digital mixer.
The digital mixer allows you to provide a microphone for each call participant in a boardroom. For connection
details, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Integrator Reference Guide.
Polycom, Inc.
122
Microphones and Speakers
Polycom Microphone Placement to Send Stereo from Your Site
You can use up to 2 microphones with RealPresence Group 300 and 310 systems, and up to 4 microphones
with the RealPresence 500 and 700 systems. The following illustrations show microphone placement
examples for different room layouts.
Number of
Microphones
with Stereo
Enabled
Long Table
Wide Table
One
Mic 1 set to
Left+Right
Mic 1 set to
Left+Right
Two
Mic 1 set to
Left+Right
Mic 2 set to
Left+Right
Mic 1 set to Left
Mic 2 set to
Right
Three
Mic 1 set to
Left+Right
Mic 2 set to
Left+Right
Mic 3 set to
Left+Right
Mic 1 set to Left
Mic 2 set to
Left+Right
Mic 3 set to
Right
Polycom, Inc.
123
Microphones and Speakers
Number of
Microphones
with Stereo
Enabled
Four
Long Table
Wide Table
Mic 1 set to
Left+Right
Mic 2 set to
Left+Right
Mic 3 set to
Left+Right
Mic 4 set to
Left+Right
Mic 1 set to Left
Mic 2 set to Left
Mic 3 set to
Right
Mic 4 set to
Right
Not Used
Left Channel
Right
Left and right channel assignments depend on the settings that you select on the Stereo Settings screen. If
Autorotation is enabled for a microphone, the system automatically assigns active channels for the
microphone. Make sure that microphones with Autorotation disabled are oriented as shown in the following
illustration.
After you place the microphones, you will need to configure the system to send stereo as described in Stereo
Settings.
Audio Output
You must connect at least one speaker to the RealPresence Group systems to hear audio. You can use the
speakers built into the main monitor, or you can connect an external speaker system, such as the Polycom
StereoSurround kit, to provide more volume and richer sound in large rooms.
When you connect a SoundStation IP 7000 conference phone to a RealPresence Group system, the
conference phone becomes another way to dial audio or video calls. The conference phone also operates
as a microphone, and as a speaker in audio-only calls.
Refer to your system setup sheet for connection details. Make sure that the system is powered off before
you connect devices to it. For more information about connecting speakers to RealPresence Group
systems, refer to System Panel Views.
Polycom, Inc.
124
Microphones and Speakers
Speaker Placement to Receive Stereo from Far Sites
The Polycom StereoSurround kit is designed for use with RealPresence Group systems. It includes two
speakers and a subwoofer.
When a RealPresence Group system is configured for Polycom StereoSurround, the audio inputs and
outputs are all treated as stereo. Otherwise, all audio inputs and outputs are mono.
When you set up the system for StereoSurround, the left microphone and speaker should be on the left from
the local room perspective. Place the speaker connected to the audio system’s right channel on the right
side of the system, and the other speaker on the left side. The system reverses the left and right channels
for the far site, as shown in the following illustration. This ensures that the sound comes from the appropriate
side of the room.
For best results, place the speakers about 60° apart as seen from the center of the conference table, as
shown next.
Left
Right
Sending stereo
Right
Left
Receiving stereo
If you use the subwoofer in the Polycom StereoSurround kit, place it beside a wall or in a corner near the
speakers, as shown next.
Left
speaker
Connect
to left
audio
output
Polycom, Inc.
Right speaker
Connect to
right audio
output (red)
125
Microphones and Speakers
Set the Speaker Volume
You can set and test the volume of external speakers attached to your room system.
To set the volume of an external speaker system:
1 Do one of the following:
 In the local interface, go to Settings > System Information > Diagnostics > Speaker Test.
 In the web interface, go to Diagnostics > Audio and Video Tests > Speaker Test.
2 Click Start to start the speaker test.
3 Adjust the volume of the speaker system. From the center of the room the test tone should be as
loud as a person speaking loudly, about 80-90 dBA on a sound pressure level meter.
4 Click Stop to stop the speaker test.
Configure Audio Settings
You can configure audio settings in the web interface. Some audio settings are unavailable when a
SoundStructure digital mixer is connected to the RealPresence Group system. For more information, refer to Configure
Audio Output Settings.
To configure audio settings:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Audio.
2 Configure the Audio settings described in the following table.
Setting
Description
Polycom StereoSurround
Specifies that Polycom StereoSurround is used for all calls.
To send or receive stereo audio, make sure your RealPresence Group system is
set up as described in Available Microphone Inputs by System and Audio Output.
Sound Effects Volume
Sets the volume level of the ring tone and user alert tones.
Ringtone
Specifies the ring tone used for incoming calls.
User Alert Tones
Specifies the tone used for user alerts.
Audio Mute auto-answered
Calls
Specifies whether to mute incoming calls. Incoming calls are muted until you press
the Mute button on the microphone or on the remote control.
Note: You must first enable Auto Answer Point-to-Point Video or Auto Answer
Multipoint Video. These settings are in Admin Settings > General Settings >
System Settings > Call Settings. For details on these settings, see Configure Call
Settings.
Enable MusicMode
Specifies whether the system transmits audio using a configuration that best
reproduces interactive and live performance music picked up by microphones. This
mode provides the highest possible bandwidth for audio.
When MusicMode is enabled, even the faintest musical notes come through clearly.
Note: Automatic noise suppression and automatic gain control are disabled when
MusicMode is enabled.
Polycom, Inc.
126
Microphones and Speakers
Setting
Description
Enable Keyboard Noise
Reduction and Polycom
NoiseBlock™
Specifies whether the system mutes audio from the RealPresence Group system
microphones when keyboard tapping sounds or other extraneous noises are
detected, but no one is talking. NoiseBlock unmutes the system when speech is
detected, regardless of the existence of background noise.
Note: Polycom MusicMode™ is disabled when this setting is enabled. If an external
echo canceller is used, keyboard noise reduction is not available.
Transmission Audio Gain
(dB)
Specifies the audio level, in decibels, at which to transmit sound. Unless otherwise
advised, Polycom suggests setting this value to 0 dB.
Enable Audio Mute
Reminder
Specifies whether to display a notification as a reminder to unmute the
RealPresence Group system microphone when speaking is detected.
Enable Join and Leave
Tones
Plays an audible tone when a participant in a multipoint call joins or leaves the call.
Note: This setting is available only when the multipoint option key is installed.
Enable Acoustic Fence
Specifies whether Acoustic Fence can be used or not. For details on Acoustic
Fence, refer to Acoustic Fence Technology.
Acoustic Fence Sensitivity
Specifies the microphone sensitivity for Acoustic Fence Technology. You can set a
value between 0 and 10, where 0 is the minimum sensitivity and 10 is the maximum
sensitivity. Higher settings increase the radius of the fence area around the primary
microphone.
Configure Audio Input Settings
You can configure audio input settings for your system type.
The RealPresence Group 300 system has no audio input settings, and the settings for the RealPresence
Group 310, 500, and 700 systems are quite different. The following tables describe each.
To configure audio settings:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Audio > Audio Input.
2 Configure the Audio settings described in the following table.
RealPresence Group 310 and 500 Audio Input Settings
Setting
Description
Type
Displays the 3.5mm connector for line-level stereo audio input.
Audio Input Level
Sets the 3.5 mm audio input level.
Use Input for
Microphone
Specifies use of the 3.5mm input.
When enabled, this setting is used as an audio input for external equipment. The
audio is only heard on the far-end sites. When the local mute is activated, this input
is muted.
When disabled, the port is used as an audio content port. The audio is heard by both
the near and far-end sites and is not controlled by the local mute.
Polycom, Inc.
127
Microphones and Speakers
Setting
Description
Associate with Video
Content Ports
When enabled, the 3.5 mm audio input is only heard when the VGA or HDMI content
video port is active.
When disabled, audio is not controlled by content video port activities.
Audio Meter (not labeled)
Displays the audio level for the 3.5 mm input port, left and right channels.
Type
Displays embedded audio from the HDMI connector.
Audio Input Level
Sets the audio input level.
Audio Meter (not labeled)
Displays the audio level for the HDMI input port, left and right channels.
RealPresence Group 700 Audio Input Settings
Setting
Description
Type
Displays Line (dual RCA, auxiliary audio input).
Audio Input Level
Sets the audio input level.
Associate with Video
Content Ports
When enabled, the 3.5 mm audio input is only heard when the VGA or HDMI content
video port is active.
When disabled, audio is not controlled by content video port activities.
Audio Meter (not labeled)
Displays the audio level of the line input, left and right channels.
Type
Displays 3.5 mm (line-level stereo audio input, associated with HD15/VGA video
input 3).
Audio Input Level
Sets the audio input level.
Audio Meter (not labeled)
Displays the audio level of the line input, left and right channels.
Type
Displays HDMI 1 (HDMI connector embedded audio input, associated with video
input 1).
Audio Input Level
Sets the audio input level.
Audio Meter (not labeled)
Displays the audio level of the line input, left and right channels.
Type
Displays HDMI 2 (HDMI connector embedded audio input, associated with video
input 2).
Audio Input Level
Sets the audio input level.
Audio Meter (not labeled)
Displays the audio level of the line input, left and right channels.
Type
Displays HDMI 3 (HDMI connector embedded audio input, associated with video
input 3).
Audio Input Level
Sets the audio input level.
Audio Meter (not labeled)
Displays the audio level of the line input, left and right channels.
Type
Displays Component (dual RCA, associated with component video input 4).
Polycom, Inc.
128
Microphones and Speakers
Setting
Description
Audio Input Level
Sets the audio input level.
Audio Meter (not labeled)
Displays the audio level of the line input, left and right channels.
3.5mm Audio Input
Administrators can select how to enable 3.5mm audio input from the RealPresence Group system 3.5mm
audio port in the system web interface. In active calls, administrators can enable 3.5mm audio input on the
near-end conference site.
When administrators enable audio 3.5mm input for use during active calls, 3.5mm audio input is heard
during active calls from the room system speakers and from all far-end sites.
When administrators enable 3.5mm audio input for use when content sharing is active, 3.5mm audio input
is only active when either HDMI or VGA video input is active. When HDMI or VGA video input is active and
when the room system is in an active call, 3.5mm audio input is heard from the system speakers and from
all far-end sites. When there is audio as part of active HDMI or VGA content, the 3.5mm audio input mixes
in with the HDMI or VGA audio input.
Enable 3.5mm Audio Input
To enable 3.5mm audio input, you cannot use 3.5mm input as a microphone. Because of this, you must
clear the User Input for Microphone checkbox, as shown in the tasks below.
To enable 3.5mm audio input:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio and Video > Audio Settings > Audio Input >
3.5mm Audio Input.
2 Clear the Use Input for Microphone checkbox.
3 Clear the Video Content Ports Association checkbox.
3.5mm audio input is now enabled for use during active calls.
Enable 3.5mm Audio Input for Content Sharing
You can enable audio input for content sharing.
To enable 3.5mm audio input for content sharing:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio and Video > Audio Settings > Audio Input >
3.5mm Audio Input.
2 Clear the Use Input for Microphone checkbox.
3 Select the Video Content Ports Association checkbox.
4 Click Save.
3.5mm audio input is now enabled when content sharing is active in a call.
Configure Audio Output Settings
You can configure the audio output settings for your system.
Polycom, Inc.
129
Microphones and Speakers
To configure audio settings:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Audio > Audio Output.
2 Configure the Audio settings described in the following table.
Setting
Description
Master Audio Volume
Sets the main audio output volume level going to the speakers.
Bass
Sets the volume level for the low frequencies without changing the master audio
volume.
Treble
Sets the volume level for the high frequencies without changing the master audio
volume.
Type
Displays the current audio output type. This setting is read only.
Output Mode
Specifies whether volume for a device connected to the line out connectors is variable
or fixed.
• Variable—Allows users to set the volume with the remote control.
• Fixed—Sets the volume to the Audio Level specified in the system interface.
Audio Output Meters
Displays the output level meter for the left and right outputs. This setting is read only.
Note: To disable HDMI output when using 3.5mm audio output, do the following. In the
web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Monitors and set the Monitor 1
Enable setting to Manual. At Video Format, select DVI.
Stereo Settings
To send or receive stereo audio, make sure your room system equipment is set up as described in Available
Microphone Inputs by System and Audio Output. Then configure the room system to use Polycom
StereoSurround, test the system configuration, and place a test call.
If you are in a call with a far site that is sending audio in stereo mode, you can receive in stereo. In multipoint
calls where some sites can send and receive stereo and some sites cannot, any site that is set up to send
or receive stereo can do so. The following Stereo Settings are available.
Setting
Description
Polycom
Microphone Type
Displays the type of Polycom microphone being used.
Stereo
Positions the audio input within the left and right channels. Left sends all of the audio to the
left channel. Right sends all of the audio to the right channel. For Polycom digital
microphone and ceiling microphone arrays, Left+Right sends audio from one microphone
element to the left channel and audio from a second element to the right channel.
Autorotation
Specifies whether autorotation is used for Polycom microphones. If this feature is enabled,
the system automatically assigns left and right channels for the microphone based on
sound it senses from the left and right speakers.
Note: This feature does not work when headphones are used.
Audio Meter
(dB meter)
Lets you see the peak input signal level for Polycom microphones.
Polycom, Inc.
130
Microphones and Speakers
Test StereoSurround
After you configure the system to use Polycom StereoSurround, test the system configuration and place a
test call.
To test your stereo configuration:
1 Make sure the microphones are positioned correctly.
For details on correct placement, refer to Polycom Microphone Placement to Send Stereo from Your
Site.
2 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Audio > Audio Input.
3 Gently blow on the left leg and right leg of each Polycom microphone while watching the bar meters
to identify the left and right inputs.
4 Test the speakers to check volume and verify that audio cables are connected. If the system is in a
call, the far site hears the tone.
Exchange the right and left speakers if they are reversed.
Adjust the volume control on your external audio amplifier so that the test tone sounds as loud as a
person speaking in the room. If you use a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter, it should measure
about 80-90 dBA in the middle of the room.
5 Repeat the steps above for Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Audio > Audio Output.
Set Up Third-party Microphones
You can configure a Polycom RealPresence Group system to use non-Polycom microphones.
To configure a Polycom RealPresence Group system to use devices connected directly to
audio input 1:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Audio > Audio Input.
2 Do the following:
a Enable Use Input for Microphone, if available.
b Adjust the Audio Input Level if necessary.
c Speak into the microphones that are connected to the audio line inputs. The audio meter should
peak at about 5 dB for normal speech.
Acoustic Fence Technology
RealPresence Group systems feature Polycom® Acoustic Fence Technology™ that uses standard Polycom
microphone arrays to build a virtual fence around a user or multiple users. The audio is automatically muted
when all sounds originate outside a boundary. If a speaker is talking inside the fence, the volume is not
Polycom, Inc.
131
Microphones and Speakers
altered, but sounds outside the fence are lowered by 12 dB. Once the speaker leaves the fenced area, the
audio is muted.
Note: Acoustic Fence Technology is not supported on RealPresence Group 300 and 310 systems.
In addition to the primary Polycom microphone array, one or more fence microphone arrays are
required.You can use up to four microphones with RealPresence Group 500 and 700 systems. The
boundary radius can be two feet to several feet around the following Polycom peripherals:
● Polycom microphone array
● Desktop microphones
● Ceiling microphones
● EagleEye View camera
● Polycom® EagleEye Acoustic camera
Note: This feature works in mono mode only. If StereoSurround is enabled when you
enable the Acoustic Fence feature, a notification is displayed. “Enabling Acoustic Fence will
disable Polycom StereoSurround.”
Configure the Acoustic Fence
Before you can use the Acoustic Fence, you must configure settings in the web interface.
To configure the Acoustic Fence:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Audio.
2 Select the Enable Acoustic Fence checkbox.
3 Set Acoustic Fence Sensitivity from 0 to 10, where 0 is the minimum microphone sensitivity and
10 is the maximum microphone sensitivity. Higher values increase the radius of the fence area
around the primary microphone.
Polycom, Inc.
132
Microphones and Speakers
For more details on the setup and the associated scenarios, refer to the Polycom Acoustic Fence white
paper at www.polycom.com/videodocumentation.
Polycom, Inc.
133
Content Sharing
To prepare for sharing content, see the following topics:
● Sharing Content During Calls
● Configure Content Sharing
● Connect Computers to Polycom RealPresence Group Systems
● Configuring DVD Player Settings
● Multipoint Resolution and Frame Rates for People and Content
● Configure and Install a Polycom Content Display Application
● Configure Closed Captioning
Sharing Content During Calls
You can present content during calls when you use sources such as the following:
● A DVD player connected directly to a video input on a room system
● People+Content IP installed on a computer, with any room system
● A computer connected directly to a RealPresence Group system or a Polycom touch device
● A USB drive connected to a Polycom touch device, such as the RealPresence Touch
RealPresence Group systems achieve maximum content frame rate of 30 fps for 1080p with a 1080p
Resolution option key installed, and 60 fps for 720p. If you use Content as the Quality Preference in your
network IP settings, you can achieve a content frame rate of 60 fps for 1080p with the 1080p Resolution
option key installed.
For more information about sharing content during a call, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series
User Guide.
Configure Content Sharing
You can configure content sharing in the system web interface. For content to display properly, the
RealPresence Group system Monitor 2 must support Progressive mode, and the output resolution should
be set to a Progressive setting, such as 1280x720p or 1920x1080p. Interlaced output for Monitor 2 is not
supported. Do not use the resolution setting 1920x1080i.
To configure the content display:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs and select the input you
want to configure for content.
Polycom, Inc.
134
Content Sharing
2 For the Display as setting, select Content for the input that will display content.
When you connect a content-sharing device such as a laptop to the input, the content starts
displaying. If the content-sharing device is already connected, you must manually show the content
from the local interface. For more information about showing content, refer to the Polycom
RealPresence Group Series User Guide.
If default values for other settings in the system have not changed, you are ready to share content on
your RealPresence Group system. However, if you disabled the H.239 protocol, you must enable the
program for content sharing by following these steps:
3 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > Dialing Preference.
4 Enable H.239.
Note: You cannot enable or disable H.239 while in a call.
If the audio level of the call using content sharing needs to be adjusted, follow these steps to change
the level:
 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Audio > Audio Input.
 Set the Audio Input Level.
Connect Computers to Polycom RealPresence Group
Systems
You can connect a computer directly to a RealPresence Group system. When you do this, other call
participants can see everything that you see on your computer.
When you connect to video and audio from your computer, the audio is muted unless the computer is
selected as a video source.
For more information about connecting computers as content video sources for RealPresence Group
systems, refer to Configuring Video Input Settings. Refer to your system setup sheet for connection details.
Configuring DVD Player Settings
To play content from a DVD, do the following for your room system type:
● With a RealPresence Group 310 or a RealPresence Group 500 system, you can connect a DVD
player to an HDMI or VGA input to play content.
● With a Polycom RealPresence Group 700 system, you can also connect a DVD player to the
system’s video input to play DVDs in calls.
● Using a DVD player with a RealPresence Group 300 system is not supported.
Configure DVD Settings
DVD inputs are active when you select the camera source configured as DVD. This means that both the
audio and video inputs are active—you cannot select one or the other. Because the microphone inputs
remain active while the DVD player is playing, call participants might want to mute the microphones while
playing DVDs.
Polycom, Inc.
135
Content Sharing
To configure DVD audio settings for playing a DVD on a RealPresence Group 310, 500, and
700 system:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Audio > Audio Input.
2 Set Line In Level for playback volume of the DVD player relative to other audio from the system.
Enable DVD Audio Out Always On unless you have the DVD inputs and outputs both connected to
the same device to play and record.
Multipoint Resolution and Frame Rates for People and
Content
The following table shows the maximum multipoint resolution and frame rates for People and Content for
each type of RealPresence Group system. For the RealPresence Group 310 and 500 systems, the
maximum resolution and frame rates are dependent upon the quality preference settings that are configured
on your system. For more information on the Quality Preference setting, refer to Configure Network Quality
Settings.
System Type
Maximum Resolution/
Frame Rate
People and Content
RealPresence Group 310
1080p/60fps
People or Content
RealPresence Group 500
1080p/60fps
People or Content
RealPresence Group 700
1080p/60fps
Both People and Content at
the same time
Configure and Install a Polycom Content Display
Application
The People+Content IP application enables a presenter to show content from a computer to other sites in
a video conference using only an IP network connection. The presenter can show PowerPoint® slides, video
clips, spreadsheets, or any other type of content from a computer. People+Content IP supports any
computer desktop resolution with color set to 16-bit or higher.
If the room system is paired with a RealPresence Touch or a Polycom Touch Control, People+Content IP does not
require installation. After you connect the PC to the USB connection on the device, a version of People+Content IP
launches automatically.
Before a presenter can use a computer to show content with People+Content IP, do the following:
● Download the People+Content IP software application from the Polycom web site to the computer or
computers that the presenter will use to show content.
You don’t need to change the computer resolutions and you don’t need special cables or hardware,
but each computer must meet these requirements:
 Operating System: Windows 7 or 8
Polycom, Inc.
136
Content Sharing
 Minimum computer: 500 MHz Pentium® III (or equivalent); 256 MB memory
Recommended computer: 1 GHz Pentium III (or equivalent); 512 MB memory
● Connect the computer or computers to the IP network.
To install People+Content IP on a computer:
1 On a computer, open a web browser and go to the PPCIP download screen.
2 Download and install the People+Content IP software listed under Resources.
Configure Closed Captioning
You can provide real-time text transcriptions or language translations of the video conference by displaying
closed captions on your system. When you provide captions for a conference, the captioner may be present,
or may use a telephone or web browser to listen to the conference audio. When the captioner sends a unit
of text, all sites see it on the main monitor for 15 seconds. The text then disappears automatically.
Closed captions are supported between RealPresence Group systems with software version 4.1.3 or later,
including a RealPresence Group system hosting a multipoint call, HDX systems with any software version,
and Polycom VSX® systems with software version 7.0 or later.
Captions may be provided in any language that uses the Latin alphabet.
Depending on the capabilities of the system, the captioner may enter caption text using one of the following
methods:
● Remotely, through a dial-up connection to the system’s serial RS-232 port
● In the room using equipment connected directly to the serial port
● In the room or remotely, using the RealPresence Group system web interface
Dial-Up Connection to the System’s RS-232 Serial Port
Closed captioners can provide captions from inside the conference room, or from a remote location, via a
dial-up connection to the serial port of the RealPresence Group system, as shown in the following diagram.
Polycom, Inc.
137
Content Sharing
Ref.
Number
Description
1
Stenograph machine
2
PC with computer-aided transcription software
3
Modem
4
Phone line
5
Modem
6
RealPresence Group system
7
RS-232 serial port
To supply closed captions through a dial-up connection:
1 Ensure that the computer and the RealPresence Group system are configured to use the same baud
rate and parity settings.
2 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Serial Ports.
3 Set the RS-232 Mode to Closed Caption.
4 Establish a dial-up connection between the computer and the RealPresence Group system.
a Connect a null modem adapter to the RS-232 serial port.
b Connect an RS-232 cable to the modem and to the null modem adapter.
c Connect the modem to a phone line.
d Configure the modem for 8 bits, no parity.
You may need to configure the modem to answer automatically. You may also need to configure
it to ignore DTR signals.
Polycom, Inc.
138
Content Sharing
5 On the computer, start the transcription application.
6 Enter text using the stenographic machine connected to the computer.
7 To stop sending closed captions, close the transcription application.
Enter Closed Captions Using Equipment Connected to a Serial RS-232
Port
Closed captioners can provide captions from inside the conference room, using equipment connected
directly to the serial port of the RealPresence Group system, as shown in the following diagram.
Ref.
Number
Description
1
Stenographer machine
2
PC with computer-aided transcription software
3
RealPresence Group system
4
RS-232 serial port
To supply closed captions using equipment connected directly to the serial port:
1 Ensure that the computer and the RealPresence Group system are configured to use the same
baud rate and parity settings.
2 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Serial Ports.
3 Set the RS-232 mode to Closed Caption.
4 On the computer, start the transcription application.
5 Enter text using the stenographic machine connected to the computer.
6 To stop sending closed captions, close the transcription application.
Enter Closed Captions on the Web Interface
Closed captioners can provide captions from inside the conference room, or from a remote location, by
entering the captions directly into the RealPresence Group system web interface, as shown in the following
diagram.
Polycom, Inc.
139
Content Sharing
Ref.
Number
Description
1
Web interface
2
LAN
3
RealPresence Group system
4
LAN port
To supply closed captions for a conference:
1 In your web browser address line, enter the RealPresence Group system IP address.
2 Go to Utilities > Tools > Closed Caption.
3 Log in using this information if prompted:
User Name: Your name.
Password: Meeting password defined for your video conferencing system.
4 In the Closed Caption screen, type the caption text into the text field. Text wraps to the next line after
32 characters.
5 Press Send to send the text to the sites in the conference.
Polycom, Inc.
140
Placing and Answering Calls
Before you start using the system, configure your system and call settings. System Settings screens provide
access to high-level settings for the entire system. For convenience, some of the User Settings are repeated
on these screens.
To get started with calling, see these topics:
● Configure Call Settings
● Multipoint Calling
● Configuring and Placing Audio-Only Calls
● Managing Directories in the Web Interface
● Manage Favorites Contacts and Groups
● Join Scheduled Meetings
● Using the Web Interface Place a Call Page
Configure Call Settings
The call settings screen allows you to determine which settings are available to users when they place and
answer calls in both the web interface and the local interface.
To configure call settings:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > System Settings > Call
Settings.
2 Configure the settings in the following table and save your changes.
Polycom, Inc.
141
Placing and Answering Calls
Setting
Description
Maximum Time in Call
Enter the maximum number of hours allowed for call length.
When that time has expired, you see a message asking you if you want to hang up or
stay in the call. If you do not answer within one minute, the call automatically
disconnects. If you choose to stay in the call at this time, you will not be prompted
again.
Selecting Off removes any limit.
This setting also applies when you are viewing the Near video screen or showing
content, even if you are not in a call. If the maximum time is reached while viewing Near
video, the system automatically returns to the Home screen. If content is being shown,
the content stops.
Auto Answer
Point-to-Point Video
Sets the answer mode for when the system is not in a call. This setting has three
choices:
Yes—Instructs the system to automatically answer the incoming point-to-point call.
No—Instructs the system to force manual answering of the incoming call.
Do Not Disturb—Instructs the system to reject the incoming call with no notification to
the user.
Auto Answer Multipoint
Video
Sets the answer mode for when the system is already in a call, regardless of whether
the system has multipoint capability. This setting has three choices:
Yes—Instructs the system to automatically answer the incoming multipoint call.
No—Instructs the system to force manual answering of the incoming call.
Do Not Disturb—Instructs the system to reject the incoming call with no notification to
the user.
Multipoint Mode
Sets the multipoint viewing mode that applies when the RealPresence Group system is
the host of a multipoint call. The available settings are as follows:
Auto
Full Screen
Discussion
Presentation
For detailed information on these settings, refer to Select a Multipoint Viewing Mode.
Display Icons in a Call
Specifies whether to display all on-screen graphics, including icons and help text,
during calls.
Enable Flashing
Incoming Call
Notification
Specifies whether the incoming call notification flashes.
Polycom, Inc.
142
Placing and Answering Calls
Setting
Description
Preferred ‘Place a Call’
Navigation
Specifies the default icons that display on the local interface of the Place a Call screen.
The available settings are as follows:
Dial Pad—Displays a list of recently dialed numbers and a dial pad for entering a
number to call.
Contacts—Displays a screen for searching the entire global network directory. The
multi-tiered directory (LDAP) root entry displays at the top of the Contacts list. The
Contact list combines your search and favorite entries.
Recent Calls—Lists phone numbers, in chronological order, that have been dialed
from the RealPresence Group system.
Automatic Self View
Control
Specifies whether the Self View setting is visible in the local interface.
• If Automatic Self View Control is enabled, the Self View setting is not displayed in
the local interface, and the system automatically chooses when to display the self
view window. Whether the self view window is displayed is dependent on available
display space, the display mode, and so on.
• If Automatic Self View Control is not enabled, the user can turn Self View on and
off from the local interface.
Configure Call Answering Mode
You can configure how your users answer calls when they use the local interface.
To configure Call Answering mode:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > System Settings > Call
Settings.
2 Select Auto Answer Point-to-Point Video to set the answer mode for calls with one site, or select
Auto Answer Multipoint Video to set the mode for calls with two or more other sites, and then
select one of the following:
 Yes–Answers calls automatically.
 No–Enables users to answer calls manually.
 Do Not Disturb–Disables incoming calls from being processed and routed to the user.
Enable Flashing Incoming Call Alerts
For hearing-impaired users, an attention-getting message displays when an incoming call is received by a
RealPresence Group system. When a call is received, the system displays a message asking if the user wants
to answer the call.
For greater visibility, you can have the message text flash between white and yellow. Flashing text is off by
default. The incoming call alert settings persists after powering the system off and on.
If a RealPresence Group system is paired with a Polycom Touch Control and is configured with Admin
Settings > General Settings > System Settings > Call Settings > Auto Answer Point-to-Point set to
Yes, users do not see the flashing message on the RealPresence Group system or on the Touch Control
screen. The call is answered automatically and users interact with the call on the Touch Control screen.
Polycom, Inc.
143
Placing and Answering Calls
Turn On Flashing Alerts
You can turn on flashing alerts for hearing-impaired users to see when incoming calls are received by the
system.
To turn on flashing alerts:
1 In the web interface, select Admin Settings > General Settings > System Settings > Call
Settings.
2 Select the Enable Flashing Incoming Call Notification checkbox.
Turn Off Flashing Alerts
You can turn off flashing alerts when the visual cue is not necessary.
To turn off flashing alerts:
1 In the web interface, select Admin Settings > General Settings > System Settings > Call
Settings.
2 Clear the Enable Flashing Incoming Call Notification checkbox.
Multipoint Calling
You can use your RealPresence Group system to participate in multipoint conferences. Multipoint conferences
include multiple video sites and can also include H.323 audio-only or SIP audio-only sites. All H.323
audio-only and SIP audio-only connections count toward the number of sites in a call. Multipoint calls require
a multipoint conferencing unit (MCU) or a hosting system. Depending on the system’s configuration,
RealPresence Group systems can host multipoint calls.
Note: You cannot configure multipoint calls without purchasing and installing a Multipoint Video
Conferencing option key code.
Enter a Multipoint Option Key
Depending on your RealPresence Group system model, you might need to enter a multipoint option key to
enable multipoint calling. For information about purchasing a multipoint call option, please contact your
Polycom distributor. The multipoint option key cannot be used with RealPresence Group 300 and 310
systems, since these systems do not support multipoint calling.
To enter the multipoint option key:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Options.
2 In the Key field, enter the Multipoint Video Conferencing option key.
3 Click Save.
Polycom, Inc.
144
Placing and Answering Calls
Select a Multipoint Viewing Mode
What the far-end site sees during a multipoint call can vary depending on how the RealPresence Group
system is configured, the number of sites participating, the number of monitors being used, and whether
content is shared. When you change a layout, you are changing the far-end site layouts only. Video images
from multiple sites can be automatically combined on one monitor in a display known as continuous presence.
To select a multipoint viewing mode:
1 In the web interface, select Admin Settings > General Settings > System Settings > Call
Settings.
2 Select a viewing mode from the Multipoint Mode list.
The following table describes the available multipoint viewing modes.
Setting
Description
Auto
The view switches between continuous presence and full screen, depending
on the interaction between the sites.
If multiple sites are talking at the same time, continuous presence is used. If
one site speaks uninterrupted for at least 15 seconds, that site appears in
full screen on the monitor.
Discussion
Multiple sites are displayed in continuous presence. The current speaker’s
image is highlighted.
Presentation
The speaker sees continuous presence while the other sites see the
speaker in full screen on the monitor.
Full Screen
The site that is speaking is shown in full screen to all other sites. The current
speaker sees the previous speaker.
Multipoint Layout Panel Configurations for Each System Type
The RealPresence Group systems support several multipoint layouts, as well as dual-monitor compositing.
When you use two monitors of equal size, you have the capability of up to eight-way multipoint calling,
depending on your system configuration. When sharing content, one monitor is used for content and one
for people, but the configuration varies, depending on whether you have enabled Self View and how many
people are participating. When you do not share content, the configuration for both monitors is spread over
both monitors, again depending on whether Self View is enabled and how many participants are in the call.
Depending upon your RealPresence Group system, the number of participant panels can vary, as shown in
the following table.
Polycom, Inc.
145
Placing and Answering Calls
System Model
Number of
Panels in the
Layouts on the
Internal MCU
Number of Panels in the Layouts on the Far-End Sites
RealPresence
Group 700
8 (all
participants are
displayed)
8 (Up to 8 participants are displayed, regardless of the latest
speakers)
RealPresence
Group 500
RealPresence
Group 310
6 (all
participants are
displayed)
4 (Up to 4 latest speakers)
Configuring and Placing Audio-Only Calls
You can now place SIP or H.323 audio-only calls on RealPresence Group systems through the web
interface, the local interface, a RealPresence Touch device, API, or a Polycom® SoundStation® IP 7000
conference phone. Keep the following in mind when placing audio-only calls:
● You can place audio and video calls in any order at any time during a conference call.
● You cannot view video or share content as an audio-only participant during a conference call.
● Audio calls are supported when the Enable Audio-only Calls setting is enabled or when the system
is paired to a Polycom SoundStation IP 7000.
For information on placing audio-only calls on the local interface, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group
Series User Guide.
Enable Audio-Only Calls
You can enable audio-only calls in the web interface.
To enable audio-only calls:
» In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > Dialing Preference > Dialing Options >
and select Enable Audio-Only Calls. Click Save.
Disable Audio-Only Calls
You can disable audio-only calls in the web interface.
To disable audio-only calls:
» In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > Dialing Preference > Dialing Options and
clear the Enable Audio-Only Calls checkbox. Click Save.
Select the Call Type Order for Audio-Only Calls
When Audio-Only Calls is enabled, you can choose the audio order and dialing preference.
Polycom, Inc.
146
Placing and Answering Calls
To choose Audio Dialing Order:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > Dialing Preference > Dialing Options >
Call Type Order.
2 Select Phone then Video.
3 For the Audio Dial Preference 1 and Audio Dial Preference 2 settings, choose from the following
call types:
 IP H.323
 SIP
 Speakerphone (displays only when system is paired with SoundStation IP 7000 conference
phone)
If the Enable Audio-Only Calls checkbox is cleared, the Audio Dial Preference 1 and Audio Dial
Preference 2 settings are not displayed.
4 Click Save.
Place an Audio-Only Call from the System Web Interface
You can place audio-only calls from the system web interface.
To place an audio-only call from the web interface:
1 In the web interface, go to Place a Call > Manual Dial.
2 Select audio.
3 To place the call, do one of the following:
» Enter the number and click Call.
» Under Recent Calls, click the desired audio call.
Including Multiple Sites in a Cascaded Call
You can include multiple sites in a cascaded call if the sites you call have internal multipoint capability.
The following diagram shows a cascaded call with multiple sites.
Polycom, Inc.
147
Placing and Answering Calls
Keep the following points in mind regarding cascaded calls:
● H.239 is not supported in cascaded calls.
● Cascaded multipoint is not supported in SIP calls.
● HD and SD multipoint are not supported when the RealPresence Group system hosts a cascaded call.
● You cannot change the near-end layout.
● The encryption padlock icon might not accurately indicate whether a cascaded call is encrypted.
● You cannot call a group of contacts by using Speed Dial or Favorites to call the group.
●
You cannot place group calls on RealPresence Group 300 or 310 systems.
Place a Cascaded Call
You can place a cascaded call on the RealPresence Group system.
To place a cascaded call:
1 Create and call a group in the directory, or place calls one at a time to several other sites.
2 Ask each far site to call additional sites. Along with these additional sites, each far site in the original
multipoint call can add one audio-only connection.
Managing Directories in the Web Interface
Having groups in the directory can help users find calling information quickly and easily. RealPresence
Group systems support global groups and Favorites groups.
RealPresence Group systems support up to 2,000 favorite contacts that users create within Favorites. They
can also support one of the following:
Polycom, Inc.
148
Placing and Answering Calls
● Up to 200 additional contacts with presence, which appear in Favorites, when registered with Skype
for Business 2015
● Up to 4,000 contacts from a Polycom GDS server.
● An unlimited number of contacts when the RealPresence Group system is registered with Skype for
Business 2015.
RealPresence Group systems support up to 200 Favorites groups that users create within Favorites. If the
system is connected to a global directory server, it can also support up to 64 additional groups from the
Skype for Business Server 2015, which appear in the Favorites group.
Note: Assistance from Polycom Microsoft Integration Services is mandatory for Skype for Business
2015 integrations. For additional information and details, please refer to
http://www.polycom.com/services/professional_services/index.html or contact your local Polycom
representative.
Searching Directory Contacts to Call
Directory contacts are called “global contact entries” in the system local interface. These global contact
entries are assigned to a default global Favorites group named Global Entry. The global directory contains
address book entries downloaded from an enabled global directory server.
You can search the global directory to return a list of all global directory entries that match your search
criteria, then select contacts in the global directory to call. Up to 200 search results can be displayed at a
time from a Polycom Global Directory Service (GDS) or Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP)
global directory.
Prerequisite for Using the Global Directory Service (GDS)
To use GDS in your environment, you must have H.323 enabled and registered on your system. To enable
H.323, go to the system web interface at Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > H.323 and select the
checkbox at Enable IP H.323. Enter the required registration information. For more information about
registering H.323, refer to Configure H.323 Settings.
GDS API Commands
To access options and settings for the Polycom Global Directory Service (GDS), you can use the following
API commands:
● gdsdirectory
● gdspassword
● gdsserverip
For more information about these commands, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Integrator
Reference Manual.
Search for Directory Contacts to Call
You can search for directory contacts to call in the web interface global directory.
To search the global directory using the web interface:
1 In the web interface, select Place a Call > Contacts.
Polycom, Inc.
149
Placing and Answering Calls
2 At Search, enter a contact name and click Search.
3 Select Call to place a call or select an entry to view the contact’s information.
Note: To browse LDAP global directory entries, LDAP must be enabled through Polycom
RealPresence Resource Manager. If LDAP is not enabled through RealPresence Resource Manager,
you can still search the global directory, but you cannot browse the global directory.
Manage Favorites Contacts and Groups
Local interface users can select Contacts from the menu to view favorites and the directory.
Web interface users can add favorites from the directory, create new favorite contacts, and create favorite
groups. You perform the following tasks on the Manage Favorites screen.
Create a Favorites Contact
You can create a Favorites contact in the web interface.
To create a Favorites contact:
1 In the web interface, go to Manage Favorites.
2 Click Create New Favorite.
3 Enter the contact call information and click Save.
Create a Favorites Group
You can create a Favorites group in the web interface.
To create a Favorites group:
1 In the web interface, go to Manage Favorites.
2 Click Create New Group.
3 Enter a Name for the group and click Save.
A success message is displayed.
4 To add contacts to the group, click Add Contacts on the success message.
5 Enter a contact name in the search box and click Search.
6 In the entry you want to add to the group, click Add.
7 Repeat the above steps to add more contacts to the group.
8 Click Done.
Edit a Favorites Group
You can edit a Favorites group in the web interface.
Polycom, Inc.
150
Placing and Answering Calls
To edit a Favorites group:
1 In the web interface, go to Manage Favorites.
2 Find the group name in the list of contacts.
3 Next to the group contact name, click Edit Group.
Do one of the following:
 To add contacts to the group, click Search to add contacts to this group, enter a contact name,
click Search, and then Add to add a contact.
 To remove contacts from a group, next to a contact name, click Remove.
4 Repeat the above steps to continue adding or removing contacts.
5 Click Done.
Delete a Favorites Group
You can delete a Favorites group in the web interface.
To delete a Favorites contact or group:
1 In the web interface, go to Manage Favorites.
2 Next to the group or contact name, click Delete.
3 When a message asks you to confirm the delete, select Delete or Cancel.
Importing and Exporting Favorites
The Import/Export Directory feature enables you to download Favorites from a RealPresence Group
system to local devices, such as computers and tablets, in XML file format. It also allows you to upload
Favorites from a device to a room system.
To access these features, you must be able to access a web browser on your device. Polycom
recommends you use one of the following web browsers:
● Microsoft Internet Explorer
● Mozilla Firefox
For a list of supported browser versions, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Release Notes.
Keep the following points in mind when performing these tasks:
● The size of the uploaded XML file cannot exceed 3 megabytes.
● You can import favorites groups and entries both when you are in a call and when you are not in a call.
● When the uploaded XML file includes favorites groups or entries already on the room system, the
duplicate files are added as separate directory entries.
Export Favorites Groups and Contacts
You can export Favorites groups and contacts to your local device.
To export Favorites groups and contacts:
1 In the web interface, go to Manage Favorites > Import/Export > Download.
Polycom, Inc.
151
Placing and Answering Calls
2 Save the downloaded directory.xml file on your local device.
Import Favorites Groups and Contacts
You can import Favorites groups and contacts and upload the directory file to your system.
To import Favorites groups and contacts:
1 In the web interface, go to Manage Favorites > Import/Export > Choose File.
2 In the dialog box, select the directory.xml file you want to import and click Open.
3 Select Upload to upload the directory.xml file to the RealPresence Group system.
Types of Favorites Contacts
Favorites contains the types of Contacts shown in the following table.
Directory Server
Registration
Types of Contacts
Presence State Displayed
Polycom GDS
•
Directory entries created locally by the user.
Unknown
•
References to Polycom GDS entries added to
Favorites by the user.
These entries are available only if the system
is successfully registered with Polycom GDS.
Users can delete these entries from
Favorites. Users can copy these entries to
other Favorites and remove them from those
groups. Users cannot edit these entries.
Online/Offline
LDAP with H.350 or Active
Directory
•
•
Directory entries created locally by the user
References to LDAP directory entries added to
Favorites by the user.
These entries are available only if the system
can successfully access the LDAP/Active
Directory server. Users can delete these
entries from Favorites. Users can copy these
entries to other Favorites and remove them
from those groups. Users cannot edit these
entries.
Unknown
Microsoft
•
Skype for Business Server 2015 directory
entries are saved as Contacts by the user and
stored on the Skype server.
Users must create their contact lists using
Microsoft Office Communicator on a
computer. Users cannot edit or delete these
entries from Favorites using the
RealPresence Group system. Users can copy
these entries to other Favorites and remove
them from those groups.
Real-time presence
Polycom, Inc.
152
Placing and Answering Calls
Join Scheduled Meetings
If your RealPresence Group system is configured to connect to the Microsoft Exchange Server/Skype for
Business 2015, you can join a scheduled meeting from the Calendar screen. If the home screen does not
display calendar information, the system is not registered with the Microsoft Exchange Server. If no
meetings are scheduled, a “No Meetings Today” message is displayed.
To join a scheduled meeting from the Home screen:
1 With your remote control, select a meeting on the Home screen.
2 Select Join to call into the meeting.
For information about displaying the Calendar button on the Home screen, refer to Customize What Users
See on the System Home Screen. For more information about joining scheduled meetings, refer to the
Polycom RealPresence Group Series User Guide. For more information about setting up Microsoft
Exchange Server 2013 accounts to use the calendaring service, refer to the Polycom Unified
Communications for Microsoft Environments Solution Deployment Guide at support.polycom.com.
Using the Web Interface Place a Call Page
When you click the Place a Call link on the web interface, the default view shows you the following widgets:
● Search
● Place a Call
● Contacts
● Manual Dial
● Speed Dial
● Recent Calls
For information on configuring Home screen settings for the local interface, refer to Customize What Users
See on the System Home Screen.
Perform a Search for Web Interface Screens
In a text box just under the IP Address bar on the web interface Place a Call screen, you can enter a search
term to receive a list of RealPresence Group system web screens. For instance, if you type Call, the
system generates a list of screens that match your search term, such as Call Settings, Recent Calls, and
Time in Call.
To search for a text string:
1 In the Search box, type a text string.
2 Select any of the search results to go directly to that screen in the web interface.
Place a Call to Favorite Contacts
In the Place a Call area, you can place a call manually, or search your contacts.
Polycom, Inc.
153
Placing and Answering Calls
To call a favorite contact:
1 In the Contacts section, enter a name and click Search.
2 Select a contact name and click Call.
For information about editing Favorites contacts, refer to Manage Favorites Contacts and Groups.
To place a call manually:
1 Click Manual Dial.
2 Enter the number.
3 Click Call.
The call is placed according to the default settings you selected in Admin Settings > Network > Dialing
Preferences. You can select settings other than the defaults in the two lists below the text entry field.
To require a password, select Meeting Password and enter a password in the field that displays below the
check box.
Place a Call to Speed Dial Contacts
On the web interface Place a Call screen, you can call Speed Dial contacts and can edit the Speed Dial
contact list. After you have enabled Speed Dial, users can use it as a shortcut for calling a contact.
To call speed dial contacts:
» In the Speed Dial section, select a contact from the list and click Call.
To place a call within your company’s telephone system, enter the internal extension instead of the
full number.
Place a Call to Recent Call Contacts
On the web interface Place a Call screen, you can place calls to Recent Call contacts.
To dial a recent call from the web interface:
» In the web interface Place a Call screen’s Recent Calls section, do one of the following:
 Find an entry and click the Call link next to the entry.
 Click More to view a list of calls with more details, then select an entry and click Call.
Configure the Recent Calls List
You can configure a Recent Calls list to display on the RealPresence Group system Place a Call screen on
the web interface and Home screen on the local interface. The list includes the following information:
● Site name or number
● Whether call was placed or received
● Date and time
Polycom, Inc.
154
Placing and Answering Calls
To configure Recent Calls:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > System Settings > Recent
Calls.
2 To enable a Recent Calls list, configure these settings.
Setting
Description
Call Detail Report
Specifies whether to collect call data for the Call Detail Report. When selected,
information about calls can be viewed through the RealPresence Group system web
interface and downloaded as a .csv file. When this setting is not selected, the system
stops writing calls to the report.
Enable Recent Calls
Specifies whether to show Recent Calls on the local and web interfaces.
Maximum Number to
Display
Specifies the maximum number of calls to display in the Recent Calls list.
3 To start a new list of recent calls, click Clear Recent Calls.
4 Click Save.
If you need more details about calls, view or download the Call Detail Report (CDR) from the Polycom
RealPresence Group system web interface. For more information about the CDR, refer to Call Detail Report
(CDR).
Polycom, Inc.
155
Security
For detailed security information, see the following topics:
● Security Settings in the Web Interface
● Configure Security Profiles
● Managing System Access and External Authentication
● Enabling a Whitelist for IPv4 and IPv6 Addresses
● Port Lockout
● Encryption
● Visual Security Classification
● Managing Certificates and Revocation
● Configure a Security Banner
● Configure a Meeting Password
Security Settings in the Web Interface
To configure your RealPresence Group system security settings using the system web interface, use a
supported browser with cookies enabled. For a list of supported browsers and version numbers, refer to the
release notes for your system.
To access the web interface, open a web browser and enter the IP address of the system using the
https://IPaddress (for example, https://10.11.12.13).
For more information about using the web interface, refer to System Web Interface.
Caution: The HTTPS protocol ensures that the configuration of all login information (such as user
names and passwords) is transmitted using an encrypted channel, including those user names and
passwords used to communicate with third-party systems on your network. Using HTTPS severely
limits the ability of anyone on the network to discover these credentials. For this reason, all attempts
to use the system web interface via HTTP are redirected to the HTTPS interface.
You can find security settings and passwords in the following locations:
● In the local interface, go to
> Settings > Administration > Security.
The local interface has general, password, and remote access settings.
● In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security.
The web interface has global and local settings.
Polycom, Inc.
156
Security
Settings are under different sections of the security interfaces. Not all systems show all of the selections,
and many settings in the web interface are unavailable in the local interface.
Note: In accordance with local laws and regulations not all security settings are available in all
countries.
Configure Security Profiles
RealPresence Group system security profiles provide varying levels of secure access to your system. The
security profile your system uses provides the basis for secure access within the system and determines
how users can operate the system.
The security profile is selected during system setup with the setup wizard, but this setting is configurable
through the web interface Admin Settings. The default values and ability to change some RealPresence
Group settings are affected by which security profile your system uses. Refer to the tables in Security Profile
Default Settings to see how these settings are affected for each security profile.
Consider each security profile as a set of default values for all configuration settings that affect product
security and that achieves some level of base product security. You can choose from four profiles—
Maximum, High, Medium and Low. Each profile provides a basic security posture, ranging from the most
secure to the least secure, which allows you to select a level of security that is appropriate for the
deployment of the system in your environment.
Because you can change most of the individual configuration settings regardless of the security profile you
chose, Polycom recommends that you select the profile that is closest to the level of security you want in
your environment and then customize the settings from there, as needed. In the higher profiles, however,
some settings are either not changeable at all or have restricted ranges of values. For specific configuration
information, refer to each profile’s settings in Security Profile Default Settings.
To view or change a security profile:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Global Security.
2 Determine which of the following Security Profile settings your system uses.
Setting
Description
Maximum
Configures the system to be compliant with U.S. DoD security requirements. Some configuration
settings are made read-only in this profile; other settings have restricted ranges of values. This
profile represents the highest level of security.
High
Configures the system with most security controls enabled, but does not mandate the use of some
controls that are mandated in Maximum profile. Some configuration settings are not changeable in
this profile; other settings have restricted ranges of values. This profile is most appropriate for
enterprise deployments that demand high security.
Medium
Configures the system with some of the basic security controls enabled, but not all. Most settings
are changeable in this profile.
Low
Configures the system with no mandated security controls, although all controls can be enabled as
needed. This is the default profile.
Polycom, Inc.
157
Security
3 To change the profile setting, select the Security Profile you want to use.
You can increase or decrease the level of security.
4 Follow the prompts in the Security Profile Change wizard.
Managing System Access and External Authentication
Managing access to the RealPresence Group system is essential for security. This section includes the
following topics:
● Enable External Authentication
● Login and Credentials
● Secure API Access
● Local Accounts
● Enable Access to User Settings
RealPresence Group systems support two roles for accessing the system, an admin role and a user role.
Admins can perform administrator activities such as changing configuration, as well as user activities such
as placing and answering calls. Users can perform only user-type activities.
RealPresence Group systems provide two local accounts, one for the user role (by default named user)
and one for the admin role (by default named admin). The IDs and passwords for these local accounts are
stored on the RealPresence Group system itself.
An administrator can configure room systems to grant access using network accounts that are authenticated
through an Active Directory (AD) server such as the Microsoft Active Directory server. In this case, the
account information is stored on the AD server and not on the room system. The AD administrator assigns
accounts to AD groups, one for the room system admin access and one for user access. For this reason,
external authentication is also referred to as Active Directory authentication.
The room system administrator configures the external authentication settings on the RealPresence Group
system to specify the address of an AD Server for authenticating user logins, AD group for user access, and
AD group for admin access on the room system. The system can map only one Active Directory group to a
given role.
Users can enter their network account credentials to access the system on the following interfaces:
● Web interface (admin access only)
● Local interface (user and admin role accounts when Require Login for System Access is
enabled; admin accounts when admin-only areas of the local interface are accessed)
Note: When External Authentication is enabled in PKI environments where Always Validate Peer
Certificates from Server is enabled on the RealPresence Group system, configure the Active
Directory Server Address on the system using the address information that is in the Active Directory
Server identity certificate. This allows the system to validate the identity certificate. As an example, if
the Active Directory Server identity certificate contains its DNS name only, and no specific IP address,
configuring the Active Directory Server Address on the RealPresence Group system using the
server’s IP address results in certificate validation failure, and consequently authentication failure.
The system configuration would have to specify the server by DNS name, in this case, to successfully
match the server certificate data.
RealPresence Group systems support Active Directory on Microsoft Windows Server version 2008 R2 and
Microsoft Windows Server 2012.
Polycom, Inc.
158
Security
Note: TheRealPresence Group system local user account is disabled when Enable Active
Directory External Authentication is enabled. The admin account is active and usable,
however.
Enable External Authentication
You can enable external authentication for your system.
To enable external authentication:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Global Security > Authentication.
2 Configure these settings on the Authentication screen, then click Save.
Setting
Description
Enable Active Directory External
Authentication
Specifies whether to authenticate users through the Active Directory
server. When Active Directory authentication is enabled, users are
allowed to log in with their network account credentials, using this
format:
domain\user
With this format, users can have accounts on multiple domains.
Active Directory Server Address
Specifies the DNS fully qualified domain name (FQDN) or IP address
of the Active Directory server (ADS). If you are using subdomains,
append port number 3268 as follows:
ad.domain.com:3268
Note: RealPresence Group systems can use the RealPresence
Resource Manager system as an ADS. If one is deployed in your
environment, enter its address here. Otherwise, enter the address of
an ADS.
Active Directory Admin Group
Specifies the Active Directory group whose members should have
admin access to the system. This name must exactly match the name
in the ADS for authentication to succeed.
Active Directory User Group
Specifies the Active Directory group whose members should have
user access to the RealPresence Group system. This name must
exactly match the name in the ADS for authentication to succeed.
If external authentication is not active after completing these steps, go to Admin Settings > Network > LAN Properties
> LAN Options and ensure that the Domain Name setting contains the name of your Active Directory domain.
Note: Use the local room system admin credentials to pair the system with a touch device, such as
the RealPresence Touch.
Login and Credentials
Login credentials are user IDs and passwords that identify the user and define the user’s ability to access
the RealPresence Group system. You can configure both local and remote access for users.
Polycom, Inc.
159
Security
Configure Local Access
You can configure local access so that users can reach a RealPresence Group system through the local
interface.
To configure local access to the system:
1 Do one of the following:
 In the local interface, go to
> Settings > Administration > Security > Passwords.
 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Local Accounts > Login Credentials.
2 Configure the following settings. The order in which the settings are displayed differs between the
interfaces.
Setting
Description
Admin ID
Specifies the ID for the administrator account. The default Admin ID is
admin.
Admin IDs are not case sensitive.
Admin Room Password
Specifies the password for the local administrator account used when logging
in to the system locally.
When this password is set, you must enter it to configure the system Admin
Settings using the remote control. The password cannot contain spaces or
be more than 40 characters. Passwords are case sensitive.
The default Admin Room Password is the 14-digit system serial number from
the System Information screen or the back of the system.
Use Room Password for
Remote Access
Specifies whether the room password used for local login is also used for the
remote login. When this setting is disabled, the remote access password
settings are displayed.
Admin Remote Access
Password
Specifies the password for the local administrator account used when logging
in to the system remotely using the web interface or a telnet session.
When this password is set, you must enter it to update the software or
manage the system from a computer. The password cannot contain spaces
or more than 40 characters.
Require User Login for System
Access
Specifies whether the system automatically prompts users to log in when the
system comes out of sleep mode or completes the startup process. Enabling
this setting requires a login to use the local interface.
Note: This setting is supported for the RealPresence Group systems only. It
is not supported for the RealPresence Touch or Polycom Touch Control
devices.
User ID
Specifies the ID for the user account. The default User ID is user.
User IDs are not case sensitive.
Polycom, Inc.
160
Security
Setting
Description
User Room Password
Specifies the password for the local user account used when logging in to the
system locally.
The password cannot contain spaces or more than 40 characters.
Passwords are case sensitive.
User Remote Access Password
Specifies the password for the local user account used when logging in to the
system remotely.
The password cannot contain spaces or more than 40 characters.
Passwords are case sensitive.
Note: When you configure the RealPresence Group system to use the Maximum Security Profile, the
system forces you to change the following settings from their default values:
• Admin account User Id
• User account User Id
• Admin room password
• Admin remote access password
• User room password
• User remote access password
Configure Remote Access Settings
Remote access means using a RealPresence Group system in some way other than through the local
interface, such as by using the web, a serial port, or telnet. A session is an instance of a user connected to
the system through one of these interfaces. Sessions include an indication of how you are logged on to the
system, such as the local interface, web interface, telnet, or serial API.
To configure remote access settings:
1 Do one of the following:
 In the local interface, go to
> Settings > Administration > Security > Remote Access.
 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Global Security > Access.
2 Configure the following settings. Not all settings are available on both interfaces. The visibility of
some settings is affected by the type of security profile your system uses.
Setting
Description
Enable Network Intrusion
Detection System (NIDS)
(web interface only)
Activates the ability to log entries to the security log when the system
detects a possible network intrusion. This setting is enabled or disabled by
default based on the security profile, but can be changed.
Enable Web Access
Specifies whether to allow remote access to the system by using the web
interface.
Allow Access to User Settings
Specifies whether the User Settings screen is accessible to users through
the local interface. For more information about user access settings, refer
to Managing User Access to Settings and Features.
Polycom, Inc.
161
Security
Setting
Description
Restrict to HTTPS
Specifies that the web server is accessible only over a secure HTTPS port.
Enabling this setting closes the HTTP port and so disables redirects of
sessions from HTTP to HTTPS (all access must be initiated as HTTPS).
Web Access Port (HTTP)
Specifies the port to use when accessing the system using the
RealPresence Group system web interface using HTTP.
If you change this from the default (port 80), specify a port number of 1025
or higher, and make sure the port is not already in use. You will need to
include the port number with the IP address when you use the system web
interface to access the system. This makes unauthorized access more
difficult.
If Restrict to HTTPS is enabled, the Web Access Port setting is unavailable.
Enable Telnet Access
Specifies whether to allow remote access to the system by telnet.
Enable SSH Access
Specifies whether to allow SSH access. For more information about this
setting, refer to Secure API Access.
API Port
Specifies the port for API access. Select port 23 or 24.
If you set the API port to port 23, the diagnostics port changes to port 24.
Enable Diagnostics Port Idle
Session Timeout
Specifies whether to allow the diagnostics port to time out at the configured
time interval or not. The timeout setting is set under Idle Session Timeout
in Minutes.
Enable API Port Idle Session
Timeout
Specifies whether to allow the API port to time out at the configured time
interval or not. The timeout setting is set under Idle Session Timeout in
Minutes.
Enable SNMP Access
Specifies whether to allow remote access to the system by SNMP.
Allow Video Display on Web
(local interface only)
Specifies whether you can use the RealPresence Group system web
interface to view the room where the system is located, or video of calls in
which the system participates.
Note: This feature activates both near site and far site video displays in
Web Director.
Lock Port after Failed Logins
For information about this setting, refer to Port Lockout.
Enable Whitelist
Specifies whether to enable a whitelist. For more information about this
setting, refer to Enabling a Whitelist for IPv4 and IPv6 Addresses.
Idle Session Timeout in Minutes
(web interface only)
Specifies the number of minutes your web interface session can be idle
before the session times out.
Maximum Number of Active
Sessions
(web interface only)
Specifies the maximum number of users who can be logged in to and using
your system through telnet or the web interface at the same time.
Managing User Access to Settings and Features
You can allow users to change common user preferences by providing access to the User Settings screen.
To allow users to customize the workspace, select Allow Access to User Settings to make the User
Settings choice on the Settings screen available to users on the local interface’s Home screen.
Polycom, Inc.
162
Security
If the Polycom RealPresence Group system is paired with a Polycom Touch Control, selecting Allow
Access to User Settings makes the RealPresence Group Series system tab available on the Touch
Control User Settings screen.
User Settings contains the following selections, most of which are also available to administrators under
Admin Settings. These settings are not available in the Maximum Security Profile unless otherwise noted.
● Meeting Password (available in the Maximum Security Profile)
● Backlight Compensation (available in the Maximum Security Profile)
● Mute Auto-Answer Calls
● Allow Other Participants in a Call to Control Your Camera
● Auto Answer Point-to-Point Video
● Auto Answer Multipoint Video
● Allow Video Display on Web
Detecting Intrusions
The RealPresence Group system logs an entry to the security log when it detects a possible network
intrusion. This logging is controlled by the setting Admin Settings > Security > Global Security > Access
> Enable Network Intrusion Detection System (NIDS). The security log prefix identifies the type of packet
detected, as shown in the following table.
Prefix
Packet Type
SECURITY: NIDS/unknown_tcp
Packet that attempts to connect or probe a closed TCP port
SECURITY: NIDS/unknown_udp
Packet that probes a closed UDP port
SECURITY: NIDS/invalid_tcp
TCP packet in an invalid state
SECURITY: NIDS/invalid_icmp
ICMP or ICMPv6 packet in an invalid state
SECURITY: NIDS/unknown
Packet with an unknown protocol number in the IP header
SECURITY: NIDS/flood
Stream of ICMP or ICMPv6 ping requests or TCP connections to an opened
TCP port
Following the message prefix, the security log entry includes the timestamp and the IP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, or
ICMPv6 headers. For example, the following security log entry shows an “unknown_udp” intrusion:
2009-05-08 21:32:52 WARNING kernel: SECURITY: NIDS/unknown_udp IN=eth0
OUT= MAC=00:e0:db:08:9a:ff:00:19:aa:da:11:c3:08:00 SRC=172.18.1.80
DST=172.18.1.170 LEN=28 TOS=0x00 PREC=0x00 TTL=63 ID=22458 PROTO=UDP
SPT=1450 DPT=7788 LEN=8
Secure API Access
You can access a RealPresence Group system using the Secure Shell (SSH) protocol. Secure API access is
authenticated for local and Active Directory (AD) accounts.
Polycom, Inc.
163
Security
Note: When a password is empty, SSH will not validate credentials and allow a user to log
in. Polycom recommends that you consistently use passwords for secure access.
Secure API access using SSH is enabled by default. The sshenable API command and Enable SSH
Access web interface setting have been added to enable or disable the feature.
To enable SSH for secure API access, do one of the following:
● In the web interface of the RealPresence Group system, go to Admin Settings > Security > Global
Security > Access and enable the Enable SSH Access setting.
● In a RealPresence Group system API session, enter sshenable true.
To disable SSH for secure API access, do one of the following:
● In the web interface of the system, select Admin Settings > Security > Global Security > Access
and disable the Enable SSH Access setting.
● In a RealPresence Group API session, enter sshenable false.
Access the API with SSH
To obtain secure access to the API, you must use an SSH client and connect to the IP address configured
for the system on port 22.
Note: The system allows three attempts to enter correct login credentials. The SSH client
program closes after the third failed attempt.
To access the API with SSH:
1 Enable remote access.
2 If necessary, enable external authentication.
3 Enable the SSH feature.
4 Start an SSH session using the RealPresence Group system IP address and port 22.
5 When prompted, enter the remote access credentials.
For information on accessing the API, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Integrator
Reference Guide at support.polycom.com.
Local Accounts
For RealPresence Group system accounts, you need to set up password policies and account lockout
settings.
Configure Password Policies Settings
You can configure password policies for Admin, User, Meeting, Remote Access, and SNMP passwords.
These password settings can ensure that strong passwords are used. Polycom strongly recommends that
you create an Admin password for your system.
Polycom, Inc.
164
Security
To configure password policies:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Local Accounts > Password
Requirements.
2 Configure the following settings for Admin Room, User Room, Meeting, Remote Access, or
SNMP passwords. Click Save.
Setting
Description
Minimum Length
Specifies the minimum number of characters required for a valid password.
Require Lowercase Letters
Specifies whether a valid password must contain one or more lowercase letters.
Require Uppercase Letters
Specifies whether a valid password must contain one or more uppercase letters.
Require Numbers
Specifies whether a valid password must contain one or more numbers.
Require Special Characters
Specifies whether a valid password must contain one or more special characters.
Supported characters include:
@-_!;$,\/&.#*
Reject Previous Passwords
Specifies the number of most recent passwords that cannot be reused. If set to
Off, all previous passwords can be reused.
Minimum Password Age in
Days
Specifies the minimum number of days that must pass before the password can
be changed.
Maximum Password Age in
Days
Specifies the maximum number of days that can pass before the password must
be changed.
Note: This setting is unavailable for Meeting and SNMP passwords.
Minimum Changed
Characters
Specifies the number of characters that must be different or change position in a
new password. If this is set to 3, 123abc can change to 345cde but not to
234bcd.
Note: This setting is unavailable for Meeting and SNMP passwords.
Maximum Consecutive
Repeated Characters
Specifies the maximum number of consecutive repeated characters in a valid
password. If this is set to 3, aaa123 is a valid password but aaaa123 is not.
Password Expiration
Warning
Specifies how many days in advance the system displays a warning that the
password will soon expire, if a maximum password age is set.
Note: This setting is unavailable for Meeting and SNMP passwords.
Can Contain ID or Its
Reverse Form
Specifies whether the associated ID or the reverse of the ID can be part of a valid
password. If this setting is enabled and the ID is admin, passwords admin and
nimda are allowed.
Note: This setting is unavailable for Meeting passwords.
Changes to most password policy settings do not take effect until the next time the password is changed.
Changes take effect immediately for Minimum Password Age in Days, Maximum Password Age in
Days, and Password Expiration Warning. Changing Minimum Length from Off to some other value also
takes effect immediately.
Polycom, Inc.
165
Security
Account Lockout to Prevent Unauthorized System Access
RealPresence Group systems provide access controls that prevent unauthorized use of the system. One
way someone might try to discover valid user names and passwords is by exhaustively attempting to log in,
varying the user name and password data in a programmatic way until discovering a combination that
succeeds. Such a method is called a “brute-force” attack.
To mitigate the risk of such an attack, two access control mechanisms are available on RealPresence Group
systems. The first type of access control, account lockout, protects local accounts from being vulnerable to
brute-force attacks, while the second, port lockout, protects login ports themselves from being vulnerable to
brute-force attacks. For more information about that mechanism, refer to Port Lockout.
Account lockout temporarily locks a local account from accepting logins after a configurable number of
unsuccessful attempts to log in to that account. It protects only the local RealPresence Group system’s
Admin and User local accounts. When external authentication is used, the Active Directory Server protects
Active Directory accounts.
RealPresence Group systems provide separate account lockout controls for each of their local accounts,
which are named Admin and User. The account lock can be invoked due to failed logins on any of the
following login ports:
● Local interface
● Web interface
● Telnet interface
The following are examples of how the account lockout feature works.
A RealPresence Group system web interface is configured with these settings:
● Admin Settings > Security > Local Accounts > Account Lockout > Lock Admin Account after
Failed Logins is set to 4.
● Admin Settings > Security > Local Accounts > Account Lockout > Admin Account Lock
Duration is set to 1 Minute.
● Admin Settings > Security > Local Accounts > Account Lockout > Reset Admin Account Lock
After is set to 1 Hour.
Scenario 1 - Admin account locked due to excessive failed logins
A user fails to log in to the Admin account twice on the web interface, and the same or another user fails to
log in to the Admin account on the local interface. This means that three failed attempts have been made
to the Admin account so far. If the next attempt to log in to the Admin account on any login port is
unsuccessful, which would mean 4 failed logins, further attempts to access the Admin account are locked
out for 1 Minute (the expiration of the Admin Account Lock Duration period). After the 1 Minute account
lock duration has past, logins will once again be allowed. As this example illustrates, the failed login attempts
made to an account accumulate across any login port.
Scenario 2 - Successful login resets the failed login attempts counter
A user fails to log in to the Admin account twice on the web interface, and the same or another user fails to
log in to the Admin account on the local interface. This means that three failed attempts have been made
to the Admin account so far. If the next login attempt is successful, then the failed login attempts counter
for the Admin account is reset to zero and now once again 4 failed attempts can be made before the Admin
account would be locked.
Scenario 3 - Failed attempts counter resets after failed login window closes
Polycom, Inc.
166
Security
A user fails to log in to the Admin account twice on the web interface, and the same or another user fails to
log in to the Admin account on the local interface. This means that three failed attempts have been made
to the Admin account so far. If no more failed attempts are made within 1 Hour of the first failed attempt
(which is the value of the Reset Admin Account Lock Counter After setting), the failed login attempts
counter for the Admin account is reset to zero, and 4 failed attempts are allowed again before the Admin
account is locked.
Configure Account Lockout
You can configure account lockout to prevent unauthorized system access.
To configure the account lockout feature:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Local Accounts > Account Lockout.
2 Configure these settings for the appropriate account on the Account Lockout screen, then click
Save. You can configure account lock for the admin account, user account, or both accounts.
Setting
Description
Lock Admin/User Account after
Failed Logins
Specifies the number of failed login attempts allowed before the system
locks the account. If set to Off, the system does not lock the account due
to failed login attempts.
Admin/User Account Lock Duration
Specifies the amount of time that the account remains locked due to failed
login attempts. After this time period has expired, the failed login attempts
counter is reset to zero and logins to the account are once again allowed.
Reset Admin/User Account Lock
Counter After
Specifies the “failed login window” period of time, starting with the first
failed login attempt, during which subsequent failed login attempts will be
counted against the maximum number allowed (Lock Admin/User
Account after Failed Logins). If the number of failed login attempts
made during this window does not reach the maximum number allowed,
the failed login attempts counter is reset to zero at the end of this window.
Note: The failed login attempts counter is always reset to zero anytime a
user successfully logs in.
View Connections to Your System in a Sessions List
You can view a sessions list to see information about everyone logged in to a RealPresence Group system
including:
● Type of connection, for example, Web
● ID associated with the session, typically Admin or User
● Remote IP address (addresses of people logged in to the RealPresence Group system from their
computers)
To view the Sessions List:
» From the local interface, go to Settings > System Information > Diagnostics > Sessions.
» From the web interface, go to Diagnostics > System > Sessions.
Polycom, Inc.
167
Security
Enabling a Whitelist for IPv4 and IPv6 Addresses
When a whitelist is enabled, the RealPresence Group system web interface and SNMP ports accept
connections only from specified IP addresses. The whitelist supports both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses. You
can only configure this feature in the web interface.
Note: If you use dynamic IP address assignment, ensure that you keep the whitelist up to date with
the latest assigned addresses for computers authorized to access the system. Failing to update the
whitelist means these computers cannot connect to the system.
Enable a Whitelist
You can enable a whitelist so that you can add specific IPv4 and IPv6 addresses to the approved list.
To enable a whitelist:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Global Security > Access.
2 Select Enable Whitelist.
Add IP Addresses to a Whitelist
You can add specific IP addresses to a whitelist.
To add addresses to a whitelist:
1 Click the Edit Whitelist link.
2 Select address type IPv4 or IPv6.
3 In the address text field, enter the IP address of the system you want to allow. Follow the format
suggested by the address type you selected. Select Add.
Repeat this step for all the IP addresses you want to add. You can add web server and SNMP
addresses.
If you entered an address in error, highlight the address in the list and select Clear.
IPv4 Address Formats
The whitelist configuration requires single IP addresses, a range of addresses, or an IP and netmask. The
netmask represents the number of valid bits of the IPv4 address to use. The following are valid IPv4 formats:
● 10.12.128.7
● 172.26.16.0/24
IPv6 Address Formats
For IPv6 addresses, you can use Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR) notation to represent a range of
IP addresses. The following are valid IPv6 formats:
● ::1
● 2001:db8:abc:def:10.242.12.23
Polycom, Inc.
168
Security
● 2001:db8::/48
● 2001:db8:abcd:0012::0/64
● 2001:0db8:85a3:0000:0000:1234:0abc:cdef
Note: The system can accept up to 30 IP address entries for the whitelist.
Port Lockout
Port lockout protects against brute-force attacks by temporarily locking the login port after a configurable
number of unsuccessful login attempts have been made, regardless of which account was used. Port
lockout is supported only on the web interface, and only Admin users are allowed to log in to the web
interface. If external authentication is not in use, users can successfully log in to the web interface only by
using the local Admin account credentials. However, when external authentication is in use, any number of
external accounts can be considered to be Admin users on the system. Failed logins to any of these
accounts, or to an unknown account, are all counted against the configured number allowed failed login
attempts to the web interface.
The following is an example of how the port lockout feature works.
A RealPresence Group system web interface is configured with these settings:
● Admin Settings > Security > Global Security > Authentication> Enable Active Directory
External Authentication is enabled, a valid Active Directory Server Address is configured, as are
both the Active Directory Admin Group and Active Directory User Group settings.
● Admin Settings > Security > Global Security > Access > Lock Port after Failed Logins is set to
4.
● Admin Settings > Security > Global Security > Access > Port Lock Duration is set to 1 Minute.
● Admin Settings > Security > Global Security > Access > Reset Port Lock Counter After is set
to 1 Hour.
Scenario 1: Web interface locked due to excessive failed logins
A user fails to log in to the local Admin account two times on the web interface, and another user fails to
log in to the external Active Directory ‘SuperUser’ account in a separate web interface session. The
‘SuperUser’ account is defined as part of the Active Directory Admin Group on the Active Directory Server.
This means that three failed attempts have been made on the web interface port—two by one user and one
by a second user. If the next attempt to log in to the web interface by either user or some other user is
successful, the failed login counter for the web interface port is reset to zero, allowing 4 more failed attempts
to occur on the web interface.
On the other hand, if after the third failed login attempt, any user makes a fourth unsuccessful attempt to
any account on the web interface, further attempts to access the web interface using any account
credentials from any user are locked out for 1 Minute, the value of the Port Lock Duration period. After the
1 Minute port lock period has past, logins will once again be allowed. As this example illustrates, the failed
login attempts made to the web interface accumulate across any attempts to any account and/or by any
user.
Scenario 2: Failed attempts counter resets after failed login window closes
Polycom, Inc.
169
Security
A user fails to log in to the local Admin account two times on the web interface, and another user fails to
log in to the external Active Directory ‘SuperUser’ account in a separate web interface session. The
‘SuperUser’ account is defined as part of the Active Directory Admin Group on the Active Directory Server.
This means that three failed attempts have been made on the web interface port—two by one user and one
by a second user. If no more failed attempts are made within 1 Hour of the first failed attempt (which is the
value of the Reset Port Lock Counter After setting), the failed login attempts counter is reset to zero, and
4 failed attempts are allowed again before the web interface is locked.
Configure the Port Lockout Setting to Lock the Login Port
You can configure the port lockout settings to limit the number of failed logins to your system. The telnet port
has a port lock feature that is enabled regardless of the state of the port lock feature configuration.
Specifically, the telnet server disconnects a telnet login session after 5 failed login attempts. If a new session
is started, another 5 attempts are allowed.
To configure port lockout:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Global Security > Access.
2 Configure these settings and click Save.
Setting
Description
Lock Port after Failed Logins
Specifies the number of failed login attempts allowed before the system locks
the web interface from accepting logins. If set to Off, the system does not
lock the web interface due to failed login attempts.
Port Lock Duration
Specifies the amount of time that a web interface remains locked due to failed
login attempts. After this time period expires, the failed login attempts counter
is reset to zero and logins to the web interface are once again allowed.
Reset Port Lock Counter After
Specifies a “failed login window” period of time, starting with the first failed
login attempt, during which subsequent failed login attempts will be counted
against the maximum number allowed (Lock Port after Failed Logins). If the
number of failed login attempts made during this window does not reach the
maximum number allowed, the failed login attempts counter is reset to zero at
the end of this window.
Note: The failed login attempts counter is always reset to zero anytime a user
successfully logs in.
Encryption
AES encryption is a standard feature on all RealPresence Group systems. When it is enabled, the system
automatically encrypts calls to other systems that have AES encryption enabled.
If encryption is enabled on the system, a locked padlock icon appears on the monitor when a call is
encrypted. If a call is unencrypted, an unlocked padlock appears on the monitor. In a multipoint call, some
connections might be encrypted while others are not. The padlock icon might not accurately indicate
whether the call is encrypted if the call is cascaded or includes an audio-only endpoint. To avoid security
risks, Polycom recommends that all participants communicate the state of their padlock icon verbally at the
beginning of a call.
Polycom, Inc.
170
Security
Keep in mind the following points regarding AES encryption:
● AES encryption is not supported on systems registered to an Avaya H.323 gatekeeper.
● For RealPresence Group systems with a maximum speed of 6 Mbps for unencrypted calls, the
maximum speed for encrypted SIP calls is 4 Mbps.
RealPresence Group systems provide the following AES cryptographic algorithms to ensure flexibility when
negotiating secure media transport:
● H.323 (per H.235.6)
 AES-CBC-128 / DH-1024
 AES-CBC-256 / DH-2048
● SIP (per RFCs 3711, 4568, 6188)
 AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_32
 AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80
 AES_CM_256_HMAC_SHA1_32
 AES_CM_256_HMAC_SHA1_80
RealPresence Group systems also support the use of FIPS 140 validated cryptography, which is required
in some instances, such as when used by the U.S. federal government. When the Require FIPS 140
Cryptography setting is enabled, all cryptography used on the system comes from a software module that
has been validated to FIPS 140-2 standards. You can find its FIPS 140-2 validation certificate here:
http://csrc.nist.gov/groups/STM/cmvp/documents/140-1/140val-all.htm#1747.
Configure Encryption
You can configure encryption settings on your system.
To configure encryption settings:
1 Do one of the following:
 In the local interface, go to
> Settings > Administration > Security > Settings.
 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Global Security > Encryption.
2 Configure these settings.
Polycom, Inc.
171
Security
Setting
Description
Require AES Encryption for
Calls
Specifies how to encrypt calls with other sites that support AES encryption.
• Off—AES encryption is disabled.
• When Available—AES encryption is used in calls with systems that
support it. Calls without encryption are allowed when connecting to
systems that don't support it. For multipoint calls, this means that some
systems might be connected with AES encryption while others are
connected without it.
• Required for Video Calls Only—AES encryption is used in all video calls.
Calls with systems that do not support it are disconnected. Audio calls
using an attached SoundStation IP 7000 are allowed to connect.
• Required for All Calls—AES encryption is used in all calls. Calls with
systems that do not support it are disconnected. Audio calls using an
attached SoundStation IP 7000 are not allowed to connect, since these
calls are not encrypted.
Require FIPS 140 Cryptography
(web interface only)
Enables the exclusive use of the FIPS 140-2-validated software cryptography
module for cryptographic functions. Also disables all “weak” protocols and
ciphers, including:
• SSLv2
• SSLv3
• Non-FIPS 140-2 approved TLS cipher suites
Configure Encryption Settings for SVC Calls
You must complete two tasks to enable encryption for SVC calls:
● Set the transport protocol.
● Set AES encryption.
To set the transport protocol:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network.
2 Click SIP to expand the section.
3 In the Transport Protocol list, select TLS.
4 Click Save.
Set AES Encryption for SVC Calls
You can set AES encryption for SVC calls.
To set AES encryption:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Global Security.
2 Click Encryption to expand the section.
3 In the Require AES Encryption for Calls list, select When Available, Required for Video Calls
Only, or Required for All Calls.
4 Click Save.
Polycom, Inc.
172
Security
For more information on SVC-based calling, refer to Setting Call Preferences for SVC.
Configure Encryption Settings for Skype for Business 2015
RealPresence Group systems support media encryption in calls with Skype for Business 2015, and the
system must be configured to support encryption so that calls can connect with encryption. For more
information about encryption configuration in a Skype for Business 2015 environment, refer to the Polycom
Unified Communications for Microsoft Environments Solution Deployment Guide at support.polycom.com.
Verify H.323 Media Encryption
To provide extra security for encrypted H.323 calls, the RealPresence Group system provides an encryption
check code. Both parties in a call can use this check code to verify that their call is not being intercepted by
a 3rd party.
The check code is a 16-digit hexadecimal number that is calculated so that the number is the same at both
sites in the call. The numbers are identical if, and only if, the key generation algorithm is performed between
the two sites in the call and is not intercepted and modified by a 3rd party.
To verify the encryption check codes match:
1 Establish an encrypted H.323 call between two sites.
2 At each site, locate the Call Statistics information on the Place a Call screen of the web interface.
The check code also displays under Diagnostics > System > Call Statistics in the Transmit
column of the Call Encryption section.
3 Verbally verify that the code is the same at both sites.
4 Do one of the following:
 If the codes match, the call is secure. Proceed with the call.
 If the codes do not match, then there is a possibility that the key exchange is compromised. Hang
up the call. Next, check the network path from the local system to the far-end system to determine
if the systems are experiencing a Man in the Middle attack. This occurs when a foreign device
tricks the local system into creating an encryption key using information from the imposter. Then,
the imposter can decode the data sent by the local system and eavesdrop on the call.
Visual Security Classification
This feature helps RealPresence Group system call participants remain conscious of the security
classification when in a BroadWorks managed call. During and throughout a call, the Visual Security
Classification (VSC) provides a visual indication to the system user of the calls security level which is
dynamically calculated using the lowest security rating of all users and gateways within the call. During a
call, you can override the security classification and assign a lower security classification level.
Keep the following points in mind:
● Each BroadSoft-registered endpoint in the conference has a security classification level.
● BroadSoft Application Server determines the default security classification level for a BroadWorks
conference, and that default is the lowest of the levels involved in the conference. VSC is only
supported on BroadWorks conferencing systems which are VSC aware and which have visibility of
all participants in the call. VSC is not supported on Polycom VMRs, as BroadWorks does not have
visibility of the callers on the Polycom MCU.
Polycom, Inc.
173
Security
● The security classification level is shared with all the endpoints that support the Visual Security
Classification feature.
● The security classification level of a conference call is re-evaluated whenever an endpoint enters or
leaves a conference or when a user modifies the security classification level of an endpoint.
Any user who joins the call from an outside or unknown network is designated an “Unclassified” security
classification level.
The Visual Security Classification feature is disabled by default. Enable it with a provisioning server or
through the web interface. Before enabling this feature, ensure the following:
● The RealPresence Group system must be registered to a BroadSoft R20 call server.
● The Multipoint Video Conferencing option key must be disabled.
● AS-SIP must be disabled.
Enable Visual Security Classification
You can enable Visual Security Classification on your system.
To enable Visual Security Classification:
1 From the web interface, navigate to Admin Settings > Security > Global Security.
2 Under Visual Security Classification, select Enable Visual Security Classification and click Save.
3 Under Visual Security Classification, click the Adjust SIP Settings link or navigate to Admin
Settings > Network > IP Network > SIP.
4 Under Registrar Server Type, select Unknown.
Managing Certificates and Revocation
If your organization has deployed a public key infrastructure (PKI) for securing connections between
devices on your network, Polycom recommends that you have a strong understanding of certificate
management and how it applies to RealPresence Group systems before you integrate these products with
the PKI.
RealPresence Group systems can use certificates to authenticate network connections to and from the
system. Other web applications also use certificates, as you might notice when you navigate the Internet.
The system uses configuration and management techniques typical of PKI to manage certificates,
certificate signing requests, and revocation checking. ANSI X.509 standards regulate the characteristics of
certificates and revocation.
Systems can generate requests for certificates (CSRs) that can be then sent to a certificate authority (CA)
for official issuance. The CA is the trusted entity that issues, or signs, digital certificates for others. Once
signed by the CA, you can install the certificate on the RealPresence Group system for use in all TLS
connections used by the system.
Systems support, and typically require, the generation and use of two separate certificates when used in an
environment that has a fully deployed PKI:
1 A Server certificate—the system’s web server presents this certificate after receiving connection
requests from browsers attempting to connect to the system web interface.
Polycom, Inc.
174
Security
2 A Client certificate—the system presents this certificate to a remote server when challenged to
provide a certificate as part of authenticating the identity of the system before allowing it to connect
to the remote server. Examples of remote servers include the RealPresence® Resource Manager
system, a SIP proxy/registrar server, or an LDAP directory server.
When systems are deployed in an environment that does not have a fully deployed PKI, you do not need to
install these certificates because all systems automatically generate self-signed certificates that can be
used to establish secure TLS connections. However, when a full PKI has been deployed, self-signed
certificates are not trusted by the PKI and so signed certificates must be used. The following sections
describe how to generate and use certificates by using the system web interface.
Configure Certificate Validation Settings
Certificates are authorized externally when they are signed by the CA. The certificates can be automatically
validated when they are used to establish an authenticated network connection. To perform this validation,
the RealPresence Group system must have certificates installed for all CAs that are part of the trust chain.
A trust chain is the hierarchy of CAs that have issued certificates from the device being authenticated,
through the intermediate CAs that have issued certificates to the various CAs, leading back to a root CA,
which is a known trusted CA. The following sections describe how to install and manage these certificates.
A certificate exchange is between a server and a client, both of which are peers. When a user is accessing
the system web interface, the system is the server and the web browser is the client application. In other
situations, such as when the system connects to LDAP directory services, the system is the client and the
LDAP directory server is the server.
To configure certificate validation settings:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Certificates > Certificate Options.
2 Configure these settings on the Certificates screen and click Save.
Setting
Description
Maximum Peer Certificate
Chain Depth
Specifies how many links a certificate chain can have. The term peer
certificate refers to any certificate sent by the far-end host to the
RealPresence Group system when a network connection is being established
between the two systems.
Always Validate Peer
Certificates from Browser
Controls whether the system requires a browser to present a valid certificate
when it tries to connect to the web interface.
Always Validate Peer
Certificates from Server
Controls whether the RealPresence Group system requires the remote server
to present a valid certificate when connecting to it for services such as those
listed for client-type CSRs in Create Certificate Signing Requests (CSRs)
(provisioning, directory, SIP, and so forth).
Installed Certificates
Allows the administrator to either view installed certificates or to add a new
certificate.
Signing Request Server
Allows the administrator to create a new server request certificate.
Signing Request Client
Allows the administrator to create a new client request certificate.
Polycom, Inc.
175
Security
Install Certificates
After you have downloaded a CSR and it has been signed by a CA, the resulting certificate is ready to install
on the RealPresence Group system. The following section outlines how to do this, and the procedure is the
same to install the client certificate, server certificate, and any required CA-type certificates.
To add a signed certificate on the Certificates screen:
1 To open the certificate section, at Installed Certificates, click View and Add.
2 Next to Add Certificate, click Browse to search for and select a certificate. You might be installing a
client or server certificate that has been signed by a CA after having been previously generated as a
CSR, or installing a CA certificate needed by the system to validate a certificate it receives from
another system.
3 Click Open.
The system checks the certificate data and adds it to the list. If you don't see the certificate in the list,
the system was unable to recognize the certificate. This process is sometimes referred to as installing
a certificate.
You can select a certificate in the list to view its contents. You can also remove a certificate from the
list by clicking Remove.
4 If needed, click Close to close the certificate section of the screen.
5 Click Save.
When you add a CA certificate to the system, the certificate becomes trusted for the purpose of
validating peer certificates.
Note: If you do not add the server certificate for the system before using the web interface, you might
receive error messages from your browser stating that the security certificate for the web site
“Polycom” cannot be verified. Most browsers allow the user to proceed after this warning is displayed.
See the Help section of your browser for instructions on how to do this.
Certificate Signing Requests (CSRs)
The RealPresence Group system allows you to install one client and one server certificate for identification
of the system to network peers. In order to obtain these certificates you must first create a Certificate Signing
Request (CSR) for each certificate. This request, also known as an unsigned certificate, must be submitted
to a CA so that it can be signed, after which the certificate can be installed on the system. Whether you need
to generate a client-type CSR, a server-type CSR, or both depends on which features and services you
intend to use, and whether your network environment supports certificate-based authentication for those
services. In most cases, both certificates are needed.
For example, if your system is configured to use any of the following features, and the servers providing
those services perform certificate-based authentication before allowing access to them, you must create a
client-type CSR and add the resulting certificate signed by the CA:
● RealPresence Resource Manager system Provisioning
● RealPresence Resource Manager system Monitoring
● RealPresence Resource Manager system LDAP Directory
● RealPresence Resource Manager system Presence
● Calendaring
Polycom, Inc.
176
Security
● SIP
● 802.1X
The system web server uses the server-type CSR and resulting certificate whenever a user attempts to
connect to the RealPresence Group system web interface. The web server does so by presenting the server
certificate to the browser to identify the system to the browser as part of allowing the browser to connect to
the system. The browser’s user needs the server certificate if he or she wants to be certain about the identity
of the system he or she is connecting to. Settings in the web browser typically control the validation of the
server certificate, but you can also validate the certificate manually.
To obtain a client or server certificate, you must first create a CSR. You can create one client and one server
CSR and submit each to the appropriate CA for signing. After the CSR is signed by a CA, it becomes a
certificate you can add to the system.
Create Certificate Signing Requests (CSRs)
You can create server and client CSRs to identify your system to your network peers.
To create a CSR:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Certificates > Certificate Options.
2 Click Create for the type of CSR you want to create, Signing Request Server or Signing Request
Client. The procedure is the same for server and client CSRs.
3 Configure these settings on the Create Signing Request screen and click Create.
Setting
Description
Hash Algorithm
Specifies the hash algorithm for the CSR. You may select SHA-256 or keep the
default SHA-1.
Common Name (CN)
Specifies the name that the system assigns to the CSR.
Polycom recommends the following guidelines for configuring the Common Name:
• For systems registered in DNS, use the Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN)
of the system.
• For systems not registered in DNS, use the IP address of the system.
Maximum Characters: 64; truncated if necessary.
Default is blank
Organizational Unit (OU)
Specifies the unit of business defined by your organization. Default is blank.
Maximum Characters: 64
Organization (O)
Specifies your organization’s name. Default is blank.
Maximum Characters: 64
City or Locality (L)
Specifies the city where your organization is located. Default is blank.
Maximum Characters: 128
State or Province (ST)
Specifies the state or province where your organization is located. Default is
blank.
Maximum Characters: 128
Country (C)
Displays the country selected in Admin Settings > General Settings > My
Information. Not editable.
Polycom, Inc.
177
Security
Setting
Description
SAN: FQDN:
Specifies the FQDN assigned to the system. This is the same as the Common
Name (CN), but is not truncated. Default is blank.
Maximum Characters: 253
SAN: Additional Name:
Specifies an additional name. Default is blank.
Maximum Characters: 253
SAN: IPv4 Address:
Default is the IPv4 address of system.
Maximum Characters: 15
SAN: IPv4 Address (DNS):
Default is the IPv4 address of system. This field provides the IPv4 address in
ASCII format, which is sometimes needed for MSFT server interoperability.
Maximum Characters: 15
SAN: IPv6 Global Address:
Default is the IPv6 Global Address of system.
Maximum Characters: 40
SAN: IPv6 Site Local
Address:
Default is the IPv6 Site Local Address of system.
Maximum Characters: 40
SAN: IPv6 Link Local
Address:
Default is the IPv6 Link Local Address of system.
Maximum Characters: 40
Note: The RealPresence Group system supports only one OU field. If you want the signed certificate
to include more than one OU field, you must download and edit the CSR manually.
After you create the CSR, a message indicating that the CSR has been created displays. Two links appear
next to the signing request that you just created (Signing Request Server or Signing Request Client).
● Download Signing Request enables you to download the CSR so that it can be sent to a CA for
signature.
● Create enables you to view the fields of the CSR as they are currently set in the CSR. If you change
any of the values you previously configured, you can click Create to generate a new CSR that can
then be downloaded.
Note: Only a single outstanding CSR of either type can exist at a time. After the CSR is generated, it
is important to get it signed and installed before attempting to generate a different CSR of the same
type. For example, if you generate a client CSR and then, prior to having it signed and installed on the
RealPresence Group system, another client CSR is generated, the previous CSR is discarded and
invalidated, and any attempt to install a signed version of it will result in an error.
Certificate Revocation Settings
When certificate validation is enabled (refer to Configure Certificate Validation Settings), the RealPresence
Group system tries to validate the peer certificate chain on secure connection attempts for the applicable
network services.
Part of the validation process includes a step called revocation checking. This type of check involves
consulting with the CA that issued the certificate in question to see whether the certificate is still active or
has been revoked for some reason. Revoked certificates are considered invalid because they might have
Polycom, Inc.
178
Security
been compromised in some way or improperly issued, or for other similar reasons. The CA is responsible
for maintaining the revocation status of every certificate that it issues. The system can check this revocation
status by using either of the following methods:
● Certificate revocation lists (CRLs). A CRL is a list of certificates that have been revoked by the CA.
A CRL must be installed on the RealPresence Group system for each CA whose certificate has been
installed on the system.
● The Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP). OCSP allows the system to contact an OCSP
responder, a network server that provides real-time certificate status through a query/response
message exchange.
Note: The RealPresence Group systems automatically download CRLs from the Certificate
Authorities (CAs) that make CRLs available for retrieval by HTTP.
However, for CAs that do not allow HTTP retrieval of CRLs, the RealPresence Group system
administrator is responsible for manually installing and updating CRLs ahead of their expiration. It is
extremely important that CRLs be kept up to date.
Configure the Certificate Revocation List (CRL) Method
You can configure the CRL revocation method settings on the system web interface.
To configure the CRL revocation method:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Certificates > Revocation.
2 Configure these settings on the Revocation screen and click Save.
Setting
Description
Revocation Method
To enable the CRL revocation method, select CRL.
Allow Incomplete
Revocation Checks
When this field is enabled, a certificate in the chain is verified without a revocation
status check if no corresponding CRL for the issuing CA is installed.
The RealPresence Group system assumes that the lack of a CRL means the
certificate is not revoked. If a CRL is installed, the system performs a revocation
check when validating the certificate.
Add CRL
•
•
Click Browse to search for and select a CRL.
Click Open to add the CRL to the list.
3 You can also view automatically and manually downloaded CRLs on this screen. To remove a CRL
from the list, click Remove.
Note: If the Always Validate Peer Certificates from Browsers setting is enabled and the expired
CRL is for a CA that is part of the trust chain for the client certificate sent by your browser, you can no
longer connect to the system web interface because the revocation check always fails. In this case,
unless the system web interface can be accessed by a user whose client certificate's trust chain does
not include the CA with the expired CRL, you must delete all certificates and CRLS from the system
and then reinstall them. For more information, see Delete Certificates and CRLs.
Configure the OCSP Revocation Method
You can configure the OSCP revocation method settings in the system web interface.
Polycom, Inc.
179
Security
To configure the OSCP revocation method:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Certificates > Revocation.
2 Configure these settings on the Revocation screen and click Save.
Setting
Description
Revocation Method
To enable the OSCP revocation method, select OSCP.
Allow Incomplete
Revocation Checks
When this field is enabled, the RealPresence Group system treats the following
response from the OCSP responder as a successful revocation checks that would
otherwise be considered a failed check:
• If the OCSP responder responds that the status is unknown or if no response is
received, the system treats this as a successful revocation check.
Regardless of the state of this setting, the following statements apply:
• If the OCSP responder indicates a known revoked status, the room system
treats this as a revocation check failure and does not allow the connection.
• If the OCSP responder indicates a known good status, the room system treats
this as a successful revocation check and allows the connection.
Global Responder Address
Specifies the URI of the responder that services OCSP requests (for example,
http://responder.example.com/ocsp). This responder is used for all
OCSP validation when Use Responder Specified in Certificate is disabled, and
is sometimes used even when Use Responder Specified in Certificate is
enabled. Polycom therefore recommends that you always enter a Global
Responder Address regardless of the value chosen for the Use Responder
Specified in Certificate setting.
Use Responder Specified
in Certificate
In some cases, the certificate itself includes the responder address. When this field
is enabled, the system attempts to use the address in the certificate (when
present) instead of the Global Responder Address specified in the previous field.
Note: The RealPresence Group system supports only the use of HTTP URLs in
the AIA field of a certificate when Use Responder Specified in Certificate is
enabled.
Note: For validation of the OCSP response message, if you use OCSP, you might need to install one
or more additional CA certificates on the RealPresence Group systems.
Certificates and Security Profiles within a Provisioned System
When your RealPresence Group system is provisioned through the RealPresence Resource Manager system
and you use PKI certificates, consider the following information. Be sure to enable provisioning after you
follow the procedures applicable to each Security Profile type.
● To use the Maximum Security Profile with provisioning:
 The RealPresence Resource Manager system must be using Maximum Security Mode.
 You must manually assign the Maximum Security Profile to the RealPresence Group system during
installation using the setup wizard, or afterwards using the web interface.
 You must use full PKI and observe the following procedures before you enable provisioning on
the RealPresence Group system:
Polycom, Inc.
180
Security
1
You must install a signed client certificate on the system to enable the provisioning connection
to be authenticated by the RealPresence Resource Manager system.
2
Decide whether to automatically validate web clients by enabling the Always Validate Peer
Certificates from Browsers setting. If you do enable the setting, you’ll need to install a
signed server certificate and all of the CA certificates needed to validate browser certificates
for all web clients. Then configure the certificate revocation method.
3
Decide whether to validate servers by enabling the Always Validate Peer Certificates from
Servers setting. If you do enable the setting, you must install of the CA certificates needed to
validate server certificates from all remote servers. Then adjust the certificate revocation
method accordingly. For example, you might need to load additional CRLs if you use the CRL
revocation method).
● To use the Medium or High Security Profile with provisioning:
 The RealPresence Resource Manager system must be using commercial mode.
 You must manually assign the Medium or High Security Profile to the RealPresence Group
system during installation using the setup wizard, or afterwards using the web interface.
 Configure PKI according to your company’s guidelines.
● To use the Low Security Profile with provisioning:
 The RealPresence Resource Manager system must be using commercial mode.
 You can enable provisioning in the setup wizard. All provisionable settings are taken from the
RealPresence Resource Manager system.
Delete Certificates and CRLs
In some cases, expired certificates or CRLs might prevent you from accessing the web interface. You can
use the local interface to reset your system without certificates, to restore access to the web interface.
To delete all certificates and CRLs the RealPresence Group system is using:
1 In the local interface, go to Settings > System Information > Diagnostics > Reset System.
2 If needed, enter the Admin ID and Password.
3 Enable the Delete Certificates field.
4 Select Reset System.
The system restarts after deleting all installed certificates and CRLs.
RealPresence Server Address Configuration in PKI-enabled Environments
When configuring the server addresses for the services listed in Configure Certificate Validation Settings as
potentially needing a client-type CSR (such as SIP, LDAP directory etc.), you might need to use a particular
address format if the server address is contained in the server certificate that it presents when connecting
to it. If this is the case, use the following guidance for configuring these server addresses on the
RealPresence Group system:
● If the certificate contains the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the server, use the FQDN when
configuring the server address.
● If the certificate contains the IP address of the server, use the IP address when configuring the server
address.
● If the certificate does not contain any the server's address in any form, you can use either the FQDN
or the IP address of the server when configuring the server address.
Polycom, Inc.
181
Security
Configure a Security Banner
Security banners consist of text that displays on the Login screen and in a window when you log in remotely.
The security banner is not supported on the Polycom Touch Control.
The following is an example of banner text:
This machine is the property of Polycom, Inc., and its use is governed by company
guidelines. You have NO right of privacy when using this machine.
To configure a security banner:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Security Banner.
2 Configure these settings and click Save.
Setting
Description
Enable Security Banner
Specifies whether to display a security banner.
Banner Text
Custom—Allows you to enter text to use for the banner.
DoD—Specifies that the system displays a default U.S. Department of Defense
security banner. You cannot view or change this text on the local interface, but you
can change the text on the web interface.
Local System Banner
Text
If you enable the security banner on the web interface, enter up to 2,408 single-byte
or 1,024 double-byte characters. The text wraps to the next line as you type, but you
can press ENTER anywhere in a line to force a line break at a specific place.
Remote Access Banner
Text
This field is visible only when you use the web interface. You can type or paste a
maximum of 2,408 single-byte or 1,024 double-byte characters. The text wraps to the
next line as you type, but you can press ENTER anywhere in a line to force a line break
at a specific place.
Configure a Meeting Password
If you set up a meeting password, users must supply the password to join multipoint calls on the
RealPresence Group system when the call uses the internal multipoint option instead of a bridge.
Remember the following points about meeting passwords:
● Do not set a meeting password if multipoint calls include audio-only endpoints. Audio-only endpoints
are unable to participate in password-protected calls.
● Microsoft Office Communicator clients are unable to join password-protected multipoint calls.
● SIP endpoints are unable to connect to password-protected multipoint calls.
● If a meeting password is set for a call, People+Content™ IP clients must enter the password before
joining the meeting.
● Meeting passwords cannot contain spaces or be more than 32 characters.
To configure a meeting password:
1 Do one of the following:
Polycom, Inc.
182
Security
 In the local interface, go to
> Settings > Administration > Security > Passwords.
 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Meeting Password.
2 Enable and configure the Meeting Password setting.
Polycom, Inc.
183
Control and Navigation
You can customize how the remote control works, use various controllers for the system, and set the date
and time on your system. See the following topics for more information:
● Remote Control
● Connecting Control and Accessibility Equipment
● Polycom® RealPresence® Medialign™ Solution
● Polycom® Concierge Solution
● SmartPairing
● Configure Contact Information
● Configure System Location Settings
● Configure Room System Language Settings
● Configure System Date and Time Settings
● Configure Sleep Settings
Remote Control
You can customize the behavior of the remote control to support the user’s environment. Note the following
regarding remote control behavior:
● If the room system is paired and connected with a RealPresence Touch, the remote control can
perform some limited functions.
● If the Polycom RealPresence Group system is paired and connected with a Polycom Touch Control,
the remote control is disabled.
● The room system remote control IR transmits a modulated frequency of 38 kHz.
● When a USB keyboard is connected to a room system, you can enter only numbers with the remote
control on the local interface's Place a Call > Keypad or Place a Call > Contacts screens.
Configure Remote Control Behavior
You can customize the remote control behavior by configuring settings in the system web interface.
To configure remote control behavior:
1 In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > System Settings >
Remote Control, Keypad, and Power.
2 Configure these settings.
Polycom, Inc.
184
Control and Navigation
Setting
Description
Keypad Audio
Confirmation
Specifies whether to play a voice confirmation of numbers selected with the remote
control or keypad.
Numeric Keypad Function
Specifies whether pressing number buttons on the remote control or keypad moves
the camera to presets or generates touch tones (DTMF tones). If this is set to
Presets, users can generate DTMF tones by pressing the # key on the remote
while on a video screen.
Use Non-Polycom Remote
Configures the system to accept input from a programmable, non-Polycom remote
control. In most cases the Polycom remote works as designed, even when this
feature is enabled. However, try disabling this feature if you experience difficulty
with the Polycom remote. For more information about system IR codes, refer to the
Polycom RealPresence Group Series Integrator Reference Guide.
Channel ID
Specifies the IR identification channel to which the room system responds. Set the
Channel ID to the same channel as the remote control. The default setting is 3. If
the remote control is set to channel 3, it can control a room system set to any
Channel ID. For more information about changing this setting, refer to Configuring
the Remote Control Channel ID for a Specific System.
Hang-up Button Long
Press
Specifies the behavior of the remote control Hang-up button when you press it for a
long time:
• Hang-up / Power Off—Holding down the Hang-up button powers off the room
system.
• Hang-up / Sleep—Holding down the Hang-up button puts the system to sleep.
• Hang-up Only—Holding down the Hang-up button has no function other than
hanging up the call.
# Button Function
Specifies the behavior of the # button on the remote control:
• #, then @—Pressing the # button once on the keypad displays the hash sign.
Pressing the # button twice, quickly, displays the commercial at (@) symbol.
• @, then #—Pressing the # button once on the keypad displays the @ symbol.
Pressing the # button twice, quickly, displays the # sign.
Configuring the Remote Control Channel ID for a Specific System
You can configure the Channel ID so that the remote control affects only one system, even if other systems
are in the same room.
Note: The Polycom Touch Control virtual remote control is always set to channel 3.
If the remote control is set to channel 3, it can control a room system set to any Channel ID. If the system
does not respond to the remote control, set the remote control channel ID to 3 starting with step 3 in the
following procedure. Then follow the entire procedure to configure the system and remote control channel
ID settings.
While performing the following procedures, blocking the IR signal from the remote control can prevent the signal from
being received by the system, causing the system to take an action that corresponds to any of the remote control button
presses.
Polycom, Inc.
185
Control and Navigation
Confirm a Channel ID
You can confirm the correct channel ID to control your system.
To confirm a channel ID:
1 While blocking the IR signal from the remote control using your hand or some other object, press
and hold
and
for 2-3 seconds.
2 After the LED on the remote control comes on, release both keys. The LED remains lit for 10
seconds.
3 While the LED is lit, enter the 2-digit ID between 00 and 15 that you believe is the channel ID.
If you do not enter the ID during the 10 seconds the LED is lit, the LED flashes six times and you must
repeat steps 1 and 2. Be sure to enter the ID during the next 10-second window.
4 If you entered the current channel ID, the LED flashes twice. Otherwise, the LED flashes six times
and allows you to repeat step 3.
Save a Channel ID for a Specific System
You can save the channel ID for a system so that it can be configured for your remote control.
To save a channel ID for a specific system:
1 While blocking the IR signal from the remote control using your hand or some other object, press
and hold
and
for 2-3 seconds.
2 After the red LED on the remote control comes on, release both keys. The LED remains lit for 10
seconds.
3 While the LED is lit, enter a 2-digit ID between 00 and 15.
If you do not enter the ID during the 10 seconds the LED is lit, the LED flashes six times and you must
repeat steps 1 and 2. Be sure to enter the ID during the next 10-second window.
4 If the channel ID is saved successfully, the LED flashes twice. Otherwise, the LED flashes six times
and you must repeat steps 1 - 3.
Configure a Channel ID for the Remote Control
You can configure a channel ID to control a specific system in a room with more than one system.
To configure the channel ID:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > System Settings > Remote
Control, Keypad, and Power.
2 Select the Channel ID.
3 Click Save.
To find the Channel ID for your monitor, check the connection label on the monitor, or refer to the
monitor’s manufacturer documentation.
Polycom, Inc.
186
Control and Navigation
Connecting Control and Accessibility Equipment
The RealPresence Group 300, RealPresence Group 310, and RealPresence Group 500 systems provide
one serial port to allow you to control the system through a touch-panel using the API.
The RealPresence Group 700 system also provides one serial port, but depending on your system’s
capabilities, you might be able to use the RS-232 serial port to control the system through a touch panel
using the API.
Ensure that the room system is powered off before you connect devices to it.
Third-Party Touch Panel Controls
As part of a custom room installation, you can connect an AMX or Crestron control panel to a RealPresence
Group system RS-232 serial port. To get started, complete these two main tasks:
● Program the control panel. Refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Integrator Reference
Guide for information about the API commands.
● Set the desired Login Mode for the control panel on the RealPresence Group system. For information
on the available settings for Login Mode, see Configure RS-232 Serial Port Settings.
Configure RS-232 Serial Port Settings
You can configure RS-232 serial port settings in the system web interface.
To configure RS-232 serial port settings:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Serial Ports.
2 Configure the following settings in the sections on the Serial Ports screen.
Setting
Description
RS-232 Mode
Specifies the mode used for the serial port. Available settings depend on the RealPresence
Group system model.
• Off—Disables the serial port.
• Pass Thru—Passes data to an RS-232 device, such as a serial printer or certain types
of medical devices, connected to the serial port of the far-site system. Only available in
point-to-point calls.
• Closed Caption—Receives closed captions from a dial-up modem or a stenographer
machine through the RS-232 port.
• Camera Control—Passes data to and from a third-party camera. For more information
about using third-party cameras, refer to Configure a Third-Party Camera.
• Control—Receives control signals from a touch-panel control. Allows any device
connected to the RS-232 port to control the system using API commands.
Note: If you have a RealPresence Group 300, 310, or 500 system, use only the Polycom
serial cable with part number 2457-63542-001 to connect devices to the RS-232 serial
port.
Baud Rate, Parity,
Data Bits, Stop Bits
Set these to the same values that they are set to on the serial device.
Polycom, Inc.
187
Control and Navigation
Setting
Description
RS-232 Flow
Control
This setting works with RS-232 modes that are not currently available. The setting is not
currently configurable.
Login Mode
Specifies the credentials necessary for a control system to connect to the RS-232 port.
• Admin password only—Requires the admin password, if one has been set, when the
control system connects. (default)
• Username/Password—Requires the user name and the admin password, if one has
been set, when the control system connects.
• None—No user name or password is required when the control system connects.
Note: This setting only displays when RS-232 Mode is set to Control.
Polycom® RealPresence® Medialign™ Solution
The Polycom® RealPresence® Medialign™ solution includes several integrated Polycom components,
including a RealPresence Group 500 system codec. Some configuration steps are required in the system’s
web interface, including single or dual monitor and RS-232 serial port settings. For setup and configuration
information, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Medialign Administrator Guide at support.polycom.com.
Polycom® Concierge Solution
RealPresence Group systems now support the Polycom® Concierge solution. This enterprise solution is an
integrated system of Polycom products that enhance the meeting experience by allowing end users to
extend and control their collaboration experience using personal computing devices such as smartphones,
laptops, and desktop systems.
When a RealPresence Group system is provisioned as part of a Polycom Concierge deployment, users with
supported and provisioned devices can wirelessly connect to the system. The devices must be running
Polycom® RealPresence® Mobile or Polycom® RealPresence® Desktop.
Examples of collaboration and control functions that users might perform include the following:
● Join a meeting in progress upon entering the meeting room
● Present content
● Add participants, hang up the call, change the volume, and mute the call
● View and annotate shared content
● Record the call
To access the collaboration and control functions, users must first pair their personal device with a room
system. Administrators have three options for providing this information:
● Configure a beacon to broadcast the location details for the room system. For more information, refer
to the Polycom Concierge Solution Deployment Guide at support.polycom.com.
● Generate a pairing information printout from RealPresence Resource Manager for users to obtain the
pairing information. For more information, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Resource Manager
System Operations Guide and the Polycom Concierge Solution Deployment Guide at
support.polycom.com.
● Add the pairing code to the RealPresence Group Series system local user interface.
Polycom, Inc.
188
Control and Navigation
Add the System Pairing Code to the System Home Screen
To display a pairing code on the RealPresence Group system local interface home screen, you must enable
a setting in the system web interface.
To add the system pairing code to the system’s home screen:
1 In the RealPresence Group system web interface, navigate to Admin Settings > General Settings
> Home Screen Settings.
2 Click Address Bar.
3 Select Pairing Code for either the left or right Address Bar element and click Save.
The pairing code for the RealPresence Group system displays on the bottom of the system’s home
screen in the meeting room.
If users encounter problems pairing with the system or you receive a registration error, confirm that the
Polycom Concierge service is active.
Check the Polycom Concierge Service Status
You can view the Polycom Concierge service status to determine if it is active.
To check the status of the Polycom Concierge service:
1 In the RealPresence Group system web interface, go to Diagnostics > System > System Status.
2 Confirm that the Polycom Concierge service is active (the status LED is green).
For additional details about the solution, see the Polycom Concierge Solution Deployment Guide at
support.polycom.com. For product interoperability information, refer to the Polycom Concierge Solution
Release Notes at support.polycom.com.
SmartPairing
Polycom SmartPairing™ allows you to detect and pair a room system from the RealPresence Mobile
application on an Android or Apple iPad tablet. After you pair the application and the room system, you can
use the RealPresence Mobile application to perform two basic functions:
● Use the application as a remote control for the room system.
● Swipe to transfer a call from the RealPresence Mobile application to the room system.
SmartPairing Prerequisites
Telnet must be enabled before you can use SmartPairing. Because telnet is disabled by default in all
Security Profiles, SmartPairing is also disabled by default. The setting to enable telnet is not configurable
when the Security Profile is set to Maximum or High.
Polycom, Inc.
189
Control and Navigation
Security Profiles and SmartPairing
Security Profile
Telnet Setting Default
SmartPairing Available?
Maximum / High
Disabled, Not Configurable
No
Medium / Low
Disabled, Configurable
Yes. To use SmartPairing, do the following:
1 Enable telnet. In the system web
interface, go to Admin Settings >
Security > Global Security > Access
2
and at Enable Telnet Access, select the
checkbox.
Send an API command or use the web
interface.
Configure SmartPairing
You can configure SmartPairing so that users can pair mobile devices to the room system.
To configure SmartPairing:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Pairing > SmartPairing.
2 Configure these settings.
Setting
Description
SmartPairing Mode
Specifies the method used to pair with the room system, if SmartPairing is enabled:
• Disabled
• Automatic
• Manual
Signal Volume
Specifies the relative signal strength of the ultrasonic signal within the loudspeaker audio
output signal. The selections are Auto, and levels are 1 to10.
View Remote Sessions on the System
You can view a list of remote sessions that are connected to the system.
To view remote sessions:
» In the web interface, go to Diagnostics > System > Sessions.
Configure Contact Information
You can configure contact information for your room system so that users know whom to call when they
need assistance.
Polycom, Inc.
190
Control and Navigation
To configure system contact information:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > My Information > Contact
Information.
2 Configure the following settings.
Setting
Description
Contact Person
Specifies the name of the system administrator.
Contact Number
Specifies the phone number for the system administrator.
Contact Email
Specifies the email address for the system administrator.
Contact Fax
Specifies the fax number for the system administrator.
Tech Support
Specifies the name of the person who provides technical support.
City
Specifies the city where the system administrator is located.
State/Province
Specifies the state or province where the system administrator is located.
Country
Specifies the country where the system administrator is located.
Configure System Location Settings
On the web interface, you can configure settings to specify the country and the country code where the
system is located.
To configure location settings:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > My Information > Location.
2 Configure these settings.
Setting
Description
Country
Specifies the country where the system is located.
Changing the country automatically adjusts the country code associated with your system.
Country Code
Displays the country code associated with the country where the system is located.
Configure Room System Language Settings
You can select from 16 different languages to display in the local and web interfaces.
To configure the room system language settings:
» Do one of the following:
 In the local interface, go to
> Settings > Administration > Location > Language and select
the language to use in the interface.
Polycom, Inc.
191
Control and Navigation
 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Language and select the
language to use in the interface.
Configure System Date and Time Settings
On either the local or web interface, you can configure the system date and time settings.
To configure the system date and time settings:
1 Go to one of the following locations to configure these settings:
 In the local interface, go to
> Settings > Administration > Location > Date and Time.
 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Date and Time > System
Time.
2 Configure these settings.
Setting
Description
Date Format
Specifies how the date is displayed in the interface.
Note: This a web-only setting.
Time Format
Specifies how the time is displayed in the interface.
Auto Adjust for
Daylight Saving
Time
Specifies the daylight saving time setting. When you enable this setting, the system clock
automatically changes for daylight saving time.
Note: This a web-only setting.
Time Zone
Specifies the time difference between GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) and your location.
Time Server
Specifies whether the connection to a time server is automatic or manual for system time
settings. You can also select Off to enter the date and time yourself.
Primary Time
Server Address
Specifies the address of the primary time server to use when Time Server is set to Manual.
Secondary Time
Server Address
Specifies the address of the time server to use when the Primary Time Server Address
does not respond. This is an elective field.
Current Date and
Current Time
•
•
If the Time Server is set to Manual or Auto, these settings are not displayed.
If the Time Server is set to Off, these settings are configurable.
3 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Date and Time > Time in Call.
4 Configure these settings.
Setting
Description
Show Time in Call
Specifies the time display in a call:
• Elapsed Time—Displays the amount of time in the call.
• System Time—Displays the system time on the screen during a call.
• Off—Time is not displayed.
Polycom, Inc.
192
Control and Navigation
When to Show
Specifies when the time should be shown:
• Start of the call only—Displays only when the call begins.
• Entire call—Displays continuously throughout the call.
• Once per hour—Displays at the beginning of the hour for one minute.
• Twice per hour—Displays at the beginning of the hour and midway through the hour
for one minute.
Show Countdown
Before Next Meeting
This setting is displayed only when the calendaring service has been enabled.
When enabled, it displays a timer that counts down to the next scheduled meeting 10
minutes before that meeting. If a timer is already showing, the countdown timer replaces it
10 minutes before the next scheduled meeting.
Configure Sleep Settings
You can configure when you want a system to go to sleep after a period of inactivity.
To configure when the system goes to sleep:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Sleep.
2 At Display, select whether you want to display black video or a no signal message.
3 At Time Before System Goes to Sleep, select the number of minutes the system can be idle
before it goes to sleep.
4 At Enable Mic Mute in Sleep Mode, select this checkbox to mute the system microphone during
sleep mode.
Polycom, Inc.
193
Diagnostics, Status, and Utilities
RealPresence Group systems provide various tools and screens that allow you to review information about
calls made by the system, review network usage and performance, perform audio and video tests, and send
system messages. See the following topics for details:
● Polycom RealPresence Manageability Instrumentation Solution
● Diagnostics Screens
● System Log Files
● Retrieving Log Files
● Call Detail Report (CDR)
Polycom RealPresence Manageability Instrumentation
Solution
The Polycom® RealPresence® Manageability Instrumentation solution simplifies management of Polycom
RealPresence video collaboration services.
Prior to the introduction of RealPresence Manageability Instrumentation, Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP) Management Information Base (MIB) and Syslog formats varied across Polycom endpoint
and infrastructure products. RealPresence Manageability Instrumentation now enables you to collect, store,
and export data in a consistent format across all Polycom endpoints, and hardware and software
infrastructure systems. Polycom video and collaboration environments and infrastructure that include the
Manageability Instrumentation solution capabilities are easier to monitor, operate, and secure.
Specifically, RealPresence Manageability Instrumentation equips your Polycom devices with two embedded
capabilities that enhance your ability to monitor them:
● The Polycom Unified Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Management Information Base
(MIB) provides a consistent and unified data model and common format for all MIBs across Polycom
products. The new MIB enables you to translate data you collect with SNMP into a standardized
format so you can remotely monitor devices on a network. For more information setting up SNMP on
the system, see SNMP Condition Reports.
● The Polycom Unified System logging Syslog transport format provides a system log message format
compliant with RFC 5424 that enables you to log device events locally and remotely in a standardized
way. Monitoring system logs is especially useful for troubleshooting and security purposes. For more
information on setting up system logging, see Configure System Log Level and Remote Logging.
For detailed information on using the Manageability Instrumentation solution with your Polycom products,
see the Polycom RealPresence Manageability Instrumentation Solution Guide.
Polycom, Inc.
194
Diagnostics, Status, and Utilities
Diagnostics Screens
Use the system diagnostics screens to view call statistics, system status, and system log settings, as well
as download system logs and restart or reset the system.
Access Diagnostic Screens in the Local Interface
Most diagnostic information is available in both the web and the local interface, but some information is
specific to one or the other interface. Read this section to learn how to find diagnostic information in the local
interface.
To access the Diagnostics screens on the local interface:
» Go to Settings > System Information.
The local interface screens include the following diagnostic information for your system.
Information
Diagnostic Screen
Description
System Detail
Displays the following system information:
• System Name
• Model
• Hardware Version
• System Software
• Serial Number
• MAC Address
• IP Address
Network
Displays the following network information:
• IP Address
• Host Name
• H.323 Name
• H.323 Extension (E.164)
• SIP Address
• Link-Local
• Site-Local
• Global Address
Usage
Displays the following usage information:
• Time in Last Call
• Total Time in Calls
• Total Number of Calls
• System Up Time
Polycom, Inc.
195
Diagnostics, Status, and Utilities
Status
Diagnostic Screen
Description
Active Alerts
Displays the status of any device or service listed within the Status screens that has a
current status indicator of red. Alerts are listed in the order they occurred.
Call Control
Displays the status of the Auto-Answer Point-to-Point Video and Meeting Password
settings.
Audio
Displays the connection status of audio devices such as the microphones, SoundStation IP,
and SoundStructure.
EagleEye Director
Displays the connection status of the EagleEyeTM Director, if one is connected. If the
camera system is not connected or is not selected as the current camera source, this
choice is not visible on the screen.
LAN
Displays the connection status of the IP Network.
Servers
•
•
•
Log Management
Displays the status of the Log Threshold setting.
When a system device or service encounters a problem, you see an alert next to the
System button on the menu.
Always displays the Gatekeeper and SIP Registrar Server.
Displays the active Global Directory Server, LDAP Server, or Microsoft Server.
If enabled, displays the Provisioning Service, Calendaring Service, or Presence Service.
Diagnostics
Diagnostic Screen
Description
Near End Loop
Tests the internal audio encoders and decoders, the external microphones and speakers,
the internal video encoders and decoders, and the external cameras and monitors.
Monitor 1 displays the video and plays the audio that would be sent to the far site in a call.
This test is not available when you are in a call.
PING
Tests whether the system can establish contact with a far-site IP address that you specify.
PING returns abbreviated Internet Control Message Protocol results. It returns H.323
information only if the far site is configured for H.323. It returns SIP information only if the
far site is configured for SIP.
If the test is successful, the room system displays a message.
Trace Route
Tests the routing path between the local system and the IP address entered.
If the test is successful, the room system lists the hops between the system and the IP
address you entered.
Color Bars
Tests the color settings of your monitor for optimum picture quality.
If the color bars generated during the test are not clear, or the colors do not look correct,
the monitor needs to be adjusted.
Polycom, Inc.
196
Diagnostics, Status, and Utilities
Diagnostic Screen
Description
Speaker Test
Tests the audio cable connections. A 473 Hz audio tone indicates that the local audio
connections are correct.
If you run the test from the system during a call, the far site will also hear the tone.
If you run the test from the room system web interface during a call, the people at the site
you are testing will hear the tone, but you will not.
Audio Meters
Measures the strength of audio signals from the microphone or microphones, far-site
audio, and any device connected to the audio line in.
Meters function only when the associated input is enabled.
Note: Some audio meters are unavailable when a SoundStructure digital mixer is
connected to the room system.
For details on configuring this setting, refer to Audio Meters.
Camera Tracking
Provides diagnostics specific to the EagleEye Director.
Audio
Verifies microphone functionality. To use this feature, speak aloud and verify that you can
see dynamic signal indications for two vertical microphones and five horizontal
microphones. If no signal indication appears for a specific microphone, manually power off
the EagleEye Director and then power it back on.
Also verifies the reference audio signal: Set up a video call. Let the far side speak aloud
and verify that you can see dynamic signal indications for the two reference audio meters.
If no signal indication appears for a specific microphone, make sure the reference cable is
connected firmly.
After you verify microphone functionality, calibrate the camera again.
Video
• Left Camera shows video from the left camera.
• Right Camera shows video from the right camera.
• Color Bars displays the color bar test screen.
Note: If the EagleEye Director is connected but is not selected as the current camera
source, this choice is not visible on the screen.
Sessions
Displays the following information about each session connected to the system:
• Type
• User ID
• Remote Address
Reset System
Returns the room system to its default settings. When you select this setting using the
remote control, you can do the following:
• Keep your system settings (such as system name and network configuration) or restore
system settings.
• Keep or delete the directory stored on the system. System reset does not affect the
global directory.
• Keep or delete all PKI certificates and certificate revocation lists (CRLs).
You might want to download the CDR and CDR archive before you reset the system. Refer
to Call Detail Report (CDR).
Note: If a room password is configured for the admin account, you must enter it to reset the
system.
Polycom, Inc.
197
Diagnostics, Status, and Utilities
Access Diagnostics Screens in the Web Interface
Call statistics are displayed in one format when you are in point-to-point calls and another when you are in
multipoint calls. Most diagnostic information is available in both the web and the local interface, but some
of this information is specific to one or the other interface. Read this section to learn how to find diagnostic
information in the web interface.
Note: If an EagleEye Director camera system is connected to your RealPresence Group system but is
not selected as the current camera source, the Diagnostics selection is not available in the left
navigation panel. To view the Diagnostics selection, ensure that the EagleEye Director is selected as
the current camera source.
To access the Diagnostics screens in a system web interface:
1 In the web interface, click Diagnostics.
2 Configure the following settings. Note that some settings are read only and cannot be configured.
System Diagnostics
Diagnostic Screen
Description
Call Statistics
Displays information about the call in progress. What you see depends on whether you are
in a point-to-point or multipoint call.
• Point-point calls: Streams associated with the participant are displayed beneath the
participant information. To view more information about a specific stream, navigate to
the desired stream and select More Info. From an individual stream view you can select
Next Stream to view the next stream in the stream list.
• Multipoint calls: A list of participants in the call is displayed. Do one of the following:
 To view a participant’s details, select Participants, navigate to the desired
participant, and select More Info.
 The participants’ active streams are displayed beneath the participant information.
To view more information about a specific stream, navigate to the desired stream
and select More Info. From an individual stream view you can select Next Stream
to view the next stream in the stream list.
 To quickly access a list of all active audio, video and content streams within the call,
navigate to Active Streams (this setting is available in SVC calls only). Select the
desired stream, and select More Info.
If the system is not in a call, the screen displays The System is not currently in a call.
System Status
Displays the following system status information:
• Auto-Answer Point-to-Point Video, Remote Control, and Meeting Password
• Microphones, SoundStation IP, SoundStructure
• IP Network
• Servers:
 Always shows: Gatekeeper, SIP Registrar Server
 Shows the active Global Directory Server, LDAP Server, or Microsoft Server
 If enabled, shows Provisioning Service, Calendaring Service, Presence Service
If the room system detects an EagleEye Director, a status line for the device is displayed.
Download Logs
Enables you to save system log information.
Polycom, Inc.
198
Diagnostics, Status, and Utilities
Diagnostic Screen
Description
System Log Settings
•
•
•
•
Restart System
Instructs the system to restart (system reboot).
Sessions
View information about everyone logged in to the room system.
Specifies the Log Level to use.
Enables Remote Logging, H.323 Trace, and SIP Trace.
Specifies the Remote Log Server Address.
Allows you to Send Diagnostics and Usage Data to Polycom, and get information about
the Polycom Improvement Program.
The following table describes the information you see when you click More Info on the Call Statistics screen.
Call Statistics “More Info”
Participant information
• System name
• System number
• System information
• Call speed (send and receive)
• Call type
• Encryption
Participant streams
• Stream ID; possible stream IDs include Audio TX, Audio RX, Video TX, Video RX, Content TX, and Content RX
• Stream quality indicator; possible colors are green, yellow, and red.
• Protocol in use
• Format in use
• Data rate in use
• Frame rate in use
• Number of packets lost and percentage packet loss in IP calls
• Jitter in IP calls
• Encryption type, key exchange algorithm type, and key exchange check code (if the encryption option is enabled
and the call is encrypted)
• Error concealment type, such as lost packet recovery (LPR), retransmission, or dynamic bandwidth allocation
(DBA)
Audio and Video Tests
You can perform the following audio and video diagnostic tests.
Polycom, Inc.
199
Diagnostics, Status, and Utilities
Diagnostic Screen
Description
Speaker Test
Tests the audio cable connections. A 473 Hz audio tone indicates that the local audio
connections are correct.
If you run the test from the system during a call, the far site will also hear the tone.
If you run the test from the room system web interface during a call, the people at the site
you are testing will hear the tone, but you will not.
Audio Meters
Measures the strength of audio signals from microphones, far-site audio, and any device
connected to the audio line in.
Meters function only when the associated input is enabled.
Note: Some audio meters are unavailable when a SoundStructure digital mixer is
connected to the room system.
For details on configuring this setting, refer to Audio Meters.
Camera Tracking
Provides diagnostics specific to the EagleEye Director.
Audio
Verifies microphone functionality. To use this feature, speak aloud and verify that you can
see dynamic signal indications for two vertical microphones and five horizontal
microphones. If no signal indication appears for a specific microphone, manually power off
the EagleEye Director and then power it back on.
Also verifies the reference audio signal: Set up a video call. Let the far side speak aloud
and verify that you can see dynamic signal indications for the two reference audio meters.
If no signal indication appears for a specific microphone, make sure the reference cable is
connected firmly.
After you verify microphone functionality, calibrate the camera again.
Video
• Left Camera shows video from the left camera.
• Right Camera shows video from the right camera.
• Color Bars displays the color bar test screen.
Note: If the EagleEye Director is connected but is not selected as the current camera
source, this choice is not visible on the screen.
System Log Files
System log files are essential when troubleshooting system issues. System log files contain information
about system activities and the system configuration profile.
To set up system logging, you need to perform the following tasks:
● Configure System Log Management
● Configure System Log Level and Remote Logging
After setting up system logging, you can retrieve a system log file. For details on how to get log files, refer
to Retrieving Log Files.
Configure System Log Management
When the system log fills up past the threshold, the following actions are triggered:
● Transfers the log to the USB device if Transfer Frequency is set to “Auto at Threshold”
Polycom, Inc.
200
Diagnostics, Status, and Utilities
● Creates a log entry indicating that the threshold has been reached
● Displays an alert on the home screen
● Displays an indicator on the System Status screen
To view the log file status, do one of the following:
● In the local interface, go to Settings > System Information > Status > Log Management.
● In the web interface, go to Diagnostics > System > System Status and select the More Info link
for Log Threshold.
Note: When the Log Threshold system status indicator is red, automatic log transfers cannot be
completed and data may be lost. You must manually transfer the logs to a USB storage device.
To configure system log management:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Log Management.
2 Configure these settings and click Save.
Setting
Description
Current Percent Filled
Displays how full the log file is, as a percentage of the total size.
Percent Filled Threshold
Specifies a threshold for the percent filled value. Reaching the threshold triggers an
alarm, creates a log entry, and transfers the log if Transfer Frequency is set to Auto
at Threshold. Off disables logging threshold notifications.
Folder Name
Specifies the name to give the folder for log transfers. Select one of the following:
• System Name and Timestamp—Folder name is the system name and the
timestamp of the log transfer, in the date and time format specified on the Location
screen. For example, if the system name is “Marketing”, the folder name could be
marketing_MMddyyyymmssSSS.
• Timestamp—Folder name is the timestamp of the log transfer, in the date and time
format specified on the Location screen, for example yyyyMMddhhmmssSSS.
• Custom—Elective folder name for manual log transfers.
Storage Type
Specifies the type of storage device used for log file transfers.
Transfer Frequency
Specifies when the logs are transferred:
Manual—The transfer starts when you click the Start Log Transfer button, which is
visible only on the local interface. If the log fills before being transferred, new events
overwrite the oldest events.
Auto at Threshold—The transfer starts automatically when the Percent Filled
Threshold is reached.
Configure System Log Level and Remote Logging
The system log captures devices and server events in a consistent manner. You determine the log level,
whether to enable remote logging, and whether to log additional SIP or H.323 details.
Polycom, Inc.
201
Diagnostics, Status, and Utilities
To configure system log settings:
1 In the web interface, go to Diagnostics > System > System Log Settings.
2 Configure these settings.
Setting
Description
Log Level
Sets the minimum log level of messages stored in the room system’s flash memory.
DEBUG logs all messages, and WARNING logs the fewest number of messages.
Polycom recommends leaving this setting at the default value of DEBUG.
When Enable Remote Logging is on, the log level is the same for both remote and local
logging.
Enable Remote
Logging
Specifies whether remote logging is enabled. Enabling this setting causes the room
system to send each log message to the specified server in addition to logging it locally.
The system immediately begins forwarding its log messages after you click Save.
Remote logging encryption is supported when TLS transport is the transport protocol. If
you are using UDP or TCP transport, Polycom recommends remote logging only on
secure, local networks.
Remote Log Server
Address
Specifies the server address and port. If the port is not specified, a default destination
port is used. The default port is determined by the configured Remote Log Server
Transport Protocol setting as follows:
• UDP: 514
• TCP: 601
• TLS: 6514
The address and port can be specified in the following formats:
• IPv4 Address (Example: 10.11.12.13:<port>, where <port> is the elective destination
port number in the range 1.65535)
• IPv6 Address (Example: [2001::abcd:1234]:<port>, where <port> is the elective
destination port number in the range 1.65535)
• FQDN (Example: logserverhost.company.com:<port>, where <port> is the elective
destination port number in the range 1.65535)
Remote Log Server
Transport Protocol
Specifies the type of transport protocol:
• UDP
• TCP
• TLS (secure connection)
Enable H.323 Trace
Logs additional H.323 connectivity information.
Enable SIP Trace
Logs additional SIP connectivity information.
Send Diagnostics
and Usage Data to
Polycom
Sends crash log server information to Polycom to help us analyze and improve the
product. Click the Polycom Improvement Program button to view information about
how your data is used.
Retrieving Log Files
You might find log files useful when troubleshooting. You can generate log files for the RealPresence Group
system, RealPresence Touch, Polycom Touch Control, and EagleEye Director. These sections explain how
to retrieve those log files:
Polycom, Inc.
202
Diagnostics, Status, and Utilities
● Download System Log Files
● Transfer System Log Files
● Transfer EagleEye Director Logs
Download System Log Files
You can use the RealPresence Group system web interface to get system logs.
Note: The date and time of system log entries for RealPresence Group systems are shown in GMT.
To download a system log in the web interface:
1 Go to Diagnostics > System > Download Logs.
2 Click Download system log and then specify a location on your computer to save the file.
In the dialog boxes that appear, designate where you want the file to be saved.
Transfer System Log Files
You can transfer a RealPresence Group system log in the local interface.
To transfer a system log in the local interface:
1 Go to
> Settings > Administration > Security > Log Management.
2 Click Transfer System Log to USB Device.
3 The system saves a file in the USB storage device named according to the settings in the web
interface.
4 Wait until the system displays a message that the log transfer has completed successfully before
you remove the storage device.
Transfer EagleEye Director Logs
The Polycom EagleEye Director logs contain important status and debug information that is not included in
the logs available for the RealPresence Group system.
To download the log information to a USB device:
1 Attach a USB storage device formatted in FAT32 to the back panel of the EagleEye Director.
2 Restart the EagleEye Director by following these steps:
a Unplug the 12v adaptor attached to the side of the EagleEye Director.
b Wait a 5 seconds.
c Plug the 12v adaptor into the side of the EagleEye Director.
It could take up to two minutes for the EagleEye Director to restart.
Polycom, Inc.
203
Diagnostics, Status, and Utilities
3 Remove the USB storage device.
A log file using the name format of eagleeyedirector_info_xxxxx.tar.gz is generated on the USB
storage device.
Call Detail Report (CDR)
When enabled by going to Admin Settings > General Settings > System Settings > Recent Calls in the
RealPresence Group system web interface, the Call Detail Report (CDR) provides the room system’s call
history. Within 5 minutes after ending a call, the CDR is written to memory and then you can download the
data in CSV format for sorting and formatting.
Every call is added to the CDR, whether it is made or received. If a call does not connect, the report shows
the reason. In multipoint calls, each far site is shown as a separate call, but all have the same conference
number.
The size of a CDR can become unmanageable if you don’t download the record periodically. If you consider
that 150 calls result in a CDR of approximately 50 KB, you can set up a schedule to download and save the
CDR after about every 120 calls just to keep the file easy to download and view. Remember that your
connection speed also affects how fast the CDR downloads.
Note: The CDR database is limited to the 150 most recent entries. If you are concerned
about tracking all CDR records, ensure that you download the records at regular intervals
so that the limit is not exceeded and records are not lost.
The following table describes the data fields in the CDR.
Data
Description
Row ID
Each call is logged on the first available row. A call is a connection to a single site, so there
might be more than one call in a conference.
Start Date
The call start date, in the format dd-mm-yyyy.
Start Time
The call start time, in the 24-hour format hh:mm:ss.
End Date
The call end date.
End Time
The call end time.
Call Duration
The length of the call.
Account Number
If Require Account Number to Dial is enabled on the system, the value entered by the user
is displayed in this field.
Remote System
Name
The far site’s system name.
Call Number 1
The number dialed from the first call field, not necessarily the transport address.
For incoming calls — The caller ID information from the first number received from a far site.
Call Number 2
(If applicable for
call)
For outgoing calls — The number dialed from the second call field, not necessarily the
transport address.
For incoming calls — The caller ID information from the second number received from a far
site.
Polycom, Inc.
204
Diagnostics, Status, and Utilities
Data
Description
Transport Type
The type of call — Either H.323 (IP) or SIP.
Call Rate
The bandwidth negotiated with the far site.
System
Manufacturer
The name of the system manufacturer, model, and software version, if they can be
determined.
Call Direction
In—For calls received.
Out—For calls placed from the system.
Conference ID
A number given to each conference. A conference can include more than one far site, so
there might be more than one row with the same conference ID.
Call ID
Identifies individual calls within the same conference.
Total H.320
Channels Used
Number of narrow-band channels used in the call.
Endpoint Alias
The alias of the far site.
Reserved
Polycom use only.
View Name
Names the web or local interface used in the call.
User ID
Lists the ID of the user who made the call.
Endpoint Transport
Address
The actual address of the far site (not necessarily the address dialed).
Audio Protocol (Tx)
The audio protocol transmitted to the far site, such as G.728 or G.722.1.
Audio Protocol (Rx)
The audio protocol received from the far site, such as G.728 or G.722.
Video Protocol (Tx)
The video protocol transmitted to the far site, such as H.263 or H.264.
Video Protocol (Rx)
The video protocol received from the far site, such as H.261 or H.263.
Video Format (Tx)
The video format transmitted to the far site, such as CIF or SIF.
Video Format (Rx)
The video format received from the far site, such as CIF or SIF.
Disconnect Local ID
and Disconnect
Reason
The identity of the user who initiated the call and the reason the call was disconnected.
Q.850 Cause Code
The Q.850 cause code showing how the call ended.
Total H.320 Errors
The number of H.320 errors experienced during the call.
Average Percent of
Packet Loss (Tx)
The combined average of the percentage of both audio and video packets transmitted that
were lost during the 5 seconds preceding the moment at which a sample was taken. This
value does not report a cumulative average for the entire call. However, it does report an
average of the sampled values.
Average Percent of
Packet Loss (Rx)
The combined average of the percentage of both audio and video packets received that
were lost during the 5 seconds preceding the moment at which a sample was taken. This
value does not report a cumulative average for the entire call. However, it does report an
average of the sampled values.
Polycom, Inc.
205
Diagnostics, Status, and Utilities
Data
Description
Average Packets
Lost (Tx)
The number of packets transmitted that were lost during a call.
Average Packets
Lost (Rx)
The number of packets from the far site that were lost during a call.
Average Latency
(Tx)
The average latency of packets transmitted during a call based on round-trip delay,
calculated from sample tests done once per minute.
Average Latency
(Rx)
The average latency of packets received during a call based on round-trip delay, calculated
from sample tests done once per minute.
Maximum Latency
(Tx)
The maximum latency for packets transmitted during a call based on round-trip delay,
calculated from sample tests done once per minute.
Maximum Latency
(Rx)
The maximum latency for packets received during a call based on round-trip delay,
calculated from sample tests done once per minute.
Average Jitter (Tx)
The average jitter of packets transmitted during a call, calculated from sample tests done
once per minute.
Average Jitter (Rx)
The average jitter of packets received during a call, calculated from sample tests done once
per minute.
Maximum Jitter (Tx)
The maximum jitter of packets transmitted during a call, calculated from sample tests done
once per minute.
Maximum Jitter (Rx)
The maximum jitter of packets received during a call, calculated from sample tests done
once per minute.
Call Priority
The AS-SIP call precedence level assigned to the call (populated only when AS-SIP is
enabled on the system).
Download a Call Detail Report (CDR)
You can download a CDR using the system web interface.
To download a CDR:
1 In the web interface, click Utilities > Services > Call Detail Report (CDR).
2 Click Most Recent Call Report and then specify whether to open or save the file on your computer.
Polycom, Inc.
206
Polycom Touch Device Software Updates
The following topics provide information on updating Polycom touch device software:
● Required Prerequisites for RealPresence Touch Software Updates
● Required Prerequisites for Polycom Touch Control Software Updates
● Dynamic Polycom Touch Device Software Updates
● Configure Your Web Server as the Update Site
● Configure Your Web Server as the Update Site
● Update Software from the RealPresence Touch Web Interface
● Update Software from the RealPresence Touch Local Interface
● Updating RealPresence Touch Software from a USB Storage Device
● Update Polycom Touch Control Software from a USB Storage Device
● Troubleshooting for Software Upgrade Issues
Required Prerequisites for RealPresence Touch
Software Updates
The RealPresence Touch must run a software version that is compatible with the software version on the
RealPresence Group system.
The RealPresence Touch, after pairing with the RealPresence Group system, verifies the compatibility of
the RealPresence Touch panel and operating system software and requests a software update.
For additional details on software compatibility, refer to the appropriate version of the release notes available
at support.polycom.com.
If you need to update your RealPresence Group system at the same time you update the Polycom touch
device, update the system software first.
Update files for the RealPresence Touch are located on the Polycom support server. You can store the
update files on a USB device, RealPresence Resource Manager system, or on your own web server.
No license number or key is needed to update the Polycom RealPresence Touch. You can configure the
Polycom touch device to get software updates using any of the following methods:
● A Polycom RealPresence Resource Manager system
● A server on your network
● The online software server hosted by Polycom
● A USB 2.0 storage device in FAT32 format that you connect to the side of the device
Polycom, Inc.
207
Polycom Touch Device Software Updates
Required Prerequisites for Polycom Touch Control
Software Updates
The Polycom Touch Control must run a software version that is compatible with the software version on the
RealPresence Group system.
It is recommended that you install the latest compatible Polycom Touch Control software for any given
RealPresence Group system software version. When checking for software updates, the Polycom Touch
Control first checks for the presence of a USB storage device. The system then lists the available Polycom
Touch Control updates.
For additional details on software compatibility, refer to the appropriate version of the release notes available
at support.polycom.com.
If you need to update a RealPresence Group system at the same time you update the Polycom Touch
Control, update the system software first.
Update files for the Polycom Touch Control are located on the Polycom support server. You can store the
update files on a USB device, RealPresence Resource Manager system, or on your own web server.
No license number or key is needed to update the Polycom Touch Control. You can configure the device to
get software updates using any of the following methods:
● A Polycom RealPresence Resource Manager system
● A server on your network
● The online software server hosted by Polycom
● A USB 2.0 storage device in FAT32 format that you connect to the side of the device
Dynamic Polycom Touch Device Software Updates
You can post software for a Polycom touch device on a RealPresence Resource Manager system. Then,
configure the device to get updates from the applicable system by entering the Production URL or Trial URL
on the device Software Update screen.
When using a RealPresence Resource Manager system to automatically update the software for a system
with an associated Polycom touch device, use the same management server for the touch device updates.
This helps you control the version of software installed on the touch device.
Note: When a Polycom touch device is connected to a provisioned RealPresence Group system, a
RealPresence Resource Manager system can receive status updates from and provide software
updates to the touch device. For supported RealPresence Resource Manager versions, go to
http://support.polycom.com/PolycomService/support/us/support/service_policies.html and click
Current Interoperability Matrix.
For information about configuring production and trial versions of software update packages, refer to the
Polycom RealPresence Resource Manager System Operations Guide available at support.polycom.com.
Configure Your Web Server as the Update Site
You can post software to your web server and then configure the RealPresence Touch device to receive
updates.
Polycom, Inc.
208
Polycom Touch Device Software Updates
To set up your web server as the update site:
1 Make sure that your server enables clients to download files with the following extensions or with no
extension:
 .tar.gz
 .txt
 .sig
 .plcm
2 Define a URL on your server that the RealPresence Touch can use for software updates, and create
a corresponding root directory to it.
3 Go to support.polycom.com, and navigate to the page for the RealPresence Group system that you
use with the RealPresence Touch.
4 Save and extract the RealPresence Touch operating system software package (.tar file) from the
Polycom website to the root directory of the web server.
Configure Your Web Server as the Update Site
You can post software to your web server and then configure the Polycom Touch Control to receive updates.
To set up your web server as the update site:
1 Make sure that your server enables clients to download files with the following extensions or with no
extension:
 .tar.gz
 .txt
 .sig
 .plcm
2 Define a URL on your server that the Polycom Touch Control can use for software updates, and
create a corresponding root directory to it.
3 Go to support.polycom.com, and navigate to the page for the RealPresence Group system that you
use with the Polycom Touch Control.
4 Save and extract the Polycom Touch Control Panel software package (.zip file) and the Polycom
Touch Control Operating System software package (.zip file) from the Polycom website to the root
directory of the web server.
5 Open a command line interface and enter the command appropriate for your operating system to
generate an info.txt file that lists the folders with updates:
 Unix or Linux: <root dir>/dists/venus/geninfo.sh
 Windows: <root dir>\dists\venus\geninfo.bat
Managing Polycom Touch Device Software on Your Server
When checking for software updates on your server, Polycom touch devices check only for what is referred
to as the “current” release of the system software. By default, the current release is the software distribution
package that was most recently extracted on your server.
Polycom, Inc.
209
Polycom Touch Device Software Updates
Over time, you might extract other versions of the software on your server, resetting the current release with
every extraction. In addition, you could accumulate multiple versions of the same software.
Each software distribution package contains two commands that you can use to maintain all of the software
extracted on your server.
● The setcurrel command sets a specific version of software as the current release.
● The removerel command removes a specific version of a software release from your server.
Set a RealPresence Touch Software Version as Current
Use the setcurrel command to set a specific version of RealPresence Touch software as the current
release on your server.
To set a version of the software as the current version:
1 Run the setcurrel command with X.X.X-XXX as the software version you want to set as the current
release:
 Unix or Linux: <root dir>/vega/platform/setcurrel.sh X.X.X-XXX
 Windows: <root dir>\vega/platform/setcurrel.bat X.X.X-XXX
2 Follow the onscreen instructions for setting the current release.
Remove a RealPresence Touch Software Version
Use the removerel command to remove a specific version of a RealPresence Touch software release
from your server.
To remove a software version:
1 Run the removerel command with X.X.X-XXX as the software version you want to set remove from
the server:
 Unix or Linux: <root dir>/vega/platform/removerel.sh X.X.X-XXX
 Windows: <root dir>\vega/platform/removerel.bat X.X.X-XXX
2 Follow the onscreen instructions for setting the current release.
Set a Polycom Touch Control Software Version as Current
Use the setcurrel command to set a specific version of Polycom Touch Control software as the current
release on your server.
To set a version of the software as the current version:
1 Run the appropriate setcurrel command with X.X.X-XXX as the software version you want to set
as the current release.
Polycom, Inc.
210
Polycom Touch Device Software Updates
Software
Type
Unix or Linux Command
Windows Command
Panel
<root dir>/dists/venus/apps/setcurrel.sh
X.X.X-XXX
<root dir>\dists\venus\apps\setcurrel.bat
X.X.X-XXX
Operating
system
<root dir>/dists/venus/platform/setcurrel.sh
X.X.X-XXX
<root dir>\dists\venus\platform\setcurrel.bat
X.X.X-XXX
2 Follow the onscreen instructions for setting the current release.
Remove a Polycom Touch Control Software Version
Use the removerel command to remove a specific version of a Polycom Touch Control software release
from your server.
To remove a software version:
1 Run the removerel command with X.X.X-XXX as the software version you want to set remove from
the server.
Software Type
Unix or Linux Command
Windows Command
Panel
<root dir>/dists/venus/apps/removerel.sh
X.X.X-XXX
<root dir>\dists\venus\apps\removerel.bat
X.X.X-XXX
Operating
system
<root dir>/dists/venus/platform/removerel.sh
X.X.X-XXX
<root dir>\dists\venus\platform\removerel.bat
X.X.X-XXX
2 Follow the onscreen instructions for removing the software version.
Update Software from the RealPresence Touch Web
Interface
Using the web interface, you can update the RealPresence Touch software from the Polycom server or your
own server.
To update RealPresence Touch software using the web interface:
1 Open a supported browser.
2 Configure the browser to allow cookies.
3 In the browser address line, enter the IP address of the RealPresence Touch using the format
http://IPaddress (for example, http://10.11.12.13).
4 If necessary, enter the Admin ID as the user name (default is admin), and then enter the Admin
remote access password, if one is set. The default password is the RealPresence Touch serial
number.
The first time you open the web interface each day, you might need to enter a user name and
password after you select any of the interface options.
Polycom, Inc.
211
Polycom Touch Device Software Updates
5 On the Home Page, click Software Update.
6 Enter the server address for the update. The default server address, polycom, is the address for
the Polycom public soft-update repository and has the latest released software version available.
7 Click Save to save these changes.
8 Click Check for Software Updates.
9 Click Download and Install Software.
Download progress is displayed during installation.
Update Software from the RealPresence Touch Local
Interface
Using the RealPresence Touch interface, you can update the RealPresence Touch software from the
Polycom server or your own server.
To update software using the RealPresence Touch interface:
1 From the Home screen, touch
Administration and then touch Software Update.
2 Enter the path and address of the update site where you posted the RealPresence Touch software
in the in the Server Address field. To use the Polycom server, enter polycom.
3 Touch Check for Software Updates.
4 Touch Download and Install Software.
Updating RealPresence Touch Software from a USB
Storage Device
If you cannot update your RealPresence Touch device using a server or with RealPresence Resource
Manager, you can load the software onto a USB storage device and use that to update the device. Another
benefit of using a USB device is that you can choose to perform both a factory restore and update your
device software simultaneously.
The following attributes ensure that your USB device supports the software update procedure:
● Use USB 2.0 devices (some USB 3.0 devices might not work with the RealPresence Touch).
● Format the primary partition as FAT32.
Make sure to put all software update data in the root directory of the primary partition.
Update the RealPresence Touch With a USB Storage Device
You can use a USB storage device to update RealPresence Touch software and the RealPresence Touch
factory restore partition.
To update RealPresence Touch software and the factory restore partition:
1 Open a browser and navigate to support.polycom.com.
Polycom, Inc.
212
Polycom Touch Device Software Updates
2 Under Documents and Downloads, select Telepresence and Video.
3 Navigate to the page for the version of the system that you use with the RealPresence Touch.
4 Save the RealPresence Touch operating system software package (.tar) file from the Polycom
website to the root directory of the USB device.
5 Disconnect the Ethernet power cable from the RealPresence Touch.
6 Connect the USB device to the side of the RealPresence Touch.
7 Press and hold the RealPresence Touch factory restore button with a bent paper clip for ten
seconds and simultaneously reconnect the Ethernet power cable to the RealPresence Touch. For
more information about RealPresence Touch factory restore refer to the Polycom RealPresence
Group Series Administrator Guide available at support.polycom.com
8 Follow the on-screen instructions of the setup wizard to complete the update. The setup wizard is
available during initial setup, after a system reset with system settings deleted, or after using the
factory restore button.
Update RealPresence Touch Software from a USB Storage Device
You can update the RealPresence Touch quickly using a USB storage device without updating the
RealPresence Touch factory restore partition.
To update RealPresence Touch software from a USB device:
1 Open a browser and navigate to support.polycom.com.
2 Under Documents and Downloads, select Telepresence and Video.
3 Navigate to the page for the RealPresence Group system that you use with the RealPresence
Touch.
4 Save the RealPresence Touch operating system software package (.tar) file from the Polycom
website to the root directory of the USB device.
5 Ensure the RealPresence Touch Ethernet cord is connected and the RealPresence Touch is
powered on.
6 Connect the USB device to the side of the RealPresence Touch.
7 An automatic prompt asks you if you want to update the platform software. Touch Yes.
Update Polycom Touch Control Software Manually
You can manually update Polycom Touch Control software from the Polycom server or your own server.
Polycom recommends that you set the maintenance window times so that the Polycom Touch Control is
updated about an hour after the last RealPresence Group system update has completed.
To manually install updates from the web interface:
1 Open a supported browser.
2 Configure the browser to allow cookies.
3 In the browser address line, enter the IP address of the Polycom Touch Control using the format
http://IPaddress (for example, http://10.11.12.13).
Polycom, Inc.
213
Polycom Touch Device Software Updates
4 If necessary, enter the Admin ID as the user name (default is admin), and then enter the Admin
remote access password, if one is set. The default password is 456.
The first time you open the web interface each day, you might need to enter a user name and
password after you select any of the interface options.
5 On the Home Page, under Touch Control details, click Software Update.
6 Enter the server address for the update, then click Save. The default server address, polycom, is
the address for the Polycom public soft-update repository and has the latest released software
version available.
7 Click Check for Software Updates to find the latest build on the server.
The Polycom Touch Control Operating system and panel software versions are listed.
8 Click Download and Install Software.
Download progress is displayed during installation.
9 Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the update.
Update Polycom Touch Control Software Automatically in the Web
Interface
You can automatically update the Polycom Touch Control software from the Polycom server or your own
server. The Polycom Touch Control automatically performs a software update when one of the following
conditions are true:
● Auto Update is enabled (with Download and Install Software selected), and the scheduled time
occurs for a software update. (Example: Scheduled time is set for 3 p.m., so the software update
begins at 3 p.m.)
● Auto Update is enabled (with Download and Install Software selected), and the paired Group
Series system finishes its software update (which triggers a Polycom Touch Control software update).
To automatically install updates in the web interface:
1 Open a supported browser. For a list of supported browsers, refer to the Polycom RealPresence
Group Series Release Notes.
2 Configure the browser to allow cookies.
3 In the browser address line, enter the IP address of the RealPresence Group system using the
format http://IPaddress (for example, http://10.11.12.13).
4 If necessary, enter the Admin ID as the user name (default is admin), and then enter the Admin
remote access password, if one is set.
The first time you open the web interface each day, you might need to enter a user name and
password after you select any of the interface options.
5 On the Home Page, under Touch Control details, click Update Software.
6 Enter the server address for the update, then click Save. The default server address, polycom, is
the address for the Polycom public soft-update repository and has the latest released software
version available.
7 To make automatic updates and update your software to the latest build on the server, select
Automatically Check for Software Updates.
8 When the Export Restrictions notice appears, touch Accept Agreement.
Polycom, Inc.
214
Polycom Touch Device Software Updates
9 Specify the automatic update options:
a Touch Hour, Minute, and AM/PM to specify the beginning of the time window within which the
Polycom Touch Control checks for updates.
b Touch Duration to select the length of the time within which the Polycom Touch Control can check
for updates.
After the Start Time and Duration settings are configured, the Polycom Touch Control calculates a
random time within the defined update window at which to check for updates. It then checks for
updates at this time on a daily basis as long as the Start Time and Duration values do not change. If
the Start Time or Duration values change, a new random time within the new time window is
calculated.
c Touch Action for Available Software Updates and select whether to be notified of available
status updates only or to download and install software when updates are available.
10 Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the update.
Update Polycom Touch Control Software Automatically in the Local
Interface
Using the Polycom Touch Control interface, you can automatically update the software from the Polycom
server or your own server.
Polycom recommends that you set the maintenance window times so that the Polycom Touch Control is
updated about an hour after the last RealPresence Group system update has completed.
To automatically install updates:
1 From the Home screen, touch
Administration and then touch Updates.
2 Enter the path and address of the update site where you posted the Polycom Touch Control
software in the Server Address field. To use the Polycom server, enter polycom.
3 Enable Automatically Check for Software Updates.
4 When the Export Restrictions notice appears, touch Accept Agreement.
5 Specify the automatic update options:
a Touch Hour, Minute, and AM/PM to specify the beginning of the time window within which the
Polycom Touch Control checks for updates.
b Touch Duration to select the length of the time within which the Polycom Touch Control can check
for updates.
After the Start Time and Duration settings are configured, the Polycom Touch Control calculates
a random time within the defined update window at which to check for updates. It then checks for
updates at this time on a daily basis as long as the Start Time and Duration values do not
change. If the Start Time or Duration values change, a new random time within the new time
window is calculated.
c Touch Action for Available Software Updates and select whether to be notified of available
status updates only or to download and install software when updates are available.
Manually Update Polycom Touch Control Software in the Local
Interface
You can manually update the Polycom Touch Control Software using the Polycom Touch Control interface.
Polycom, Inc.
215
Polycom Touch Device Software Updates
To manually install updates:
1 From the Home screen, touch
Administration and then touch Updates.
2 Enter the path and address of the update site where you posted the Polycom Touch Control
software in the in the Server Address field. To use the Polycom server, enter polycom.
3 Touch Check for Software Updates.
4 Select only the updates that you want to install.
5 Touch Download and Install Software.
6 When the Export Restrictions notice appears, touch Accept Agreement. Follow the on-screen
instructions to complete the update.
Update Polycom Touch Control Software from a USB
Storage Device
You can use a USB storage device to either update or downgrade Polycom Touch Control software versions.
The following device attributes ensure that your USB device successfully supports the procedure:
● Use USB 2.0 devices (some USB 3.0 devices might not work with the RealPresence Group systems).
● Format the primary partition as FAT32.
● Put all software update data in the root directory of the primary partition.
To update Polycom Touch Control software using a USB device:
1 Open a browser and navigate to support.polycom.com.
2 Under Documents and Downloads, select Telepresence and Video.
3 Navigate to the page for the Polycom RealPresence Group system that you use with the Polycom
Touch Control.
4 Download the latest version of these .zip distribution package files to your hard drive:
 Polycom Touch Control Operating System
 Polycom Touch Control Panel Software
5 Extract all contents of the files you downloaded to the root directory of the USB device.
When extracting multiple distribution packages, a pop up message might appear asking if you want
to overwrite certain files that already exist. Select Yes to All.
6 Connect the USB device to the side of the Polycom Touch Control.
7 From the Home screen, touch
Administration and then touch Updates.
8 Touch Check for Software Updates.
9 Select only the updates that you want to install.
10 Touch Download and Install Software.
11 When the Export Restrictions notice appears, touch Accept Agreement. Follow the on-screen
instructions of the setup wizard to complete the update. The setup wizard is available during initial
setup, after a system reset with system settings deleted, or after using the factory restore button.
Polycom, Inc.
216
Polycom Touch Device Software Updates
Troubleshooting for Software Upgrade Issues
If you are having trouble upgrading your system or device, these troubleshooting tips might help.
Test the Download URL
If your system or Polycom touch device is not updating properly, and you entered polycom as the Server
Address, the system resolves downloads.polycom.com to an IP address. The system then checks for a
software update using http.
To test the default download URL:
1 Open a browser.
2 Try to access the appropriate URL for your system or device.
System or Device
Test URL
Polycom Touch Control
http://downloads.polycom.com/video/venus_group_series/dists/venu
s/info.txt
Polycom
RealPresence Touch
http://downloads.polycom.com/video/rp_touch/vega/info.txt
RealPresence Group
Series
http://downloads.polycom.com/video/group_series/rseries/info.txt
3 If the computer returns platform, or apps and platform, you can reach the Polycom software
server from your location and the URL is working.
Polycom, Inc.
217
Polycom Touch Devices
The following topics provide information on how to enable and set up Polycom touch devices:
● Positioning the RealPresence Touch Device
● Positioning the Polycom Touch Control
● Powering On the Polycom Touch Control
● Polycom Touch Control Indicator Light
● Pairing the RealPresence Touch with a RealPresence Group System
● Power Off the RealPresence Touch
● Wake the RealPresence Touch
● Remote Management of the RealPresence Touch
● Customize the RealPresence Touch Home Screen
● Change the Home Screen Background Image on the RealPresence Touch
● Troubleshooting the RealPresence Touch Device
● Set Up the Polycom Touch Control
● Pairing States for the Polycom Touch Control Device
● Pair the Polycom Touch Control and a RealPresence Group System
● Unpair the Polycom Touch Control and a RealPresence Group System
● Power Off the Polycom Touch Control
● Wake the Polycom Touch Control
● Configuring the Polycom Touch Control Software
● Managing the Polycom Touch Control Remotely
● Troubleshooting on the Polycom Touch Control Device
Positioning the RealPresence Touch Device
RealPresence Group systems can be controlled by the Polycom RealPresence Touch device. Ensure that
the RealPresence Touch is conveniently located for use during a meeting, such as on a conference table.
Place the device in a location where you can easily touch the screen and see the system monitor displays.
The RealPresence Touch device can be positioned horizontally at either a 30 degree or 65 degree viewing
angle.
Positioning the Polycom Touch Control
Before you use your touch device for the first time, ensure that it is placed properly in the meeting room.
Polycom, Inc.
218
Polycom Touch Devices
Polycom RealPresence Group systems can be controlled by the Polycom Touch Control. When the Polycom
Touch Control is not paired with a RealPresence Group system, the device can be used as a virtual remote
control. To use the Polycom Touch Control as a virtual remote control, ensure that the infrared (IR)
transmitter on the front of the device is facing the RealPresence Group system you want to control. Also,
make sure that the Polycom Touch Control is conveniently located for use during a meeting.
Powering On the Polycom Touch Control
For instructions on how to power on the RealPresence Touch, refer to Set Up the RealPresence Touch
Device.
For instructions on how to power on the Polycom Touch Control, refer to Set Up the Polycom Touch Control.
Polycom Touch Control Indicator Light
When the Polycom Touch Control is on, the
Home button is lit.
Enable the RealPresence Touch
Before your users can control the system with the RealPresence Touch device, you must enable the device
on the system’s web interface. Once the device is enabled, you can pair it to the system.
If you want to use the RealPresence Touch device to control a RealPresence Group system, you must
enable the device on the system web interface. Once the touch device is enabled, you can pair it to the
system.
To enable RealPresence Touch:
1 On the web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Pairing > Polycom Touch
Device.
2 Select the Enable Polycom Touch Device check box and click Save.
Your touch device is now enabled and you can pair it to a system. Note that only one device can be
paired to a system at a time.
Enable the Polycom Touch Control
You must enable the Polycom Touch Control device on the web interface before users can use the device
to control a video room system.
To enable the Polycom Touch Control device:
1 On the web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Pairing > Polycom Touch
Device.
2 Select the Enable Polycom Touch Device check box and click Save.
Your touch device is now enabled and you can pair it to a room system. Note that only one device can be
paired to a room system at a time.
For details on setting up the Polycom Touch Control, see Set Up the Polycom Touch Control.
Polycom, Inc.
219
Polycom Touch Devices
Set Up the RealPresence Touch Device
Before you can pair the RealPresence Touch device to a system, you must set up the hardware and use the
set up wizard.
To set up the RealPresence Touch device:
1 Ensure that you have completed the setup wizard on the system.
2 Connect the Ethernet cable to the RealPresence Touch.
3 Plug the Ethernet cable into the wall outlet:
 If your room provides Power Over Ethernet, you can connect the Ethernet cable directly to a LAN
outlet.
 If your room does not provide Power Over Ethernet, you must connect the Ethernet cable to the
power supply adapter. Then connect the power supply adapter to a LAN outlet and power outlet.
The RealPresence Touch powers on and displays the language selection screen.
4 Choose your language and follow the onscreen instructions.
5 After the RealPresence Touch connects to the network, enter the system IP address at Device
Address, then enter the Admin ID and Password.
6 Tap Pair.
If the system is configured to allow pairing and you entered the IP address, admin ID and password
for the system correctly, the RealPresence Touch device pairs with the system. When pairing is
successful, the RealPresence Touch splash screen is displayed, followed by the home screen.
Pairing the RealPresence Touch with a RealPresence
Group System
When you configure the RealPresence Touch to pair with a particular RealPresence Group system, the
RealPresence Touch makes an IP connection to the room system. If the connection is lost for any reason,
the RealPresence Touch automatically attempts to restore the connection.
After you have completed RealPresence Touch setup, you can pair to a different system using
RealPresence Touch settings.
RealPresence Touch Pairing and Connection States
The following table describes the pairing and connection states:
State
Description
Unpaired
The RealPresence Touch is not associated with a room system.
Polycom, Inc.
220
Polycom Touch Devices
State
Description
Paired and Connected
The RealPresence Touch is associated with a system through the pairing process, and
is connected to a room system. This is normal operating mode. A RealPresence Touch
can be connected to only one RealPresence Group system at a time.
Paired and
Disconnected
The RealPresence Touch is associated with a room system, but communication is
disrupted, usually because of a system power off or LAN issue. Communication is
automatically restored when a system and the touch device are successfully connected
to the LAN.
Pair the RealPresence Touch and a System For the First Time
To pair your RealPresence Touch with a system that has not been paired before, you must enter the
system’s credentials before connection can be established.
To manually pair for the first time to a system:
1 After completing the out-of-box (OOB) setup wizard, the RealPresence Touch displays the pairing
screen.
2 Tap the Manually Pair tab.
3 Enter the IP Address, Admin ID, and Password for the room system.
4 Tap Pair.
The pairing connection begins, and the Home screen displays when the pairing is successful.
Pair a Previously Paired System to a RealPresence Touch
If you have paired with a system before, you can select it from a previously paired list of systems. You do
not have to enter the system credentials again, unless the credentials have changed.
To pair a system that was previously paired:
1 On the Home screen, tap
Menu, Settings, then Administration.
2 Sign in using your admin ID and password.
3 Scroll down to Power and Pairing and tap UNPAIR AND RETURN TO PAIRING SCREEN.
4 On the Recently Paired tab, tap the system that you want to pair with.
The pairing connection begins, and the Home screen displays when the pairing is successful.
If you unpair from the system, any current calls on the system are still active. To hang up the calls,
repair to the room system and select More Options, then Participants, More Options, and Remove
or Remove All.
Note: After attempting to pair a device, a “Cannot Pair as a Dedicated Device” message might be
displayed. This means that another device is already paired to the same room system. An
administrator can determine which device is paired and can unpair the device using the room system
web interface. In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Pairing. To unpair
the device, select the Forget this Device link. Now you can pair a different device.
After the room system and the RealPresence Touch are paired, the system web interface and the
RealPresence Touch interface display information about each other and about their connection status.
Polycom, Inc.
221
Polycom Touch Devices
Unpair the RealPresence Touch and a System
You can unpair the RealPresence Touch and a RealPresence Group system.
To unpair the RealPresence Touch and a system:
1 In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Pairing > Polycom
Touch Device.
2 Clear the check box next to Enable Polycom Touch Device.
3 Click Save.
The system cannot pair with any touch device while the Enable Polycom Touch Device check box
is cleared.
Remove a System from the Paired System List
You can remove a system from the device’s paired system list.
To remove a room system from the paired system list:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Pairing > Polycom Touch
Device.
2 Click Forget this Device.
3 Click Save.
Power Off the RealPresence Touch
If you need to move your RealPresence Touch device to another area, power off the device before you
disconnect the Ethernet cable.
To power off the RealPresence Touch:
1 On any screen, tap
Menu, Settings, and then Administration.
2 Sign in using your Admin ID and password.
3 Scroll down to Power and Pairing.
4 Touch RealPresence Touch Power until a Shutting down... message displays.
The RealPresence Touch is powered off.
Wake the RealPresence Touch
The RealPresence Touch goes to sleep after two minutes of inactivity. To wake it, you can touch the screen.
To wake the RealPresence Touch:
» Touch the screen.
The last screen that was displayed before the sleep state is displayed.
Polycom, Inc.
222
Polycom Touch Devices
Remote Management of the RealPresence Touch
You can remotely manage certain features of your RealPresence Touch. For a list of supported browsers,
refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Release Notes.
You can manage the following features remotely:
● Download Logs: Downloads the RealPresence Touch logs to the location specified in the device.
● Network Settings: Specifies whether the system acquires an IP address automatically or manually.
With the manual method, the other settings that are available from the RealPresence Touch become
available on the web.
● Pair: Pairs and unpairs from room systems. Before you can connect to or pair with a device, you must
know the device’s IP Address and the User Name and password used to connect.
● Security: Changes the admin ID and password of the RealPresence Touch.
● Software Updates: Updates the RealPresence Touch software. You can update from the default
Polycom server or your own server by entering the appropriate IP address.
● View RealPresence Touch Screens: Shows the screen currently being displayed on the
RealPresence Touch. You can click Refresh at any time to see if the screen has changed.
Open a Remote Management Window for the RealPresence Touch
You can open a remote management window for your RealPresence Touch in a web browser.
To open a remote management window:
1 In a web browser, enter the IP address of the RealPresence Touch device.
2 In the login window, enter the ID and Password you use to access the administrative features of the
RealPresence Touch.
You can access the remote management features by using the Navigation menu or the Dashboard.
To return to the Dashboard, click the Home icon.
Download Logs Using the RealPresence Touch
You can download RealPresence Group system logs using the RealPresence Touch.
To download logs using the RealPresence Touch:
1 In the RealPresence Touch web interface, click Download Logs.
2 A .tar file is downloaded to your local computer.
You can extract the file and open it to review the log information.
Pair the RealPresence Touch and a System on the Web Interface
To pair your RealPresence Touch with a RealPresence Group system, you must enter the system’s
credentials before connection can be established.
To manually pair the RealPresence Touch to a system:
1 In the RealPresence Touch web interface, click Pairing.
2 At Device, select RealPresence Group Series.
Polycom, Inc.
223
Polycom Touch Devices
3 Enter the IP Address or Host Name, User Name, and Password for the system.
4 Click Pair.
The pairing connection begins, and the Home screen displays when the pairing is successful.
Use the RealPresence Touch to Unpair a System on the Web Interface
You can unpair the RealPresence Touch and a RealPresence Group system.
To unpair a system from the RealPresence Touch:
1 In the RealPresence Touch web interface, click Pairing.
2 Click Unpair.
Change the User Name and Password for the RealPresence Touch
You can change the security credentials for the RealPresence Touch device.
To change security credentials for the RealPresence Touch:
1 In the RealPresence Touch web interface, click Security.
2 At Admin ID, enter your admin ID.
3 At Current Password, enter the current password.
4 At Password, enter the new password.
5 At Confirm Password, reenter the new password.
6 Click Save.
Customize the RealPresence Touch Home Screen
You can use the system web interface to configure how information is displayed on the Home screen of the
RealPresence Touch device. These settings are included in the System settings profile, and included in
bundled provisioning when using RealPresence Resource Manager.
To configure the RealPresence Touch Home Screen:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Pairing > RealPresence Touch
Home Screen Configuration.
2 Configure the settings on the Home Screen Settings screen that are described in the following
sections.
Note: To enable the Recent Calls and Speed Dial icons, do the following:
• Recent Calls: In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > System Settings
> Recent Calls. Select the Enable Recent Calls checkbox.
• Speed Dial: In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Home Screen
Settings > Speed Dial. Select the Enable Speed Dial checkbox.
Polycom, Inc.
224
Polycom Touch Devices
Choose Icon Buttons to Display on the RealPresence Touch Home
Screen
By default, two icon buttons appear in the lower center of the RealPresence Touch Home screen; users see
only the Place a Call and Show Content icons. However, you can customize the number of screens and
Home screen icons in a preferred order. Once you customize the Home screen configuration, users can
scroll through one to three Home Screens, with up to three icons on each screen.
To display the Home screen icons:
1 In the web user interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Pairing > RealPresence
Touch Home Screen Configuration.
2 Under Configure Home Screen, click Configure Home Screen Options.
3 At Home screen 1 > Button 1, select one to three icon buttons to appear per screen in your preferred
order. You can select from the following icon buttons:
 None (no icon)
 Place a Call
 Show Content
 Keypad
 Contacts
 Speed Dial
 Recent
 System Information
 User Settings
 Administration
4 If you want to include more than one Home screen, continue selecting icon buttons for Home
Screen 2 and Home Screen 3 until all screens are configured. For example, Home Screen 1 >
Button 1 > Recent Call Button 2 > Place a Call > Button 3 > Contacts.
5 To save your selections, click Save.
Your new selections should display on the Home screens of the RealPresence Touch device.
Customize the Place a Call Screen Icon Buttons on the RealPresence
Touch Device
You can customize the Place a Call screen to display certain icon buttons. Since there are four ways to
place a call by default, after you tap the Place a Call button, all the selections display on the screen. You
can customize one of the icon buttons to be the default. All of the other Place a Call icon buttons continue
to display at the top of the screen.
To customize the Place A Call screen icon buttons:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Pairing > RealPresence Touch
Home Screen Configuration.
2 Under Configure Home Screen, click Place A Call Screen.
Polycom, Inc.
225
Polycom Touch Devices
3 Under Select Preferred Sub Menu, choose from the following:
 Keypad
 Contacts
 Recent Calls
 Speed Dials
4 Click Save.
Your new selections should display on the RealPresence Touch Place a Call screen.
To revert back to the default icons, at Configure Home Screen, select Default Configuration, and
click Save.
Change the Home Screen Background Image on the RealPresence
Touch
The RealPresence Touch device allows you to upload a custom background image that is separate from the
system monitor background. If a custom image is not loaded, the image from the primary system screen
displays as the RealPresence Touch device background when it is paired with the system (default behavior).
To create a custom background on the RealPresence Touch, you must upload an image with pixel size of
1920 x 1080 (width by height) in a .jpg file format that is less than 5 MB.
To upload a background monitor image:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Home Screen Settings >
RealPresence Touch Background.
2 Browse to the desired image file and click Choose File > Upload.
The custom image displays paired RealPresence Touch Home screen.
Troubleshooting the RealPresence Touch Device
For information on troubleshooting the RealPresence Touch, see the following topics:
● View System Details and Connection Status on the RealPresence Touch
● View Call Statistics on the RealPresence Touch
● Transfer RealPresence Touch Logs to a USB Storage Device
● Perform a Factory Restore on the RealPresence Touch
● Perform a RealPresence Touch Factory Restore Using a USB Storage Device
View System Details and Connection Status on the RealPresence
Touch
You can view certain system details about the paired RealPresence Group system on the RealPresence
Touch; this information might be useful for troubleshooting or for technical support.
Polycom, Inc.
226
Polycom Touch Devices
To view system details and connection status:
1 On any screen on the RealPresence Touch, tap
Menu and then Settings.
The System Information screen is displayed.
2 Under Device Connection Status, tap the room system that you want information on.
System details and connection status information is listed for the connected room system.
View Call Statistics on the RealPresence Touch
When your RealPresence Group system is paired with a RealPresence Touch, you might want to view
certain call statistics, such as bitrates, compression formats, and packet loss during a call.
To view call statistics about a call in progress:
1 During a call, on any screen, tap
Call Statistics (located at the top left of your screen).
Call statistics for each stream in the current call are now displayed.
2 To view statistics for another call participant, switch to that participant and tap
again.
Call Statistics
To view more information about a specific stream, navigate to the desired stream and tap More
Information.
Transfer RealPresence Touch Logs to a USB Storage Device
You might find log files useful when troubleshooting. You can transfer RealPresence Touch logs to a USB
storage device.
1 Insert a USB storage device into the RealPresence Touch device.
2 On the RealPresence Touch device, do one of the following:
 Tap
 Tap
Administration and enter the user name and password for the device.
Menu > Administration and enter your user name and password.
3 Tap Transfer RealPresence Touch Logs to USB Device.
A message displays while the logs are being transferred to the USB storage device.
After a success message displays, click OK.
Note: The USB storage device must be in FAT32 format.
Perform a Factory Restore on the RealPresence Touch
If the RealPresence Touch device is not functioning correctly or you have forgotten the Administration
password, you can use the factory restore button to reset the device. This operation completely erases the
RealPresence Touch device’s settings and reinstalls the default platform and applications.
Note: Do not power off the device during the factory restore process.
Polycom, Inc.
227
Polycom Touch Devices
The restore button pinhole is on the back of the RealPresence Touch, as shown in the following figure.
To reset the RealPresence Touch device:
1 Disconnect the ethernet cable to power off the device.
2 Using a pin or paper clip, insert it into the pin hole, and press and hold the factory restore button.
3 Continue to hold the factory restore button for a full 5 seconds and connect the Ethernet cable.
4 Wait for the RealPresence Touch device to power on and display the setup wizard (also called the
OOB, out-of-box wizard).
5 Follow the instructions on the setup wizard.
When the process is complete, the device displays the splash screen and then the home screen.
Perform a RealPresence Touch Factory Restore Using a USB Storage
Device
If you want to install a particular software build on the RealPresence Touch, you can perform a a factory
restore using a USB storage device. Do not power off the device during the factory restore process.
To perform a factory restore on the RealPresence Touch using a USB Storage Device:
1 Copy a build package (.tgz file) to the root directory of a USB storage device.
2 Disconnect the ethernet cable to power off the device.
3 Insert the USB storage device into the side USB port of the device.
4 Using a pin or paper clip, insert it into the pin hole, and press and hold the factory restore button.
5 Continue to hold the factory restore button for a full 5 seconds and connect the Ethernet cable.
6 Wait for the RealPresence Touch device to power on and display the setup wizard (also called the
OOB, out-of-box wizard).
7 Follow the instructions on the setup wizard.
When the process is complete, the device displays the splash screen and then the home screen.
Set Up the Polycom Touch Control
The Polycom Touch Control allows you to control a RealPresence Group system.
Polycom, Inc.
228
Polycom Touch Devices
To set up the Polycom Touch Control device:
1 Ensure that the correct software is installed on the Polycom RealPresence Group system that you
want to control, and that you have completed the setup wizard on the system.
2 Connect the Ethernet cable to the underside of the Polycom Touch Control.
3 If you intend to use the Polycom Touch Control to show content from a computer, connect the USB
cable to the underside of the Polycom Touch Control.
4 If you want to connect the stand, route the Ethernet and USB cables through the opening in the
stand. Then attach the stand to the Polycom Touch Control by tightening the mounting screw with a
screwdriver.
5 Plug the Ethernet cable into the wall outlet:
 If your room provides Power Over Ethernet, you can connect the Ethernet cable directly to a LAN
outlet.
 If your room does not provide Power Over Ethernet, you must connect the Ethernet cable to the
power supply adapter. Then connect the power supply adapter to a LAN outlet and power outlet.
The Polycom Touch Control powers on and displays the language selection screen.
6 Choose your language and follow the onscreen instructions to pair the Polycom Touch Control with
your RealPresence Group system, or select Pair Later on the Pairing screen to skip pairing.
7 After the Polycom Touch Control connects to the network, enter the RealPresence Group system IP
address and touch Connect. By default, the IP address of the RealPresence Group system is
displayed on the bottom of its Home screen. If the RealPresence Group system is configured to
allow pairing and you enter the IP address for the system correctly, the Touch Control displays a
prompt for the Polycom RealPresence Group system admin user ID and password.
When the Polycom Touch Control has paired and connected with the RealPresence Group system,
the Polycom Touch Control displays a success message, and the menus on the RealPresence Group
system monitor become unavailable. For more information about pairing, refer to Pair the Polycom
Touch Control and a RealPresence Group System.
Pairing States for the Polycom Touch Control Device
When you configure the Polycom Touch Control to pair with a particular RealPresence Group system, the
Polycom Touch Control makes an IP connection to the RealPresence Group system. If the connection is
lost for any reason, the Polycom Touch Control automatically attempts to restore the connection.
You can pair the Polycom Touch Control and Polycom RealPresence Group system during initial Polycom
Touch Control setup, as described in the steps on the previous screen.
After you have completed Polycom Touch Control setup, you can pair to a different RealPresence Group
system using Polycom Touch Control settings and unpair using the web interface.
When you use a Polycom Touch Control with the RealPresence Group system, you must be sure to update
the RealPresence Group software before you update the Polycom Touch Control software. Only Polycom
Touch Control software versions 4.x or later work with RealPresence Group systems.
The following table describes the pairing states:
Polycom, Inc.
229
Polycom Touch Devices
State
Description
Paired
The Polycom Touch Control is successfully connected to the RealPresence Group
system through the pairing process, including providing the RealPresence Group admin
ID and password. A single Polycom Touch Control can be paired to multiple
RealPresence Group systems and, once paired, the Polycom Touch Control can switch
between RealPresence Group systems without needing to enter admin IDs or
passwords.
Unpaired
The ability to pair or connect to the Polycom Touch Control is disabled on the
RealPresence Group system. The only way to unpair is to follow the procedure
described in Unpair the Polycom Touch Control and a RealPresence Group System.
Connected
A Polycom Touch Control has an active pairing connection to the Polycom
RealPresence Group system. A single Polycom Touch Control can be paired to multiple
RealPresence Group systems, but can be connected to only one RealPresence Group
system at a time.
Disconnected
The Polycom Touch Control does not have an active pairing connection to an
RealPresence Group system, but is still paired if at least one RealPresence Group
system that has previously paired with the Polycom Touch Control has not unpaired.
Pair the Polycom Touch Control and a RealPresence
Group System
You can pair the Polycom Touch Control and a RealPresence Group system using the web interface.
To pair the Polycom Touch Control and Polycom RealPresence Group system during
setup:
» After selecting a language, enter the RealPresence Group system IP address in the Polycom Touch
Control interface and touch Connect.
Note: If you do not want to pair during setup, select Pair Later. If you choose to skip pairing, many
Polycom Touch Control features are not available.
To pair the Polycom Touch Control and Polycom RealPresence Group system after setup,
using the Polycom Touch Control:
1 On the Polycom Touch Control Home screen, touch System.
2 Scroll to Device Connection Status and then touch
system.
Info next to the RealPresence Group
3 Touch View Pairing Settings.
4 Change the RealPresence Group system IP address and touch Connect.
Polycom, Inc.
230
Polycom Touch Devices
To pair the Polycom Touch Control and Polycom RealPresence Group system after setup,
using the Polycom RealPresence Group system web interface:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Pairing > Polycom Touch
Device.
2 Enable the Enable Polycom Touch Device setting.
After the RealPresence Group system and the Polycom Touch Control are paired, the Polycom
RealPresence Group system web interface and the Polycom Touch Control interface display information
about each other and about their connection status.
Unpair the Polycom Touch Control and a RealPresence
Group System
You can unpair the Polycom Touch Control and RealPresence Group system using the web interface.
To unpair the Polycom Touch Control and a RealPresence Group system:
1 On the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Pairing > Polycom
Touch Control.
2 Disable Allow Pairing or select Forget this Device.
The RealPresence Group system cannot pair with any Polycom Touch Control while Allow Pairing
is disabled.
Power Off the Polycom Touch Control
You can power off the Polycom Touch Control.
To power off the Polycom Touch Control:
1 From the Touch Control Home screen, touch
User Settings.
2 Scroll to the Power section.
3 Select Touch Control Power.
4 In the menu that appears, select Power Off the Touch Control. If you choose to power off the
Polycom Touch Control, you must disconnect and reconnect the LAN cable to power it on again.
Wake the Polycom Touch Control
The Touch Control goes to sleep after two minutes of inactivity.
To wake up the Polycom Touch Control:
» Touch anywhere on the screen to wake it up.
Polycom, Inc.
231
Polycom Touch Devices
Configuring the Polycom Touch Control Software
Before you use the Polycom Touch Control, you must configure the LAN setting, and optionally, the regional
setting.
The Polycom Touch Control has separate admin settings that allow you to update its software and configure
LAN, regional, and security properties for the device. For more information, refer to the following sections:
● Configure Polycom Touch Control LAN Settings
● Configure Polycom Touch Control Location and Time Settings
● Configure Admin ID and Password for the Polycom Touch Control
Configure Polycom Touch Control LAN Settings
Before you can pair the Polycom Touch Control with the RealPresence Group system, you must configure
the LAN settings.
To configure Polycom Touch Control LAN settings:
1 From the Home screen, touch
Administration.
2 Touch the LAN Properties tab.
3 Configure the following IP Address (IPv4) settings.
Setting
Description
Set IP Address
Specifies how the Touch Control obtains an IP address.
• Obtain IP address automatically—Select if the Touch Control gets an IP address
from the DHCP server on the LAN.
• Enter IP address manually—Select if the IP address is not automatically assigned.
IP Address
Displays the IP address currently assigned to the Touch Control, if the Touch Control
obtains its IP address automatically.
If you selected Enter IP address manually, enter the IP address here.
Subnet Mask
Displays the subnet mask currently assigned to the Touch Control.
If you selected Enter IP address manually, enter the subnet mask here.
Default Gateway
Displays the gateway currently assigned to the Touch Control.
If you selected Enter IP address manually, enter the gateway IP address here.
4 Configure the following DNS settings.
Polycom, Inc.
232
Polycom Touch Devices
Setting
Description
Domain Name
Displays the domain name currently assigned to the Touch Control.
If the Polycom Touch Control does not automatically obtain a domain name, enter one
here.
DNS Servers
Displays the DNS servers currently assigned to the Touch Control.
If the Touch Control does not automatically obtain a DNS server address, enter up to two
DNS servers here.
You can specify IPv4 DNS server addresses only when the IPv4 address is entered
manually. When the IPv4 address is obtained automatically, the DNS Server addresses
are also obtained automatically.
5 View the general settings.
Setting
Description
Duplex Mode
Displays the duplex mode.
LAN Speed
Displays the LAN speed.
Configure Polycom Touch Control Location and Time Settings
You can configure location settings on the Polycom Touch Control.
To configure the Polycom Touch Control location settings:
1 From the Home screen, touch
Administration.
2 Touch the Location tab.
3 Select a language from the Language menu.
4 Configure the following settings under Date and Time.
Setting
Description
Time Zone
Specifies the time difference between GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) and your location.
Time Server
Specifies connection to a time server for automatic Touch Control time settings.
The date and time must be manually reset every time the Touch Control restarts, in the
following cases:
• Time Server is set to Off.
• Time Server is set to Manual or Auto, but the Touch Control cannot connect to a time
server successfully.
Time Server Address
Specifies the address of the time server to use when Time Server is set to Manual.
Time Format
Specifies your format preference for the time display and lets you enter your local time.
Configure Admin ID and Password for the Polycom Touch Control
You can set an admin ID and password, which allows you to limit access to the Polycom Touch Control
Administration settings.
Polycom, Inc.
233
Polycom Touch Devices
To set a Polycom Touch Control admin ID and password:
1 From the Home screen touch
Administration.
An admin ID and password might be configured for the Touch Control Administration settings. The
default ID is admin and the default password is 456.
2 Touch the Security tab.
3 Set the following security settings.
Setting
Description
Admin ID
Specifies the ID for the administrator account. The default Admin ID is admin.
Admin
Password
Specifies the password for administrator access when logging in to the Touch Control. The default
password is 456.
When this password is set, you must enter it to configure the Touch Control Admin Settings. The
password must not contain spaces.
Managing the Polycom Touch Control Remotely
You can remotely manage certain features of your Polycom Touch Control from within your enterprise
environment.
This list describes the features you can manage remotely:
● Download Logs: Downloads the Polycom Touch Control logs to the location specified in the device.
● Network Settings: Specifies whether the system acquires an IP address automatically or manually.
With the manual method, the other settings that are available from the Polycom Touch Control
become available on the web.
● Pair: Pairs and unpairs from RealPresence Group systems. Before you can connect to or pair with a
device, you must know the device’s IP Address and the User Name and Password used to connect.
● Security: Changes the admin ID and password of the Polycom Touch Control.
● Software Updates: Updates the Polycom Touch Control software. You can update from the default
Polycom server or your own server by entering the appropriate IP address. You can configure the
updates to occur automatically or manually.
● View Polycom Touch Control Screens: Shows the screen currently being displayed on the
Polycom Touch Control. You can click Refresh at any time to see if the screen has changed.
Open the Remote Management Window for the Polycom Touch Control
You can open the Polycom Touch Control in a browser window to perform remote management functions.
To open the remote management window:
1 In one of the supported web browser windows, enter the IP address of the Polycom Touch Control.
2 In the login window, enter the ID and Password you use to access the administrative features of the
Polycom Touch Control.
You can access the remote management features by using the Dashboard or the Navigation menu.
You return to the Dashboard by clicking the Home icon.
Polycom, Inc.
234
Polycom Touch Devices
Troubleshooting on the Polycom Touch Control Device
For information on troubleshooting the Polycom Touch Control, see the following topics:
● View Call Statistics for an Active Point-to-Point Call on the Polycom Touch Control
● View Call Statistics for an Active Multipoint Call on the Polycom Touch Control
● Transfer RealPresence Touch Logs to a USB Storage Device
● View Polycom Touch Control System Details
● Factory Restore on the Polycom Touch Control
● Perform a Factory Restore on a Polycom Touch Control
● Perform a Factory Restore on a Polycom Touch Control Using a USB Storage Device
View Call Statistics for an Active Point-to-Point Call on the Polycom
Touch Control
During a point-to-point call, you can view call statistics about a call participant or about an active stream.
To view information about a point-to-point call in progress:
1 Touch Participants. Participant information displays.
2 Touch View Call Statistics.
Streams associated with the participant are displayed beneath the participant information. To view
more information about a specific stream, navigate to the desired stream and touch . From an
individual stream view you can touch Next Stream to view the next stream in the list.
View Call Statistics for an Active Multipoint Call on the Polycom Touch
Control
During a multipoint call, you can view call statistics about any of the call participants or about an active
stream.
To view information about a multipoint call in progress:
1 Touch Participants.A list of participants in the call displays.
2 Touch View Call Statistics and do one of the following:
 To view a participant’s details, navigate to the desired participant, and touch
.
 The participants’ active streams are displayed beneath the participant information. To view more
information about a specific stream, navigate to the desired stream and touch . From an
individual stream view you can select Next Stream to view the next stream in the stream list.
To quickly access a list of all active audio, video, and content streams within the call, navigate to
Active Streams. This setting is available in SVC calls only. Select the desired stream and touch
.
Transfer Polycom Touch Control Logs to a USB Storage Device
You might find log files useful when troubleshooting. You can transfer the Touch Control logs to an external
USB storage device.
Polycom, Inc.
235
Polycom Touch Devices
To transfer Polycom Touch Control logs:
1 Ensure that a USB device is connected to the USB port on the right side of the Polycom Touch
Control.
2 From the Home screen touch
Administration.
An admin ID and password might be configured for the Touch Control Administration settings. The
default ID is admin and the default password is 456.
3 Under Security, select Transfer Touch Control Logs to USB Device.
A popup message displays when the log transfer completes successfully.
View Polycom Touch Control System Details
You might need to view certain system details to do video conferencing tasks, such as pairing, or to perform
troubleshooting tests to provide information for your own testing or for technical support.
To view your Polycom Touch Control system details:
1 On the Home screen, touch System. The following Touch Control information displays:
 Model
 Hardware Version
 Serial Number
 Panel Software
 Operating System Version
 Kernel Version
 MAC Address
 IP Address
2 To view the paired RealPresence Group system details, touch the <Product Name> System tab.
Factory Restore on the Polycom Touch Control
If the Polycom Touch Control is not functioning correctly or you have forgotten the Administration password,
you can use the restore button to reset the device. This operation completely erases the device’s settings
and reinstalls the software.
The restore button is on the underside of the Polycom Touch Control, as shown in the following figure.
Polycom, Inc.
236
Polycom Touch Devices
Perform a Factory Restore on a Polycom Touch Control
If the Polycom Touch Control device is not functioning correctly or you have forgotten the Administration
password, you can use the factory restore button to reset the device. This operation completely erases the
device’s settings and reinstalls the default platform and applications. Do not power off the device during the
factory restore process.
To reset the Polycom Touch Control using the factory restore button:
1 Power off the Polycom Touch Control.
2 Disconnect the LAN cable.
3 Disconnect all USB devices.
4 Press and hold the factory restore button while you reconnect the LAN cable to the device. Continue
to hold the factory restore button down for about 10 seconds after the device powers on.
If the device requires login information, the default for the admin ID is admin and for the password is 456.
During the factory restore process, the default platform and applications are reinstalled. Do not power off
the device during the factory restore process. The device displays a success message when the process is
complete.
Perform a Factory Restore on a Polycom Touch Control Using a USB
Storage Device
If you want to install a particular software build on the Polycom Touch Control, you can perform a a factory
restore using a USB storage device. Do not power off the device during the factory restore process.
To perform a factory restore on the Polycom Touch Control using a USB Storage Device:
1 Copy a build package (.tar file) to the root directory of a USB storage device.
2 Disconnect the ethernet cable to power off the device.
3 Insert the USB storage device into the side USB port of the device.
4 Using a pin or paper clip, insert it into the pin hole, and press and hold the factory restore button.
5 Continue to hold the factory restore button for a full 5 seconds and connect the Ethernet cable.
6 Wait for the Polycom Touch Control device to power on and display the setup wizard (also called the
OOB, out-of-box wizard).
7 Follow the instructions on the setup wizard.
If the device requires login information, the default for the admin ID is admin and for the password is
456.
During the factory restore process, the default platform and applications are reinstalled. Do not power
off the device during the factory restore process. The device displays a success message when the
process is complete.
Polycom, Inc.
237
Polycom Touch Devices
Polycom, Inc.
238
VisualBoard Application
To learn how to configure the VisualBoard application and to install the application for use with touch or
standard monitors on RealPresence Group systems, refer to the following topics.
● VisualBoard Application Support
● Touch Monitor Support
● Enable the VisualBoard Application
● Prerequisites to Install a Second Monitor for Use with the VisualBoard Application
● Install a Second Monitor for Use With the VisualBoard Application
● Configure Monitor 1 as the Content Monitor
● Configure Monitor 2 as the Content Monitor
● Polycom® UC Board
VisualBoard Application Support
The VisualBoard application is an integrated application that is supported on RealPresence Group systems.
The application works with the following system models:
● Polycom RealPresence Group 300 system
● Polycom RealPresence Group 310 system
● Polycom RealPresence Group 500 system
● Polycom RealPresence Group 700 system
The VisualBoard application works with the following software versions:
● Polycom RealPresence Group system software version 4.1.3 and later
● Polycom RealPresence Immersive Studio software version 4.2.0 and later
The VisualBoard application can also be launched from the following Polycom touch devices:
● RealPresence Touch
● Polycom Touch Control
Prerequisites for the VisualBoard Application
Before you can begin using the VisualBoard application, ensure that you have done the following:
● Installed and configured one of the following: USB mouse, UC Board hardware, or a supported touch
monitor
● Connected at least one monitor for use with the RealPresence Group system (two monitors are also
supported)
Polycom® , Inc.
239
VisualBoard Application
● Enabled the VisualBoard/RDP setting on the RealPresence Group web interface
Note: USB storage devices cannot be daisy chained
When setting up the VisualBoard application, note that only one USB storage device can be
connected to one host port, whether it is connected directly or through a hub.
Touch Monitor Support
The VisualBoard application supports several different touch monitors for use with Polycom systems. For a
list of supported monitors, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Release Notes at
support.polycom.com. To enable the touch monitor interface on RealPresence Group 300 and
RealPresence Group 310 systems, you must activate the dual monitor option key in the system’s web
interface. For information on the activation procedure, refer to Software and System Option Keys.
Enable the VisualBoard Application
You must enable the VisualBoard application before you can use it with the RealPresence Group system.
To enable the VisualBoard application:
1 From the room system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > System
Settings > VisualBoard/RDP.
2 Select Enable, and then select Save.
Prerequisites to Install a Second Monitor for Use with
the VisualBoard Application
Before you can use a touch or standard monitor as the second monitor with a RealPresence Group system,
you must do the following:
1 Enable the VisualBoard application.
2 Configure and connect at least monitor 1 and monitor 2 to the system.
You need the following components to connect a second monitor to a RealPresence Group system:
● USB cable
● USB storage device (optional)
● HDMI cable
● DVI-HDMI adaptor (optional)
For RealPresence Group 500 and 700 systems, the VisualBoard application works only as monitor 2, so the
monitor must be connected to monitor 2 HDMI monitor output.
Polycom® , Inc.
240
VisualBoard Application
Install a Second Monitor for Use With the VisualBoard
Application
To install a touch or standard monitor as a second monitor, follow the steps in this section. For RealPresence
Group 310 systems, you must have a dual option key installed to use a second monitor with the system.
Polycom recommends the use of digital output for content (DVI-D or HDMI) instead of analog (VGA or YPbPr) when
using the VisualBoard application. Digital content produces the optimum results with alignment of the VisualBoard
application. For information on configuring a touch monitor, refer to Configure Secondary Monitors for Content in a
Multiple Touch Monitor Environment.
To install a monitor as a second monitor:
1 Connect the video cable by doing one of the following:
 Connect one end of an HDMI cable to the HDMI Input port on the monitor. Connect the other end
of the HDMI cable to the Monitor 2 HDMI Output port on the RealPresence Group system.
 If your monitor has only a DVI input port, use a DVI-HDMI adaptor to connect it to the HDMI output
port of the RealPresence Group system.
2 Connect the touch monitor to the system.
If you are using a Polycom UC Board sensor with your current content monitor, the sensor is
connected to the RealPresence Group system.
a Connect one end of a USB cable to the USB port on the touch monitor.
b Connect the other end of the USB cable to the USB port on the RealPresence Group system.
A USB storage device can also be installed in the second USB port on the RealPresence Group
system for importing and exporting slides, images, or photos.
3 To connect cables from the monitor 2 or the touch monitor to the RealPresence Group system, refer
to the next figure.
Configure Monitor 1 as the Content Monitor
To use the VisualBoard application on your system’s Monitor 1, you must configure monitor settings on the
web interface. If you are using a touch monitor as Monitor 1, you can run the VisualBoard application on the
monitor and touch the screen to interact with the application.
Polycom® , Inc.
241
VisualBoard Application
Some monitors might delay the time between writing and displaying, due to processing within the monitor.
When using the VisualBoard application with a monitor, configure your monitor or projector to use Game
Mode, if that setting is available.
To configure monitor 1 to show content and the VisualBoard application:
1 In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Monitors.
2 Under Monitor 1 for the Enable setting, select Manual.
3 For the Monitor Profile setting, select Content, then Far, then Near or Content, then Far.
Configure Monitor 2 as the Content Monitor
The VisualBoard application runs on Monitor 2 by default, but you might want to make configuration
changes to the monitor settings. Some monitors might delay the time between writing and displaying, due
to processing within the monitor. When using the VisualBoard application with a monitor, configure your
monitor or projector to use Game Mode, if that setting is available.
To configure monitor 2 to show content:
1 In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Monitors.
2 To configure monitor 1, go to System > Admin Settings > Monitors. At Enable, select either Auto
or Manual. If you chose Manual, select any of the available profiles, except Content, then Far,
then Near or Content, then Far.
3 To configure monitor 2, at Monitor Profile, enable one of the content profiles, such as Content,
then Far, then Near, Content, then Far, Content, then Near, or the Content Only profile.
Polycom® UC Board
With the Polycom® UC Board, you can show and annotate content in real-time from RealPresence Group
systems by using the stylus and receiver included with the UC Board hardware. You can use either a second
monitor or a whiteboard and projector. For flat, cold surfaces such as white boards with projectors, Polycom
suggests that you use the Polycom UC Board.
Polycom® , Inc.
242
VisualBoard Application
Two monitors are required to use the Polycom UC Board. The second monitor can be either a projector used
with a whiteboard, or a monitor.
Polycom recommends the following installation tips:
● Use LED backlit, LCD displays instead of CFL LCD displays.
● Do not use plasma backlit displays.
● The UC Board hardware sensor and pen are designed for cold surfaces, such as white boards with
projectors.
● Mount the hardware sensor on the top of the display device. Room lights can interfere with the sensor
when it is mounted on the bottom of the display.
The UC Board sensor supports one stylus at a time. It does not support using two styluses simultaneously.
For more information on setting up and using the UC Board, refer to the Polycom UC Board Quick Start
Guide, available with the UC Board hardware and at support.polycom.com.
Configure the Polycom UC Board
You can configure the Polycom UC Board to show content.
To set up two monitors and configure to show content:
1 To configure monitor 1, go to System > Admin Settings > Monitors. At Enable, select either Auto
or Manual. If you chose Manual, select any of the available profiles, except Content, then Far,
then Near or Content, then Far.
2 To configure monitor 2, at Monitor Profile, enable one of the content profiles, such as Content,
then Far, then Near, Content, then Far, or the Content Only profile.
To improve performance, configure your monitor or projector to use Game Mode, if that setting is
available.
Polycom® , Inc.
243
Troubleshooting
To learn more about troubleshooting your system or device, refer to the following topics:
General Troubleshooting
Placing a Test Call
Viewing System Details on the Local Interface
Audio Meters
View Call Statistics for an Active Point-to-Point Call With the Remote Control
View Call Statistics for an Active Multipoint Call with the Remote Control
System Reset
Factory Restore on the RealPresence Group System
Perform a Factory Restore on the Polycom EagleEye Director
Perform a Factory Restore on the EagleEye Producer
Before You Contact Polycom Technical Support
Contacting Technical Support
General Troubleshooting
The following table provides general troubleshooting information, including symptoms, problems and
possible solutions.
Symptom
Problem
Solution
The RealPresence Group system
does not respond to the remote
control.
The remote control battery is not
charged.
Charge the remote control battery.
The room lights operate in the 38 Kz
range and interfere with the remote
control signals.
Turn off the room lights and try the
remote control again.
A touch control device, such as the
RealPresence Touch, might be
paired to the room system.
Only one device can be paired at a
time. To use the remote control,
unpair the touch control device.
The room system is sleeping. This is
normal after a period of inactivity.
Pick up the remote control to wake
up the system.
Picture is blank on the main
monitor.
Polycom, Inc.
244
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Problem
Solution
The monitor remains blank after
you pick up the remote control.
The monitor is powered off.
Power on the monitor.
The monitor's power cord is not
plugged in.
Connect the monitor's power cord
and the power on the monitor.
The monitor is not correctly
connected to the room system.
Verify that the monitor is connected
correctly according to the set up
sheet that you received with the
system.
When using two monitors, the
second monitor is blank.
The room system is not configured
for more than one monitor.
Go to Admin Settings > Monitors
and configure the second monitor to
Auto or Manual. Configure the other
Monitor 2 settings. For details, refer
to Configure Secondary Monitors for
Content in a Multiple Touch Monitor
Environment.
You lost the administration
password for your system or
device.
You cannot access the
administration settings without a
valid password.
Refer to the factory restore topics to
learn how to reset your system.
The system is experiencing video
issues during calls, such as packet
loss.
You have not configured the Network
Quality settings in the web interface.
For possible solutions, see Lost
Packet Recovery and Dynamic
Bandwidth Settings.
Placing a Test Call
Polycom support is available to assist you when you encounter difficulties. First though, If you are having
problems making a call, try the troubleshooting tips and then call our test numbers. When you finish
configuring the system, you can call a Polycom video site to test your setup.
You can find a list of worldwide numbers that you can use to test your RealPresence Group system at
www.polycom.com/videotest.
When placing test calls, try these ideas:
● Make sure the number you dialed is correct, then try the call again. For example, you might need to
dial 9 for an outside line or include a long distance access or country code.
● To find out if the problem exists in your system, ask the person you were trying to reach to call you
instead.
● Find out if the system you are calling is powered on and is functioning properly.
● If you can make calls but not receive them, make sure that your system is configured with the correct
number.
Viewing System Details on the Local Interface
You might need to view certain system details on the local interface to do video conferencing tasks, such as
pairing, or to perform troubleshooting tests to provide information for your own testing or for technical
support. You can also review information about calls, network usage, and performance on the various room
system screens in the local interface.
Polycom, Inc.
245
Troubleshooting
The System Information screen has the following choices:
● Information
● Status
● Diagnostics
● Call Statistics (in a call only)
Note: Available system menus vary based on how your administrator configured the system.
Therefore, this section might describe settings that you cannot access on your system. To find out
more about these settings, please talk to your administrator.
Access the Information Screen
You can access system status screen in the local interface.
To access the Information screen:
» Go to
> System Information > Information to view the following system details.
Diagnostic Screen
Description
System Detail
Displays the following system information:
• System Name
• Model
• Hardware Version
• System Software
• Serial Number
• MAC Address
• IP Address
Network
Displays the following network information:
• IP Address
• Host Name
• H.323 Name
• H.323 Extension (E.164)
• SIP Address
• Link-Local
• Site-Local
• Global Address
Usage
Displays the following usage information:
• Time in Last Call
• Total Time in Calls
• Total Number of Calls
• System Up Time
Polycom, Inc.
246
Troubleshooting
Access the Status Screen
You can access system status screen in the local interface.
To access the Status screen:
» Go to
> System Information > Status.
When a system device or service encounters a problem, you see an alert next to the Settings button
on the menu. This screen includes the following system status details for the out of a call status:
Status Screen
Description
Active Alerts
Displays the status of any device or service listed within the Status screens that has a
current status indicator of red. Alerts are listed in the order they occurred. When a system
device or service encounters a problem, you see an alert next to the Settings button on
the menu.
Call Control
Displays the status of the Auto-Answer Point-to-Point Video and Meeting Password
settings.
Audio
Displays the connection status of audio devices such as the microphones and
SoundStation IP.
EagleEye Director
Displays the connection status of the EagleEye Director, if one is connected. If the camera
system is not connected, this choice is not visible on the screen.
VisualBoard
Displays the connection status of the VisualBoard, if one is connected. If VisualBoard is not
connected, this choice is not visible on the screen.
LAN
Displays the connection status of the IP Network.
Servers
•
•
•
Log Management
Always displays the Gatekeeper and SIP Registrar Server.
Displays the active Global Directory Server, LDAP Server, or Microsoft Server.
If enabled, displays the Provisioning Service, Calendaring Service, or Presence Service.
Displays the status of the Log Threshold setting. Your administrator can download system
logs, call detail reports, and configuration profiles using the web interface.
When a system device or service encounters a problem, you see an alert next to the Settings button on the
menu. This screen includes the following system status details for in a call status:
● If the RealPresence Group system detects an EagleEye Director, a status line for the device is
displayed.
● When a change occurs in the system status or a potential problem exists, you see an alert next to the
System button on the menu.
Status Screen
Description
Call Statistics
Displays information about the call in progress. In multipoint calls, the Call Statistics
screens show most of this information for all systems in the call. For more information on
this screen, refer to View Call Statistics for an Active Point-to-Point Call With the Remote
Control.
Polycom, Inc.
247
Troubleshooting
Access the System Diagnostics Screen in the Local Interface
You can access system diagnostics in the local interface.
To access information about your system diagnostics:
» Select Settings > System Information > Diagnostics.
This screen includes the following system diagnostic details:
Diagnostic Screen
Description
Near End Loop
Tests the internal audio encoders and decoders, the external microphones and speakers,
the internal video encoders and decoders, audio hardware, and the external microphones,
speakers, cameras, and monitors.
Monitor 1 displays the video and plays the audio that would be sent to the far site in a call.
This test is not available when you are in a call.
Ping
Tests whether the system can establish contact with a far-site IP address that you specify.
PING returns abbreviated Internet Control Message Protocol results. It returns H.323
information only if the far site is configured for H.323. It returns SIP information only if the
far site is configured for SIP.
If the test is successful, the RealPresence Group system displays a message.
Trace Route
Tests the routing path between the local system and the IP address entered.
If the test is successful, the RealPresence Group system lists the hops between the
system and the IP address you entered.
Color Bars
Tests the color settings of your monitor for optimum picture quality.
If the color bars generated during the test are not clear, or the colors do not look correct,
the monitor needs to be adjusted.
Speaker Test
Tests the audio cable connections. A 473 Hz audio tone indicates that the local audio
connections are correct.
If you run the test from the system during a call, the far site will also hear the tone.
Audio Meter
Measures the strength of audio signals from the microphone or microphones, far-site
audio, and any device connected to the audio line in.
Meters function only when the associated input is enabled.
Note: Some audio meters are unavailable when a SoundStructure digital mixer is
connected to the system.
For details on configuring this setting, refer to Audio Meters.
Polycom, Inc.
248
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Screen
Description
Camera Tracking
Provides diagnostics specific to the EagleEye Director, if this camera is connected to the
system.
Audio
Verifies microphone functionality. To use this feature, speak aloud and verify that you can
see dynamic signal indications for two vertical microphones and five horizontal
microphones. If no signal indication appears for a specific microphone, manually power off
the EagleEye Director and then power it back on.
Also verifies the reference audio signal: Set up a video call. Let the far side speak aloud
and verify that you can see dynamic signal indications for the two reference audio meters.
If no signal indication appears for a specific microphone, make sure the reference cable is
connected firmly.
After you verify microphone functionality, calibrate the camera again.
Video
• Left Camera shows video from the left camera.
• Right Camera shows video from the right camera.
• Color Bars displays the color bar test screen.
Sessions
Displays the following information about each session connected to the system:
• Type of connection, such as web or local interface
• ID associated with the session, typically Admin or User
• Remote IP address (the addresses of people logged in to the RealPresence Group
system from their computers)
Reset System
Note: Do not use this setting unless your administrator tells you to do so.
If a password is set, you must enter it to reset the system.
Returns the system to its default settings. When you select this setting using the remote
control, you can do the following:
• Keep your system settings (such as system name and network configuration) or restore
system settings.
• Keep or delete the directory stored on the system. System reset does not affect the
global directory.
• Keep or delete all PKI certificates and certificate revocation lists (CRLs).
Before you reset the system, you might ask your administrator to download the
Call Detail Report (CDR) and CDR archive. For more information about these
reports, contact your administrator.
Audio Meters
Audio meters indicate the strength of the audio input and output of your microphones, far-site audio, and any
device connected to the audio ports. To avoid or fix audio distortion, you can configure the Audio Meter setting
in the local or web interface. The meters allow you to identify the left and right audio channels on the
RealPresence Group system.
Polycom, Inc.
249
Troubleshooting
Set Audio Meter Levels
You can set audio meter levels for your system so that normal and loud audio peaks are within an acceptable
audio range.
To set audio meter levels:
1 Do one of the following:
 In the web interface, go to Diagnostics > Audio and Video Tests > Audio Meter.
 In the local interface, go to Settings > System Information > Diagnostics > Audio Meter.
2 To test the audio, do one of the following:
 To check the microphones for the near-site, speak into the microphones.
 To check far-site audio, ask a participant at the far site to speak, or call a phone in the far-site room
to hear it ring.
3 For normal speech and program material, set the audio signal levels so that you see peaks between
+3 dB and +7 dB.
Occasional peaks of +12 dB to +16 dB with loud transient noises are acceptable. If you see +20 on
the audio meter, the audio signal is 0 dBFS and the audio might be distorted. A meter reading of +20dB
corresponds to 0dBFS in the room system audio. A signal at this level is likely clipping the audio system.
View Call Statistics for an Active Point-to-Point Call
With the Remote Control
You might need to view call statistics on the local interface to do some troubleshooting for users. You can
only view call statistics during a call. During a point-to-point call, you can view call statistics about a call
participant or about an active stream. As a shortcut during a call, press the Back button on your remote control for
two or more seconds to display the Call Statistics screen.
To view information about a point-to-point call in progress:
» Go to
> System Information > Call Statistics.
Streams associated with the participant are displayed beneath the participant information. To view
more information about a specific stream, navigate to the desired stream and select More
Information.
View Call Statistics for an Active Multipoint Call with
the Remote Control
During a multipoint call, you can view call statistics about any of the call participants or about an active
stream.
To view information about a multipoint call in progress:
1 Go to
Polycom, Inc.
> System Information > Call Statistics. A list of participants in the call displays.
250
Troubleshooting
2 Do one of the following:
 To view a participant’s details, select Participants, navigate to the desired participant, and select
More Information. The participants’ active streams are displayed beneath the participant
information.
 To quickly access information about a particular stream or streams associated with a particular
user, navigate to Streams for calls using Advanced Video Coding (AVC) or Participant Streams
for calls using Scalable Video Coding (SVC). Use the Back and Next Participant buttons to
navigate to the participant with the stream or streams you want to view. Navigate to the desired
stream and select More Information.
 To quickly access a list of all active audio, video, and content streams within the call, navigate to
Active Streams (available in SVC calls only). Select the desired stream, and select More
Information.
Power-On Self Test (POST)
After being powered on, the RealPresence Group systems automatically perform system health checks
before the system is initialized. This process is known as a power-on self test, or POST. The status of the
POST sequence is displayed with the LED indicator light on the front of the device, or in the case of the
RealPresence Group 700 system, in the text field display on the front of the device. For more information
about what the colors of the indicator lights mean, refer to Indicator Lights. When the POST sequence
completes with no severe errors, the RealPresence Group system starts normally.
Test results for the RealPresence Group 300, 310, 500, and 700 systems are logged in the system memory.
If any warnings occur during POST on RealPresence Group 300, 310, 500, and 700 systems, you can view
them after the system starts by going to Settings > System Information > Status > Active Alerts in the
local interface, or Diagnostics > System > System Status in the web interface. If a severe error occurs
during startup, the system does not start up. Contact Polycom technical support.
System Reset
If the RealPresence Group system is not functioning correctly or you have forgotten the Admin Room
Password, you can reset the system with Delete System Settings enabled. This procedure effectively
refreshes your system, deleting all settings except for the following:
● Current software version
● Remote control channel ID setting
● Directory entries
● CDR data and logs
Reset a System
You can reset a system in the web interface. For details about what is deleted from the system, see System
Reset.
To reset the room system using the local interface:
1 Go to Settings > System Information > Diagnostics > Reset System.
2 Enable Delete System Settings.
Polycom, Inc.
251
Troubleshooting
3 Click Reset System.
After about 15 seconds, the system restarts and displays the setup wizard.
Factory Restore on the RealPresence Group System
If the RealPresence Group system is not functioning correctly or you have forgotten the Administration
password, you can use the factory restore button to reset the system.
The factory restore operation completely erases the system’s flash memory and reinstalls the software
version and default configuration stored in its factory partition.
The following items are not saved:
● Software updates
● All system settings including option keys and the remote control channel ID
● Directory entries
● CDR data
During a factory restore on the system or from a USB device, the LED indicator on the front of the system
blinks blue and amber.
Perform a Factory Restore of a System
The restore button pinhole is on the bottom of the Polycom RealPresence Group 300, 310, and 500
systems, as shown in the following figure.
The restore button pinhole is on the front of the Polycom RealPresence Group 700 system, as shown in the
following figure.
Polycom, Inc.
252
Troubleshooting
To reset the system to its factory partition software using the restore button:
1 Power off the system.
2 Straighten a paper clip and insert it into the pinhole.
3 Using the paper clip, press and hold the restore button.
4 While continuing to hold the restore button, press the power button once.
5 Keep holding the restore button for 10 more seconds, then release it.
During the factory restore process, the system displays the Polycom startup screen and the usual software
update screens on HDMI monitors. Other types of monitors will be blank. Do not power off the system during
the factory restore process. The system restarts automatically when the process is complete.
Perform a Factory Restore to Install a Specific Software Version
If you start a factory restore while a USB storage device is connected, the system restores from the USB
device instead of the system’s factory partition.
For about the first five minutes of the factory restore process, the system is erasing data on the SD card and
extracting data from the USB device. This process runs from a special memory partition and graphics are
not available, so your monitor will be blank.
If you prefer, you can have the system prepare the SD card by rewriting the data with zeroes and
reformatting the card, thereby eliminating any traces of old data. Be aware that this step adds about 20
minutes to the beginning of the factory restore process, when all you will see is a blank screen. You will
notice, however, that the LED indicator shows a fast blink of blue and amber lights during this process. The
lights blink normally during the rest of the restore process.
To perform a factory restore using a USB storage device to install a specific software
version:
1 Copy the build package (.tar file) and the sw_keys.txt file to the root directory of a USB device.
2 (Optional) Create a text file named zeroize.txt on the root directory of the USB device, then edit
the file by entering the word TRUE in all capital letters.
If the zeroize.txt file contains the word FALSE, or if the file is not in the root directory of the USB
device, the system uses the standard method of erasing data from the SD card.
3 Power off the system and plug the USB device into your system.
4 While holding the restore button, press the power button once.
Polycom, Inc.
253
Troubleshooting
5 Keep holding the restore button for 10 more seconds, then release it.
The software version of the update file on the USB device is displayed in the web interface.
6 Click Start Update to begin the factory restore.
After the SD card is prepared, the system displays the Polycom startup screen and the usual software
update screens on HDMI monitors. Other types of monitors will be blank. Do not power off the system
during the factory restore process. The system restarts automatically when the process is complete.
Delete Data and Configuration System Files
You can remove sensitive data and configuration information from the room system for security purposes.
To perform a logical delete of system files:
1 Power off the RealPresence Group 300, 310, 500, or 700 system by holding down the Power sensor
for 3 to 5 seconds. Unplug all network connections.
2 Perform a factory restore.
3 Wait for the system to start up and display the setup wizard.
4 Power off the system.
Perform a Factory Restore on the Polycom EagleEye
Director
If the Polycom EagleEyeTM Director is not functioning correctly or you need to recover from a corrupted
partition, you can use the restore button to reset the device. This operation completely erases the camera’s
settings and reinstalls the software.
The following figure shows you the location of the restore button on the back of the Polycom EagleEye
Director.
To reset the Polycom EagleEye Director using the restore button:
1 Press and hold the restore button on the back of the EagleEye Director for 2-3 seconds while the
power light cycles.
When normal video content is displayed on the monitor instead of a blue screen, the EagleEye
Director has been successfully restored.
Polycom, Inc.
254
Troubleshooting
2 Release the restore button.
Note: Keep the Polycom EagleEye Director powered on during the factory restore process.
Perform a Factory Restore on the EagleEye Producer
You can use the hardware restore button on the EagleEye Producer system to perform a factory restore of
the system. A factory restore completely erases the system and restores it to the software version and
default configuration stored in its factory partition. During a factory restore, the LED indicator on the front of
the system blinks blue and amber.
To perform a factory restore:
1 While the EagleEye Producer system is powered off, insert a straightened paper clip through the
pinhole and press and hold the Restore button.
2 While holding the Restore button, plug in the power cable to power on the EagleEye Producer.
3 Hold the Restore button for five additional seconds, and then release it when the LED alternates
amber and blue.
The EagleEye Producer enters factory restore mode. The factory restore takes approximately eight
minutes to complete. The EagleEye Producer automatically reboots when the process is complete.
4 Calibrate the room view when the reboot is complete. For details, refer to Adjust the Room View of
the EagleEye Director.
Note: Keep the Polycom EagleEye Director powered on during the factory restore process.
Before You Contact Polycom Technical Support
If you are not able to make test calls successfully and you have verified that the equipment is installed and
set up correctly, contact your Polycom distributor or Polycom Technical Support at support.polycom.com.
Enter the following information about your room video system, then ask a question or describe the problem.
This information helps us to respond faster to your issue. In addition, please provide any diagnostic tests or
troubleshooting steps that you have already tried.
Locate the System Serial Number
You can view the system serial number on the local interface of the RealPresence Group system.
» To locate the system serial number (14 digits), go to Settings > System Information > Information
> System Detail or locate the number on the back of the system.
Polycom, Inc.
255
Troubleshooting
Locate the Software Version
You can view the software version on the local interface of the RealPresence Group system.
» To locate the software version, go to Settings > System Information > Information > System
Detail.
Locate Active Alert Messages
You can view the active alert messages on the local interface of the RealPresence Group system.
» To locate the active alert messages, go to Settings > System Information > Status > Active Alerts
for messages generated by your system.
Locate the IP Address and H.323 Extension Settings
You can view IP Address and H.323 extension settings on the local interface of the RealPresence Group
system.
» To locate the IP Address and H.323 Extension settings, go to Settings > System Information >
Information > Network.
Locate the LAN Status
You can view the LAN status on the local interface of the RealPresence Group system.
» To locate LAN status, go to Settings > System Information >Status > LAN.
Locate Diagnostics
You can view diagnostics on the local interface of the RealPresence Group system.
To locate Diagnostics, go to Settings > System Information > Diagnostics.
Contacting Technical Support
If you are not able to make test calls successfully and you have verified that the equipment is installed and
set up correctly, contact your Polycom distributor or Polycom Technical Support.
To contact Polycom Technical Support, go to support.polycom.com.
Enter the following information, then ask a question or describe the problem. This information helps us to
respond faster to your issue:
● The 14-digit serial number from the System Detail screen or the back of the system
● The software version from the System Detail screen
● Any active alerts generated by the system
● Information about your network
● Troubleshooting steps you have already tried
You can find the system detail information in the local interface by going to Settings > System Information
> Information or in the web interface by clicking System in the blue bar at the top of the web interface
screen.
Polycom, Inc.
256
Troubleshooting
Knowledge Base
For more troubleshooting information, you can search the Knowledge Base at support.polycom.com.
Polycom Solution Support
Polycom Implementation and Maintenance services provide support for Polycom solution components only.
Additional services for supported third-party Unified Communications (UC) environments integrated with
Polycom solutions are available from Polycom Global Services, and its certified Partners, to help customers
successfully design, deploy, optimize, and manage Polycom visual communication within their third-party
UC environments. UC Professional Services for Microsoft Integration is mandatory for Polycom
Conferencing for Microsoft Outlook, Skype for Business Server 2015 integrations. For additional information
and details please refer to http://www.polycom.com/services/professional_services/index.html or contact
your local Polycom representative.
Polycom, Inc.
257
System Panel Views
The following topics provide information on the system panel views:
Polycom RealPresence Group 300 System
Polycom RealPresence Group 310 System
Polycom RealPresence Group 500 System
Polycom RealPresence Group 700 System
Polycom RealPresence Group 300 System
The following figure and table shows how the web interface settings relate to hardware input and outputs
on the back of the RealPresence Group 300 system.
Ref.
Number
Location in
Web Interface:
Admin Settings >
Input/
Output
Supported
Formats
Description
1
Audio/Video >
Video Inputs >
Input 1
Video Input
HDCI
Input for the camera
2
N/A
Microphone
Input
Polycom
Microphone
Audio input for up to two Polycom
microphone arrays or a SoundStation IP
7000 speaker phone or SoundStructure
mixer
3
Audio/Video >
Audio > Audio
Output
Audio
Output
3.5mm Stereo
Audio output for main monitor audio or
external speaker system
System tones and sound effects +
Audio from the far site +
Polycom, Inc.
258
System Panel Views
Ref.
Number
4
Location in
Web Interface:
Admin Settings >
Audio/Video >
Monitors > Monitor
1
Input/
Output
Supported
Formats
Description
Video
Output 1
•
HDMI
version 1.3
with
embedded
audio
DVI-D
Output for Monitor 1
HDMI
version 1.3
DVI-D
Output for Monitor 2 (available only with a
monitor option key)
•
5
•
Audio/Video >
Monitors > Monitor
2
Video
Output 2
6
N/A
USB
Connectors
USB 2.0
USB for Software Update, remote control
battery charging
7
General Settings >
Serial Ports
Serial Port
RS-232
Serial port
8
Network > LAN
Properties
LAN Port
Ethernet
Connectivity for IP and SIP calls,
People+Content IP, and the system web
interface
9
N/A
Power Input
12 V 6.25 A
Power input
•
Polycom RealPresence Group 310 System
The following figure and table shows how the web interface settings relate to hardware input and outputs
on the back of the RealPresence Group 310 system.
Polycom, Inc.
259
System Panel Views
Ref.
Number
Location in
Web Interface:
Admin Settings >
Input/ Output
Supported
Formats
Description
1
Audio/Video >
Video Inputs >
Input 1
Video Input 1
HDCI
Input for Camera 1
2
Audio/Video >
Video Inputs >
Input 2
Audio/Video >
Audio > Audio
Input > Type:
HDMI
Video Input 2/
Audio Input 1
HDMI version
1.3
Auxiliary video and audio input
3
Audio/Video >
Video Inputs >
Input 2
Video Input 2
VGA
Video input for Content
Note: Use either the HDMI or VGA video input, but not both.
4
Audio/Video >
Audio > Audio
Input > Type:
3.5mm
Audio Input 2
3.5mm Stereo
Stereo line-level input
3.5mm audio is independent and not
associated with any video input
5
N/A
Microphone
Input
Polycom
Microphone
Audio input for up to two Polycom
microphone arrays or a SoundStation IP
7000 speaker phone or SoundStructure
mixer
6
Audio/Video >
Audio > Audio
Output
Audio Output 1
3.5mm Stereo
Audio output for main monitor audio or
external speaker system
Audio Mix Routed to the Output:
System tones and sound effects +
Audio from the far site +
Audio connected to audio input 2 when
associated with video input 2
Polycom, Inc.
260
System Panel Views
Ref.
Number
7
Location in
Web Interface:
Admin Settings >
Audio/Video >
Monitors > Monitor
1
Input/ Output
Supported
Formats
Video Output 1
•
•
8
•
Description
HDMI
version 1.3
with
embedded
audio
DVI-D
Output for Monitor 1
When format is HDMI, audio output for
main monitor audio
Audio Mix Routed to the Output:
System tones and sound effects +
Audio from the far site +
Audio connected to audio input 2 when
associated with video input 2
HDMI
version 1.3
DVI-D
Output for Monitor 2; does not include
audio
NOTE: RealPresence Group 310
systems require a dual monitor option
key to allow dual monitor output.
Audio/Video >
Monitors > Monitor
2
Video Output 2
9
N/A
USB
Connectors
USB 2.0
USB for software update, remote control
battery charging
10
General Settings >
Serial Ports
Serial Port
RS-232
Serial port
11
Network > LAN
Properties
LAN Port
Ethernet
Connectivity for IP calls, People+Content
IP, and the system web interface
12
N/A
Power Input
12 V 6.25 A
Power input
•
Polycom RealPresence Group 500 System
The following figure and table shows how the web interface settings relate to hardware input and outputs
on the back of the RealPresence Group 500 system.
Polycom, Inc.
261
System Panel Views
Ref.
Number
Location in
Web Interface:
Admin Settings >
Input/ Output
Supported
Formats
Description
1
Audio/Video >
Video Inputs >
Input 1
Video Input 1
HDCI
Input for Camera 1
2
Audio/Video >
Video Inputs >
Input 2
Audio/Video >
Audio > Audio
Input > Type:
HDMI
Video Input 2/
Audio Input 1
HDMI version
1.3
Auxiliary video and audio input
3
Audio/Video >
Video Inputs >
Input 2
Video Input 2
VGA
Video input for Content
Note: Use either the HDMI or VGA video input, but not both.
4
Audio/Video >
Audio > Audio
Input > Type:
3.5mm
Audio Input 2
3.5mm Stereo
Stereo line-level input
3.5mm audio is independent and not
associated with any video input
5
N/A
Microphone
Input
Polycom
Microphone
Audio input for up to two Polycom
microphone arrays or a SoundStation IP
7000 speaker phone or SoundStructure
mixer
6
Audio/Video >
Audio > Audio
Output
Audio Output 1
3.5mm Stereo
Audio output for main monitor audio or
external speaker system
Audio Mix Routed to the Output:
System tones and sound effects +
Audio from the far site +
Audio connected to audio input 2 when
associated with video input 2
Polycom, Inc.
262
System Panel Views
Ref.
Number
7
Location in
Web Interface:
Admin Settings >
Audio/Video >
Monitors > Monitor
1
Input/ Output
Supported
Formats
Video Output 1
•
•
HDMI
version 1.3
with
embedded
audio
DVI-D
Description
Output for Monitor 1
When format is HDMI, audio output for
main monitor audio
Audio Mix Routed to the Output:
System tones and sound effects +
Audio from the far site +
Audio connected to audio input 2 when
associated with video input 2
8
Audio/Video >
Monitors > Monitor
2
Video Output 2
HDMI version
1.3
DVI-D
Output for Monitor 2; does not include
audio
9
N/A
USB
Connectors
USB 2.0
USB for software update, remote control
battery charging
10
General Settings >
Serial Ports
Serial Port
RS-232
Serial port
11
Network > LAN
Properties
LAN Port
Ethernet
Connectivity for IP calls, People+Content
IP, and the system web interface
12
N/A
Power Input
12 V 6.25 A
Power input
Polycom RealPresence Group 700 System
This topic shows how the web interface settings relate to hardware input and outputs on the back of the
RealPresence Group 700 system.
Polycom, Inc.
263
System Panel Views
Ref.
Number
Location in
Web Interface:
Admin Settings >
Input/ Output
1
N/A
Power Input
100-240
VAC 2.3 A
Power input
2
Audio/Video >
Video Inputs >
Input 1
Video Input 1
HDCI
Input for Camera 1
3
Audio/Video >
Video Inputs >
Input 1
Video Input 1
HDMI
version 1.4
Input for Camera 1
4
Audio/Video >
Video Inputs >
Input 2
Video Input 2
HDCI
Input for Camera 2
5
Audio/Video >
Video Inputs >
Input 2
Video Input 2
HDMI
version 1.4
Input for Camera 2
Supported
Formats
Description
Note: Use either the HDCI or HDMI for video inputs 1 and 2, but not both.
6
Audio/Video >
Video Inputs >
Input 3
Video Input 3
VGA
Video input associated with audio input 3
7
Audio/Video >
Audio > Audio
Input > Type:
3.5mm
Audio Input 3
3.5mm
Stereo
Audio input for stereo line-level
Audio is included in local audio mix when
video source is selected
3.5mm audio is independent and not
associated with any video input
8
Audio/Video >
Video Inputs >
Input 3
Video Input 3
HDMI
version 1.4
Video and audio input
Note: Use either the HDMI or VGA for video input 3, but not both.
Polycom, Inc.
264
System Panel Views
Ref.
Number
Location in
Web Interface:
Admin Settings >
Input/ Output
Supported
Formats
Description
9
Audio/Video >
Video Inputs >
Input 4
Video Input 4
Composite
Video
Video input
Associated with audio input 4 (audio is
disabled until video input 4 is selected)
10
Audio/Video >
Video Inputs >
Input 4
Video Input 4
Component
Video
Video input associated with audio input 4
(audio is disabled until video input 4 is
selected)
11
Audio/Video >
Audio > Audio
Input > Type:
Component
Audio Input 4
RCA
Associated with video input 4
Inactive until video input is selected
Audio is included in local audio mix when
video source is selected
Note: Use either the Composite/RCA or Component for input 4, but not both.
12
Audio/Video >
Audio > Audio
Input > Type: Line
Audio Input 2
RCA
Auxiliary audio input
Intended as microphone input; sent to far end
only
13
N/A
Audio Input 1
Polycom
Microphone
Audio input for up to three Polycom
microphone arrays or a SoundStation IP 7000
speaker phone or SoundStructure mixer
14
N/A
Audio Output 2
RCA
Audio output for main monitor audio
Audio Mix Routed to the Output:
System tones and sound effects +
Audio from the far site +
Audio input from audio inputs 3 and 4 when
associated video is selected
15
Audio/Video >
Monitors > Monitor
1
Video Output 1
VGA
Output for Monitor 1
16
Audio/Video >
Monitors > Monitor
1
Video Output 1
Audio Output 1
HDMI
version 1.3
Output for Monitor 1
Audio Mix Routed to the Output:
System tones and sound effects +
Audio from the far site +
Audio input from audio inputs 3 and 4 when
associated video is selected
17
Audio/Video >
Monitors > Monitor
2
Video Output 2
VGA
Output for Monitor 2
18
Audio/Video >
Monitors > Monitor
2
Video Output 2
HDMI
version 1.3
Output for Monitor 2
Polycom, Inc.
265
System Panel Views
Ref.
Number
Location in
Web Interface:
Admin Settings >
Input/ Output
Supported
Formats
Description
19
Audio/Video >
Monitors > Monitor
3
Video Output 3
VGA
Output for Monitor 3
20
Audio/Video >
Monitors > Monitor
3
Video Output 3
Audio Output 3
HDMI
version 1.3
Video and audio output for Monitor 3. Audio
output (near-end + far-end + content) when
set for recording
Note: Use either the HDMI or VGA for video outputs 1, 2, and 3, but not both.
21
General Settings >
Serial Ports
Serial Port
RS-232
Serial port
22
N/A
USB
Connectors
USB 3.0
USB for Software Update, remote control
battery charging
23
Network > LAN
Properties > LAN
Options
PC LAN Port
Ethernet
Ethernet switch port
24
Network > LAN
Properties
LAN Port
Ethernet
Connectivity for IP calls, People+Content IP,
and the system web interface
Polycom, Inc.
266
Port Usage
Refer to the following topics about port usage information, which is useful when you configure your network
equipment for video conferencing:
Connections to RealPresence Group Systems
Connections from RealPresence Group Systems
Connections to RealPresence Group Systems
The following table shows IP port usage to RealPresence Group systems.
Configuration
Inbound
Port
22
Type
Static
Protocol
TCP
Function
Secure API
On By
Default?
(Low
Security
Profile)
Yes
Enable/Disable?
Admin Settings > Security> Global
Security > Access
Configurable
Port Number
No
Enable SSH Access: Enable to open
port 22
22
Static
TCP
Polycom Touch
Control over
SSH
Yes
Admin Settings > General Settings >
Pairing > Polycom Touch Device>
Enable Polycom Touch Device
No
23
Static
TCP
Telnet
Diagnostics
No
Admin Settings > Security > Global
Security > Access > Enable Telnet
Access
No
24
Static
TCP
Polycom API
No
Admin Settings > Security > Global
Security > Access > Enable Telnet
Access
No
80
Static
TCP
RealPresence
Group Web UI
over HTTP
Yes
Admin Settings > Security > Global
Security > Access > Enable Web
Access
Admin Settings
> Security >
Global Security
> Access >
Web Access
Port (http)
RealPresence
Touch over
HTTP
- Disables HTTP and HTTPS port
Admin Settings > Security > Global
Security > Access > Restrict to
HTTPS
- Disables HTTP port
Polycom, Inc.
267
Port Usage
Configuration
Inbound
Port
161
Type
Static
Protocol
UDP
Function
SNMP
On By
Default?
(Low
Security
Profile)
No
Enable/Disable?
Admin Settings > Security > Global
Security > Access > Enable SNMP
Access
Admin Settings > Servers > SNMP >
Enable SNMP
443
Static
TLS
RealPresence
Group Web UI
over HTTPS
Configurable
Port Number
Admin Settings
> Servers >
SNMP >
Listening Port
Yes
Admin Settings > Security > Global
Security > Access > Enable Web
Access
No
RealPresence
Touch over
HTTPS
1719
Static
UDP
H.225.0 RAS
No
Admin Settings > Network > IP
Network > H.323 > Use Gatekeeper
No
1720
Static
TCP
H.225.0 Call
Signaling
Yes
Admin Settings > Network > IP
Network > H.323 > Enable IP H.323
No
5001
Static
TCP
People+Conten
t™ IP client
application for
content
sharing. Used
by the
RealPresence
Group systems
and the
RealPresence
Touch device
Yes
Admin Settings > Audio / Video >
Video Input > General Camera
Settings > Enable People+Content IP
No
5060
Static
TCP
SIP (Protocol
depends on
Transport
Protocol
setting)
Yes
Admin Settings > Network > IP
Network > SIP > Enable SIP
No
SIP
Yes
UDP
5061
Static
TLS
Admin Settings > Network > IP
Network > SIP > Transport Protocol
Admin Settings > Network > IP
Network > SIP > Enable SIP
No
Admin Settings > Network > IP
Network > SIP > Transport Protocol
Polycom, Inc.
268
Port Usage
Configuration
Inbound
Port
Type
Protocol
Function
On By
Default?
(Low
Security
Profile)
Enable/Disable?
Configurable
Port Number
4915265535
Dynamic
TCP
H.245
Yes
Admin Settings > Network > IP
Network > H.323 > Enable IP H.323
Admin Settings
> Network > IP
Network >
Firewall > Fixed
Ports > TCP
Ports
(1024-65535)
1638432764
(Default)
Dynamic
UDP
RTP/RTCP
Video and
Audio
Yes
Admin Settings > Network > IP
Network > H.323 > Enable IP H.323
Admin Settings
> Network > IP
Network >
Firewall > Fixed
Ports > UDP
Ports
(1024-65535)
Admin Settings > Network > IP
Network > SIP > Enable SIP
Connections from RealPresence Group Systems
The following table shows IP port usage from RealPresence Group systems.
Configuration
Outbound
Port
Type
Protocol
Function
On By
Default?
(Low
Security
Profile)
Enable/Disable?
Configurable
Port Number
80
Static
TCP
Polycom Product
Registration for
RealPresence
Group system
software
installation and
for the
RealPresence
Touch device
Yes
Uncheck "Register" checkbox during
the setup wizard
No
123
Static
UDP
NTP
Yes
Admin Settings > General Settings >
Date and Time > System Time >
Time Server
No
Polycom, Inc.
269
Port Usage
Configuration
Outbound
Port
162
Type
Static
Protocol
UDP
Function
SNMP TRAP
On By
Default?
(Low
Security
Profile)
No
Enable/Disable?
Admin Settings > Servers > SNMP >
Enable SNMP
Admin Settings > Servers > SNMP >
Destination Address <1,2,3>
389
Static
TLS
LDAP
No
Admin Settings > Servers > Directory
Servers > Server Type
Configurable
Port Number
Yes - Admin
Settings >
Servers > SNMP
> Destination
Address <1,2,3>
> Port
Yes
- Admin Settings
> Servers >
Directory
Servers >
Server Type =
LDAP
- Admin Settings
> Servers >
Directory
Servers >
Server Port
389
Static
TLS
LDAP to ADS
(External
Authentication)
No
Admin Settings > Security > Global
Security > Authentication > Enable
Active Directory External
Authentication
No
443
Static
TLS
RealPresence
Resource
Management
(Provisioning,
Monitoring,
Softupdate)
No
Admin Settings > Servers >
Provisioning Service > Enable
Provisioning
No
443
Static
TLS
Microsoft
Exchange
Server
(Calendaring)
No
Admin Settings > Servers >
Calendaring Service > Enable
Calendaring Service
No
443
Static
TLS
Microsoft Skype
Address Book
No
Admin Settings > Servers > Directory
Servers > Server Type
No
514
Static
UDP
SYSLOG
No
Diagnostics > System > System Log
Settings > Enable Remote Logging
Yes - outgoing
port can be
specified in the
Remote Log
Server Address
field.
Diagnostics > System > System Log
Settings > Remote Log Server
Transport Protocol = UDP
Polycom, Inc.
270
Port Usage
Configuration
Outbound
Port
601
Type
Static
Protocol
TCP
Function
SYSLOG
On By
Default?
(Low
Security
Profile)
No
Enable/Disable?
Diagnostics > System > System Log
Settings > Enable Remote Logging
Diagnostics > System > System Log
Settings > Remote Log Server
Transport Protocol = TCP
Configurable
Port Number
Yes - outgoing
port can be
specified in the
Remote Log
Server Address
field.
1718
Static
UDP
H.225.0
Gatekeeper
Discovery
No
Admin Settings > Network > IP
Network > H.323 > Use Gatekeeper
= Auto
No
1719
Static
UDP
H.225.0 RAS
No
Admin Settings > Network > IP
Network > H.323 > Use Gatekeeper
Yes - outgoing
port can be
specified in the
Primary
Gatekeeper IP
Address field
1720
Static
TCP
H.225.0 Call
Signaling
Yes
Admin Settings > Network > IP
Network > H.323 > Enable IP H.323
No
3601
Static
TCP
GDS
No
Admin Settings > Servers > Directory
Servers > Server Type
No
5060
Static
UDP
TCP
SIP
Yes
Admin Settings > Network > IP
Network > SIP > Enable SIP
Yes - outgoing
port can be
specified in the
dial string
(user@domain:p
ort)
AND
Admin Setting > Network > IP
Network > SIP > Transport Protocol
= Auto, TCP, or UDP
Note that the
transport
protocol used
depends on
Admin Settings
> Network > IP
Network > SIP >
Transport
Protocol
5061
Static
TLS
SIP
Yes
Admin Settings > Network > IP
Network > SIP > Enable SIP
AND
Admin Setting > Network > IP
Network > SIP > Transport Protocol
= Auto or TLS
Polycom, Inc.
Yes - outgoing
port can be
specified in the
dial string
(user@domain:p
ort)
271
Port Usage
Configuration
Outbound
Port
Type
Protocol
Function
On By
Default?
(Low
Security
Profile)
Enable/Disable?
Configurable
Port Number
5222
Static
TCP
RealPresence
Resource
Manager: XMPP
No
Provisioned by RealPresence
Resource Manager
No
6514
Static
TLS
SYSLOG
No
Diagnostics > System > System Log
Settings > Enable Remote Logging
Yes - outgoing
port can be
specified in the
Remote Log
Server Address
field
Diagnostics > System > System Log
Settings > Remote Log Server
Transport Protocol = TLS
4915265535
Dynam
ic
TCP
H.245
Yes
Admin Settings > Network > IP
Network > Enable IP H.323
Admin Settings
> Network > IP
Network >
Firewall > Fixed
Ports > TCP
Ports
(1024-65535)
1638432764
(Default)
Dynam
ic
UDP
RTP/RTCP
Video and Audio
Yes
Admin Settings > Network > IP
Network > Enable IP H.323
Admin Settings
> Network > IP
Network >
Firewall > Fixed
Ports > UDP
Ports
(1024-65535)
Polycom, Inc.
Admin Settings > Network > IP
Network > Enable SIP
272
Security Profile Default Settings
RealPresence Group system security profiles provide varying levels of secure access to your system. The
default settings security profile type vary. See these tables for detailed information on security profile
defaults:
● Maximum Security Profile Default Settings
● High Security Profile Default Settings
● Medium Security Profile Default Settings
● Low Security Profile Default Settings
To learn how to enable a security profile, refer to Configure Security Profiles .
Maximum Security Profile Default Settings
The following table shows the default values for specific settings when you use the Maximum security
profile.
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Configurable?
Contacts
Search Box
No value
Yes
Edit
Search Box
No value
Yes
Entry box
No value
Yes
Video
Audio
Video
Yes
Place a Call
Speed Dial
Manual Dial
Polycom, Inc.
273
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Configurable?
Auto
128
256
384
512
768
1024
1472
1920
2048
3072
3840
4096
6144
Auto
Yes
Auto
H.323
SIP
Auto
Yes
Auto Answer Point to
Point Video
Yes
No
Do Not Disturb
No
Yes
Auto Answer Multipoint
Video
Yes
No
Do Not Disturb
No
Yes
Call Detail Report
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Enable Recent Calls
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Speed Dial
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Calendar
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Background
Choose image file
No file selected
Yes
Startup Background
Choose image file
No file selected
Yes
Kiosk Mode
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Home Screen Icons
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
General Settings
System Settings
Call Settings
Recent Calls
Home Screen Settings
Polycom, Inc.
274
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Configurable?
Address Bar
None
IP Address
SIP Address
H.323 Extension
Pairing Code
None
Yes, for both the
left and right
elements
RealPresence Touch
Background
Choose image file
No file selected
Yes
Skype Mode
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
SmartPairing
Disabled
Disabled
Read-only
RS-2
32
Mode
Off
Control
Camera Control
Closed Caption
Pass Thru
Off
Yes
Login Mode
Range: None,
Admin password
only,
Username/Passw
ord
Admin password
only
Yes
Login prompt type
None
Admin password
only
Username/
Password
Username/
Password
Yes
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Pairing
Enable Polycom Touch
Device
Note: Disabling this setting
closes the SSH port.
Serial Ports
Mode
Note: Some
RealPresence
Group
systems
support only a
subset of
listed modes.
Network
IP Network
Enable SIP
Polycom, Inc.
275
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Configurable?
Auto
TLS
TCP
UDP
TLS
Yes
Scalable Video Coding
Preference (H.264)
SVC then AVC
AVC Only
SVC then AVC
Yes
Enable H.239
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Enable Audio-Only
Calls
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
TIP
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Call Type Order
Video
Video Then Phone
Phone Then Video
VOICEDIALPREF
ERENCE_SIP_SP
EAKERPHONE
(only displays if
Polycom
SoundStation IP
7000 is
connected)
Video
Yes
Video Dialing Order
IP H.323
SIP
IP H.323
Yes
Audio Dialing Order
Preference 1 (only
displays if Enable
Audio-Only Calls
checkbox is selected)
IP H.323
SIP
SIP
Yes
Audio Dialing Order
Preference 2 (only
displays if Enable
Audio-Only Calls
checkbox is selected)
IP H.323
SIP
H.323
Yes
Enable Mic Mute in
Sleep Mode
Checkbox
Enabled
Read-only
Transport Protocol
Dialing Preference
Dialing Options
Audio/Video
Sleep
Polycom, Inc.
276
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Configurable?
Video Inputs
General Camera Settings
Allow Other
Participants In
a Call to
Control Your
Camera
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Enable
People+Cont
ent IP
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Enable
Camera
Preset
Snapshot
Icons
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Maximum
High
Medium
Low
Maximum
Yes
Enable Active
Directory
External
Authentication
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Enable
Network
Intrusion
Detection
System
(NIDS)
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Enable Web
Access
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Audio
Polycom
StereoSurround
Security
Global Security
Security Profile
Security
Profile
Authentication
Access
Polycom, Inc.
277
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Configurable?
Allow Access
to User
Settings
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Restrict to
HTTPS
Checkbox
Enabled
Read-only
Web access
port (http)
Note: You
cannot select
this setting if
the Restrict
to HTTPS
setting is
enabled.
16-bit integer
Grayed out (80)
Read-only
Enable Telnet
Access
Checkbox
Disabled
Read-only
Enable SNMP
Access
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Enable SSH
Access
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Lock Port
after Failed
Logins
Off,2-10
Off
Yes
Port Lock
Duration
1,2,3,5,10,20,30
minutes,
1,2,4,8 hours
1 minute
Yes
Reset Port
Lock Counter
After
Off,[1..24] hours
Off
Yes
Enable
Whitelist
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Idle Session
Timeout in
Minutes
1,3,5,10,15,20,30,
45,60,120,240,48
0
10
Yes
Maximum
Number of
Active
Sessions
10,15,20,25,30,35
,40,45,50
25
Yes
API
Port
Polycom, Inc.
278
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Configurable?
Require AES
Encryption for
Calls
Off
When Available
Required for Video
Calls Only
Required for All
Calls
Required for Video
Calls Only
Yes
Require FIPS
140
Cryptography
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Lock Admin
Account After
Failed Logins
2-10
3
Yes
Admin
Account Lock
Duration
1,2,3,5 minutes
1
Yes
Reset Admin
Account Lock
Counter After
Off,[1..24] hours
1
Yes
Lock User
Account After
Failed Logins
2-10
3
Yes
User Account
Lock Duration
1,2,3,5,10,20,30
minutes,
1,2,4,8 hours
1 minute
Yes
Reset User
Account Lock
Counter After
Off,[1..24] hours
1
Yes
Use Room
Password for
Remote
Access
Checkbox
Enabled
Read-only
Require User
Login for
System
Access
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Encryption
Local Accounts
Account Lockout
Login Credentials
Polycom, Inc.
279
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Configurable?
Password Requirements
Admin (Room, Remote), User (Room, Remote)
Reject
Previous
Passwords
8-16
10
Yes
Minimum
Password
Age in Days
Off,1,5,10,15,20,3
0
Off
Yes
Maximum
Password
Age in Days
30,60,90,100,110,
120,130,140,150,
160,170,180
60
Yes
Minimum
Changed
Characters
1-4
4
Yes
Password
Expiration
Warning
1-7
7
Yes
Remote Access (Admin Remote, User Remote)
Polycom, Inc.
Minimum
Length
8-16,32
15
Yes
Require
Lowercase
Letters
Off,1,2,All
2
Yes
Require
Uppercase
Letters
Off,1,2,All
2
Yes
Require
Numbers
Off,1,2,All
2
Yes
Require
Special
Characters
Off,1,2,All
2
Yes
Maximum
Consecutive
Repeated
Characters
1-4
2
Yes
Can contain
ID or Its
Reverse Form
Checkbox
Disabled
Read-only
280
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Configurable?
User (Room), Admin (Room)
Minimum
Length
8-16,32
9
Yes
Require
Lowercase
Letters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require
Uppercase
Letters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require
Numbers
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require
Special
Characters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Maximum
Consecutive
Repeated
Characters
1-4
2
Yes
Can contain
ID or Its
Reverse Form
Checkbox
Disabled
Read-only
Minimum
Length
Off,1-20,32
Off
Yes
Require
Lowercase
Letters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require
Uppercase
Letters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require
Numbers
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require
Special
Characters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Reject
Previous
Passwords
8-16
10
Yes
Meeting
Polycom, Inc.
281
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Configurable?
Minimum
Password
Age in Days
Off,1,5,10,15,20,3
0
Off
Yes
Maximum
Consecutive
Repeated
Characters
1-4
2
Yes
SNMP
Note: SNMP passwords are applicable only when the system uses SNMP v3.
Minimum
Length
8-16,32
12
Yes
Require
Lowercase
Letters
Off,1,2,All
1
Yes
Require
Uppercase
Letters
Off,1,2,All
1
Yes
Require
Numbers
Off,1,2,All
1
Yes
Require
Special
Characters
Off,1,2,All
1
Yes
Reject
Previous
Passwords
8-16
10
Yes
Minimum
Password
Age in Days
Off,1,5,10,15,20,3
0
Off
Yes
Maximum
Consecutive
Repeated
Characters
1-4
2
Yes
Can contain
ID or Its
Reverse Form
Checkbox
Disabled
Read-only
Enable Security
Banner
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Banner Text
DoD
Custom
DoD
Yes
Security Banner
Polycom, Inc.
282
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Configurable?
Local System Banner
Text
Unicode
characters, 2048
bytes max
DoD Banner Text
Yes
Remote System
Banner Text
Unicode
characters, 2048
bytes max
DoD Banner Text
Yes
Always
Validate Peer
Certificates
from Browser
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Always
Validate Peer
Certificates
from Server
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Revocation
Method
OCSP
CRL
OCSP
Yes
Allow
Incomplete
Revocation
Checks
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Server Type
Off
Microsoft
LDAP
Polycom GDS
Off
Yes
Registration Status
N/A
Disabled
Read only
Version1
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Version2c
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Version3
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Certificates
Certificate Options
Revocation
Servers
Directory Servers
SNMP
Provisioning Service
Polycom, Inc.
283
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Configurable?
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Checkbox
DIsabled
Yes
Calendaring Service
Enable Calendaring
Service
Recording Service
Enable Recording
Service
Domain Name
User Name
Password
Server Address
Maximum
Range
Default
Value
Configurable?
Enable Remote Logging
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Remote Log Server Transport Protocol
UDP
TCP
TLS
TLS
Read only
Diagnostics Area
System
System Log Settings
Change Maximum Security Profile Default Values
When you configure the RealPresence Group system to use the Maximum Security Profile, the system forces you to
change the following settings from their default values:
● Admin account User Id
● User account User Id
● Admin room password
● Admin remote access password
● User room password
● User remote access password
Other Restrictions when Using the Maximum Security Profile
The following settings are not available in the “User Settings” menu (they are configurable only in their
respective sections of the Admin Settings):
● Camera > Allow Other Participants in a Call to Control Your Camera
Polycom, Inc.
284
Security Profile Default Settings
● Meetings > Mute Auto Answer Calls
● Meetings > Auto Answer Point-to-Point Video
● Meetings > Auto Answer Multipoint Video
● Meetings > Allow Video Display on Web
Polycom, Inc.
285
Security Profile Default Settings
High Security Profile Default Settings
The following table shows the default values for specific Admin settings when you use the High security
profile.
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Configurable?
Contacts
Search Box
No value
Yes
Edit
Search Box
No value
Yes
Entry box
No value
Yes
Video
Audio
Video
Yes
Auto
128
256
384
512
768
1024
1472
1920
2048
3072
3840
4096
6144
Auto
Yes
Auto
H.323
SIP
Auto
Yes
Auto Answer Point to Point
Video
Yes
No
Do Not Disturb
No
Yes
Auto Answer Multipoint
Video
Yes
No
Do Not Disturb
No
Yes
Place a Call
Speed Dial
Manual Dial
General Settings
System Settings
Call Settings
Polycom, Inc.
286
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Configurable?
Call Detail Report
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Enable Recent Calls
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Speed Dial
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Calendar
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Background
Choose image
file
No file selected
Yes
Startup Background
Choose image
file
No file selected
Yes
Kiosk Mode
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Home Screen Icons
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Address Bar
None
IP Address
SIP Address
H.323 Extension
Pairing Code
None
Yes, for both the
left and right
elements
RealPresence Touch
Background
Choose image
file
No file selected
Yes
Skype Mode
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Disabled
Automatic
Manual
Disabled
Yes
Off
Control
Camera Control
Closed Caption
Pass Thru
Off
Yes
Recent Calls
Home Screen Settings
Pairing
Enable Polycom Touch Device
Note: Disabling this setting closes
the SSH port.
SmartPairing Mode
Serial Ports
Mode
RS-232 Mode
Note: Some
RealPresence
Group systems
support only a
subset of listed
modes.
Polycom, Inc.
287
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Configurable?
Login Mode
None, Admin
password only,
Username/Pass
word
Admin password
only
Yes
Enable SIP
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Transport Protocol
Auto
TLS
TCP
UDP
TLS
Yes
SVC then AVC
AVC Only
AVC Only
Yes
Scalable Video Coding
Preference (H.264)
SVC then AVC
AVC Only
SVC then AVC
Yes
Enable H.239
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Enable Audio-Only Calls
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
TIP
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Call Type Order
Video
Video Then
Phone
Phone Then
Video
VOICEDIALPRE
FERENCE_SIP
_SPEAKERPHO
NE (only
displays if
Polycom
SoundStation IP
7000 is
connected)
Video
Yes
Video Dialing Order
IP H.323
SIP
IP H.323
Yes
Audio Dialing Order
Preference 1 (only displays if
Enable Audio-Only Calls
checkbox is selected)
IP H.323
SIP
SIP
Yes
Network
IP Network
Dialing Preference
Scalable Video Coding
Preference (H.264)
Dialing Options
Polycom, Inc.
288
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Configurable?
Audio Dialing Order
Preference 2 (only displays if
Enable Audio-Only Calls
checkbox is selected)
IP H.323
SIP
H.323
Yes
Enable Mic Mute in Sleep
Mode
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Allow Other
Participants In a
Call to Control Your
Camera
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Enable
People+Content IP
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Enable Camera
Preset Snapshot
Icons
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Polycom StereoSurround
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Maximum
High
Medium
Low
High
Yes
Enable Active
Directory External
Authentication
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Enable Network
Intrusion Detection
System (NIDS)
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Audio/Video
Sleep
Video Inputs
General Camera Settings
Audio
Security
Global Security
Security Profile
Security Profile
Authentication
Access
Polycom, Inc.
289
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Configurable?
Enable Web Access
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Allow Access to
User Settings
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Restrict to HTTPS
Checkbox
Enabled
Read-only
Web access port
(http)
Note: You cannot
select this setting if
the Restrict to
HTTPS setting is
enabled.
16-bit integer
Grayed out (80)
Read-only
Enable Telnet
Access
Checkbox
Disabled
Read-only
Enable SSH Access
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Enable SNMP
Access
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Lock Port after
Failed Logins
Off,2-10
Off
Yes
Port Lock Duration
1,2,3,5,10,20,30
minutes,
1,2,4,8 hours
1 minute
Yes
Reset Port Lock
Counter After
Off,[1..24] hours
Off
Yes
Enable Whitelist
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Idle Session
Timeout in Minutes
1,3,5,10,15,20,3
0,45,60,120,240
,480
10
Yes
Maximum Number
of Active Sessions
10,15,20,25,30,
35,40,45,50
25
Yes
Require AES
Encryption for Calls
Off
When Available
Required for
Video Calls Only
Required for All
Video Calls
Required for
Video Calls Only
Yes
Require FIPS 140
Cryptography
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Encryption
Polycom, Inc.
290
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Configurable?
Lock Admin
Account After
Failed Logins
Off
2-10
3
Yes
Admin Account
Lock Duration
1,2,3,5 minutes
1
Yes
Reset Admin
Account Lock
Counter After Failed
Logins
Off,[1..24] hours
Off
Yes
Lock User Account
After Failed Logins
2-10
3
Yes
User Account Lock
Duration
1,3,5,10,15,20,3
0 minutes,
1,2,4,8 hours
1 minute
Yes
Reset User Account
Lock Counter After
Failed Logins
Off,[1..24] hours
Off
Yes
Use Room
Password for
Remote Access
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Require User Login
for System Access
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Local Accounts
Account Lockout
Login Credentials
Password Requirements
Admin (Room, Remote), User (Room, Remote)
Polycom, Inc.
Reject Previous
Passwords
Off,1-16
10
Yes
Minimum Password
Age in Days
Off,1,5,10,15,20,
30
Off
Yes
Maximum
Password Age in
Days
Off,30,60,90,100
,
110,120,130,140
,
150,160,170,18
0
90
Yes
Minimum Changed
Characters
1-4
4
Yes
291
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Password
Expiration Warning
Range
Default Value
Configurable?
1-7
4
Yes
Remote Access (Admin Remote, User Remote)
Minimum Length
1-16,32
6
Yes
Require Lowercase
Letters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require Uppercase
Letters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require Numbers
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require Special
Characters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Maximum
Consecutive
Repeated
Characters
Off,1-4
Off
Yes
Can contain ID or
Its Reverse Form
Checkbox
Disabled
Read-only
User (Room), Admin (Room)
Minimum Length
8-16,32
6
Yes
Require Lowercase
Letters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require Uppercase
Letters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require Numbers
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require Special
Characters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Maximum
Consecutive
Repeated
Characters
Off,1-4
Off
Yes
Can contain ID or
Its Reverse Form
Checkbox
Disabled
Read-only
Minimum Length
Off,1-20,32
Off
Yes
Require Lowercase
Letters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Meeting
Polycom, Inc.
292
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Configurable?
Require Uppercase
Letters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require Numbers
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require Special
Characters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Reject Previous
Passwords
Off,1-16
10
Yes
Minimum Password
Age in Days
Off,1,5,10,15,20,
30
Off
Yes
Maximum
Consecutive
Repeated
Characters
Off,1-4
Off
Yes
SNMP
Note: SNMP passwords are applicable only when the system uses SNMP v3.
Polycom, Inc.
Minimum Length
8-16,32
8
Yes
Require Lowercase
Letters
Off,1,2,All
1
Yes
Require Uppercase
Letters
Off,1,2,All
1
Yes
Require Numbers
Off,1,2,All
1
Yes
Require Special
Characters
Off,1,2,All
1
Yes
Reject Previous
Passwords
Off,1-16
5
Yes
Minimum Password
Age in Days
Off,1,5,10,15,20,
30
Off
Yes
Maximum
Consecutive
Repeated
Characters
Off,1-4
Off
Yes
Can contain ID or
Its Reverse Form
Checkbox
Disabled
Read-only
293
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Configurable?
Always Validate
Peer Certificates
from Browser
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Always Validate
Peer Certificates
from Server
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Revocation Method
OCSP
CRL
OCSP
Yes
Allow Incomplete
Revocation Checks
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Enable Security Banner
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Banner Text
DoD
Custom
Custom
Yes
Local System Banner Text
Unicode
characters, 2048
bytes max
Null
(no text)
Yes
Remote System Banner Text
Unicode
characters, 2048
bytes max
Null
(no text)
Yes
Server Type
Off
Microsoft
LDAP
Polycom GDS
Off
Yes
Registration Status
N/A
Disabled
Read only
Version1
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Version2c
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Version3
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Certificates
Certificate Options
Revocation
Security Banner
Servers
Directory Servers
SNMP
Provisioning Service
Polycom, Inc.
294
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Configurable?
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Checkbox
DIsabled
Yes
Calendaring Service
Enable Calendaring Service
Recording Service
Enable Recording Service
Domain Name
User Name
Password
Server Address
High
Diagnostics Area
Range
Default
Value
Configurable?
Enable Remote Logging
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Remote Log Server Transport Protocol
UDP
TCP
TLS
UDP
Yes
System
System Log Settings
Change High Security Profile Default Values
When you configure the RealPresence Group system to use the High Security Profile, the system forces you to
change the following settings from their default values:
● Admin account room password
● User account room password
● Admin account remote access password
Polycom, Inc.
295
Security Profile Default Settings
Medium Security Profile Default Settings
The following table shows the default values for specific Admin settings when you use the Medium security
profile.
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Configurable?
Contacts
Search Box
No value
Yes
Edit
Search Box
No value
Yes
Entry box
No value
Yes
Video
Audio
Video
Yes
Auto
128
256
384
512
768
1024
1472
1920
2048
3072
3840
4096
6144
Auto
Yes
Auto
H.323
SIP
Auto
Yes
Auto Answer Point to Point
Video
Yes
No
Do Not Disturb
No
Yes
Auto Answer Multipoint Video
Yes
No
Do Not Disturb
No
Yes
Place a Call
Speed Dial
Manual Dial
General Settings
System Settings
Call Settings
Polycom, Inc.
296
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Configurable?
Call Detail Report
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Enable Recent Calls
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Speed Dial
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Calendar
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Background
Choose image
file
No file selected
Yes
Startup Background
Choose image
file
No file selected
Yes
Kiosk Mode
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Home Screen Icons
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Address Bar
None
IP Address
SIP Address
H.323
Extension
Pairing Code
None
Yes, for both
the left and right
elements
RealPresence Touch
Background
Choose image
file
No file selected
Yes
Skype Mode
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Enable Polycom Touch Device
Note: Disabling this setting closes the
SSH port.
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
SmartPairing Mode
Disabled
Automatic
Manual
Disabled
Yes
Off
Control
Camera Control
Closed Caption
Pass Thru
Off
Yes
Recent Calls
Home Screen Settings
Pairing
Serial Ports
Mode
RS-232 Mode
Note: Some
RealPresence Group
systems support only
a subset of listed
modes.
Polycom, Inc.
297
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Configurable?
Login Mode
Range: None,
Admin
password only,
Username/Pas
sword
Admin
password only
Yes
Enable SIP
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Transport Protocol
Auto
TLS
TCP
UDP
TLS
Yes
SVC then AVC
AVC Only
SVC then AVC
Yes
Scalable Video Coding
Preference (H.264)
SVC then AVC
AVC Only
SVC then AVC
Yes
Enable H.239
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Enable Audio-Only Calls
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
TIP
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Call Type Order
Video
Video Then
Phone
Phone Then
Video
VOICEDIALPR
EFERENCE_SI
P_SPEAKERP
HONE (only
displays if
Polycom
SoundStation
IP 7000 is
connected)
Video
Yes
Video Dialing Order
IP H.323
SIP
IP H.323
Yes
Network
IP Network
Dialing Preference
Scalable Video Coding
Preference (H.264)
Dialing Options
Polycom, Inc.
298
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Configurable?
Audio Dialing Order
Preference 1 (only displays if
Enable Audio-Only Calls
checkbox is selected)
IP H.323
SIP
SIP
Yes
Audio Dialing Order
Preference 2 (only displays if
Enable Audio-Only Calls
checkbox is selected)
IP H.323
SIP
H.323
Yes
Enable Mic Mute in Sleep
Mode
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Allow Other
Participants In a Call
to Control Your
Camera
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Enable
People+Content IP
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Enable Camera
Preset Snapshot
Icons
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Polycom StereoSurround
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Maximum
High
Medium
Low
Medium
Yes
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Audio/Video
Video Inputs
Sleep
General Camera Settings
Audio
Security
Global Security
Security Profile
Security Profile
Authentication
Enable Active
Directory External
Authentication
Polycom, Inc.
299
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Configurable?
Enable Network
Intrusion Detection
System (NIDS)
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Enable Web Access
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Allow Access to User
Settings
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Restrict to HTTPS
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Web access port
(http)
Note: You cannot
select this setting if
the Restrict to
HTTPS setting is
enabled.
16-bit integer
Grayed out (80)
Read only
Enable Telnet Access
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Enable SSH Access
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Enable SNMP Access
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Lock Port after Failed
Logins
Off,2-10
Off
Yes
Port Lock Duration
1,2,3,5,10,20,3
0 minutes,
1,2,4,8 hours
1 minute
Yes
Reset Port Lock
Counter After
Off,[1..24]
hours
Off
Yes
Enable Whitelist
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Idle Session Timeout
in Minutes
1,3,5,10,15,20,
30,45,60,120,2
40,480
10,15,20,25,30,
35,40,45,50
Yes
Maximum Number of
Active Sessions
10,15,20,25,30,
35,40,45,50
25
Yes
Access
Polycom, Inc.
300
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Configurable?
Require AES
Encryption for Calls
Off
When Available
Required for
Video Calls
Only
Required for All
Video Calls
When Available
Yes
Require FIPS 140
Cryptography
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Lock Admin Account
After Failed Logins
Off,2-10
3
Yes
Admin Account Lock
Duration
1,2,3,5 minutes
1
Yes
Reset Admin Account
Lock Counter After
Off,[1..24]
hours
Off
Yes
Lock User Account
After Failed Logins
Off,2-10
3
Yes
User Account Lock
Duration
1,2,3,5,10,20,3
0 minutes,
1,2,4,8 hours
1 minute
Yes
Reset User Account
Lock Counter After
Off,[1..24]
hours
Off
Yes
Use Room Password
for Remote Access
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Require User Login
for System Access
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Encryption
Local Accounts
Account Lockout
Login Credentials
Password Requirements
Admin (Room, Remote), User (Room, Remote)
Polycom, Inc.
Reject Previous
Passwords
Off,1-16
Off
Yes
Minimum Password
Age in Days
Off,1,5,10,15,2
0,30
Off
Yes
301
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Configurable?
Maximum Password
Age in Days
Off,30,60,90,10
0,110,
120,130,140,15
0,160,
170,180
Off
Yes
Minimum Changed
Characters
Off,1-4,All
Off
Yes
Password Expiration
Warning
Off,1-7
Off
Yes
Remote Access (Admin Remote, User Remote)
Minimum Length
1-16,32
3
Yes
Require Lowercase
Letters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require Uppercase
Letters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require Numbers
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require Special
Characters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Maximum
Consecutive
Repeated Characters
Off,1-4
Off
Yes
Can contain ID or Its
Reverse Form
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
User (Room), Admin (Room)
Polycom, Inc.
Minimum Length
8-16,32
8
Yes
Require Lowercase
Letters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require Uppercase
Letters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require Numbers
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require Special
Characters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Maximum
Consecutive
Repeated Characters
Off,1-4
Off
Yes
Can contain ID or Its
Reverse Form
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
302
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Configurable?
Minimum Length
Off,1-20,32
Off
Yes
Require Lowercase
Letters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require Uppercase
Letters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require Numbers
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require Special
Characters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Reject Previous
Passwords
Off,1-16
Off
Yes
Minimum Password
Age in Days
Off,1,5,10,15,2
0,30
Off
Yes
Maximum
Consecutive
Repeated Characters
Off,1-4
Off
Yes
Meeting
SNMP
Note: SNMP passwords are applicable only when the system uses SNMP v3.
Polycom, Inc.
Minimum Length
8-16,32
3
Yes
Require Lowercase
Letters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require Uppercase
Letters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require Numbers
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require Special
Characters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Reject Previous
Passwords
Off,1-16
Off
Yes
Minimum Password
Age in Days
Off,1,5,10,15,2
0,30
Off
Yes
Maximum
Consecutive
Repeated Characters
Off,1-4
Off
Yes
Can contain ID or Its
Reverse Form
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
303
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Configurable?
Always Validate Peer
Certificates from
Browser
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Always Validate Peer
Certificates from
Server
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Revocation Method
OCSP
CRL
OCSP
Yes
Allow Incomplete
Revocation Checks
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Enable Security Banner
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Banner Text
DoD
Custom
Custom
Yes
Local System Banner Text
Unicode
characters,
2048 bytes max
Null
(no text)
Yes
Remote System Banner Text
Unicode
characters,
2048 bytes max
Null
(no text)
Yes
Off
Microsoft
LDAP
Polycom GDS
Off
Yes
Certificates
Certificate Options
Revocation
Security Banner
Servers
Directory Servers
Server Type
Polycom, Inc.
304
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Configurable?
Registration Status
N/A
Disabled
Read only
Version1
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Version2c
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Version3
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Checkbox
DIsabled
Yes
SNMP
Calendaring Service
Enable Calendaring Service
Recording Service
Enable Recording Service
Recording
Service
Domain Name
User Name
Password
Server Address
Medium
Diagnostics Area
Range
Default
Value
Configurable?
Enable Remote Logging
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Remote Log Server Transport Protocol
UDP
TCP
TLS
UDP
Read only
System
System Log Settings
Change Medium Security Profile Default Values
When you configure the RealPresence Group system to use the High Security Profile, the system forces you to
change the following settings from their default values:
● Admin account room password
● User account room password
Polycom, Inc.
305
Security Profile Default Settings
Low Security Profile Default Settings
The following table shows the default values for specific Admin settings when you use the Low security
profile.
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Contacts
Search Box
No value
Edit
Search Box
No value
Entry box
No value
Video
Audio
Video
Auto
128
256
384
512
768
1024
1472
1920
2048
3072
3840
4096
6144
Auto
Auto
H.323
SIP
Auto
Place a Call
Speed Dial
Manual Dial
General Settings
System
Settings
Call Settings
Polycom, Inc.
Auto Answer Point to
Point Video
Yes
No
Do Not Disturb
No
Yes
Auto Answer Multipoint
Video
Yes
No
Do Not Disturb
No
Yes
306
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Recent Calls
Call Detail Report
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Enable Recent Calls
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Calendar
Checkbox
Disabled
Background
Choose image file
No file selected
Startup Background
Choose image file
No file selected
Kiosk Mode
Checkbox
Disabled
Home Screen Icons
Checkbox
Disabled
Address Bar
None
IP Address
SIP Address
H.323 Extension
Pairing Code
None
RealPresence Touch Background
Image file not
selected
Yes
Skype Mode
Checkbox
Disabled
Enable Polycom Touch Device
Note: Disabling this setting closes the SSH
port.
Checkbox
Disabled
SmartPairing Mode
Disabled
Automatic
Manual
Disabled
Yes
Off
Control
Camera Control
Closed Caption
Pass Thru
Control
Yes
Home Screen Settings
Speed Dial
Pairing
Serial Ports
Mode
RS-232 Mode
Note: Some
RealPresence
Group
systems
support only a
subset of
listed modes.
Polycom, Inc.
307
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Network
IP Network
Enable SIP
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Transport Protocol
Auto
TLS
TCP
UDP
Auto
Yes
SVC then AVC
AVC Only
AVC Only
Yes
Scalable Video Coding Preference
(H.264)
SVC then AVC
AVC Only
SVC then AVC
Enable H.239
Checkbox
Disabled
Enable Audio-Only Calls
Checkbox
Disabled
TIP
Checkbox
Disabled
Call Type Order
Video
Video Then Phone
Phone Then Video
VOICEDIALPREFER
ENCE_SIP_SPEAKE
RPHONE (only
displays if Polycom
SoundStation IP
7000 is connected)
Video
Video Dialing Order
IP H.323
SIP
IP H.323
Audio Dialing Order Preference 1 (only
displays if Enable Audio-Only Calls
checkbox is selected)
IP H.323
SIP
SIP
Audio Dialing Order Preference 2 (only
displays if Enable Audio-Only Calls
checkbox is selected)
IP H.323
SIP
H.323
Dialing Preference
Scalable Video Coding
Preference (H.264)
Dialing Options
Audio/Video
Video Inputs
Polycom, Inc.
308
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
General Camera Settings
Allow Other
Participants In
a Call to
Control Your
Camera
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Enable
People+Cont
ent IP
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Enable
Camera
Preset
Snapshot
Icons
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Checkbox
Disabled
Maximum
High
Medium
Low
Low
Yes
Enable Active
Directory
External
Authentication
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Enable
Network
Intrusion
Detection
System
(NIDS)
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Enable Web
Access
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Audio
Polycom StereoSurround
Security
Global Security
Security Profile
Security
Profile
Authentication
Access
Polycom, Inc.
309
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Polycom, Inc.
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Allow Access
to User
Settings
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Restrict to
HTTPS
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Web access
port (http)
Note: You
cannot select
this setting if
the Restrict
to HTTPS
setting is
enabled.
16-bit integer
Grayed out (80)
Yes
Enable Telnet
Access
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Enable SSH
Access
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Enable SNMP
Access
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Lock Port
after Failed
Logins
Off,2-10
Off
Yes
Port Lock
Duration
1,2,3,5,10,20,30
minutes,
1,2,4,8 hours
1 minute
Yes
Reset Port
Lock Counter
After
Off,[1..24] hours
Off
Yes
Enable
Whitelist
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Idle Session
Timeout in
Minutes
1,3,5,10,15,20,30,45,
60,120,240,480
10
Yes
Maximum
Number of
Active
Sessions
10,15,20,25,30,35,40
,45,50
25
Yes
310
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Encryption
Require AES
Encryption for
Calls
Off
When Available
Required for Video
Calls Only
Required for All
Video Calls
When Available
Yes
Require FIPS
140
Cryptography
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Lock Admin
Account After
Failed Logins
Off,2-10
Off
Yes
Admin
Account Lock
Duration
1,2,3,5 minutes
1
Yes
Reset Admin
Account Lock
Counter After
Off,[1..24] hours
Off
Yes
Lock User
Account After
Failed Logins
Off,2-10
Off
Yes
User Account
Lock Duration
1,2,3,5,10,20,30
minutes,
1,2,4,8 hours
1 minute
Yes
Reset User
Account Lock
Counter After
Off,[1..24] hours
Off
Yes
Use Room
Password for
Remote
Access
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Require User
Login for
System
Access
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Local Accounts
Account Lockout
Login Credentials
Polycom, Inc.
311
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Password Requirements
Admin (Room, Remote), User (Room, Remote)
Reject
Previous
Passwords
Off,1-16
Off
Yes
Minimum
Password
Age in Days
Off,1,5,10,15,20,30
Off
Yes
Maximum
Password
Age in Days
Off,30,60,90,100,110,
120,130,140,150,160
,170,180
Off
Yes
Minimum
Changed
Characters
Off,1-4,All
Off
Yes
Password
Expiration
Warning
Off,1-7
Off
Yes
Remote Access (Admin Remote, User Remote)
Polycom, Inc.
Minimum
Length
Off,1-16,32
Off
Yes
Require
Lowercase
Letters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require
Uppercase
Letters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require
Numbers
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require
Special
Characters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Maximum
Consecutive
Repeated
Characters
Off,1-4
Off
Yes
Can contain
ID or Its
Reverse Form
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
312
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
User (Room), Admin (Room)
Minimum
Length
Off,1-16,32
Off
Yes
Require
Lowercase
Letters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require
Uppercase
Letters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require
Numbers
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require
Special
Characters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Maximum
Consecutive
Repeated
Characters
Off,1-4
Off
Yes
Can contain
ID or Its
Reverse Form
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Minimum
Length
Off,1-20,32
Off
Yes
Require
Lowercase
Letters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require
Uppercase
Letters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require
Numbers
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require
Special
Characters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Reject
Previous
Passwords
Off,1-16
Off
Yes
Meeting
Polycom, Inc.
313
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Minimum
Password
Age in Days
Off,1,5,10,15,20,30
Off
Yes
Maximum
Consecutive
Repeated
Characters
Off,1-4
Off
Yes
SNMP
Note: SNMP passwords are applicable only when the system uses SNMP v3.
Polycom, Inc.
Minimum
Length
8-16,32
8
Yes
Require
Lowercase
Letters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require
Uppercase
Letters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require
Numbers
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Require
Special
Characters
Off,1,2,All
Off
Yes
Reject
Previous
Passwords
Off,1-16
Off
Yes
Minimum
Password
Age in Days
Off,1,5,10,15,20,30
Off
Yes
Maximum
Consecutive
Repeated
Characters
Off,1-4
Off
Yes
Can contain
ID or Its
Reverse Form
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
314
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Range
Default Value
Certificates
Certificate Options
Always
Validate Peer
Certificates
from Browser
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Always
Validate Peer
Certificates
from Server
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Revocation
Method
OCSP
CRL
OCSP
Yes
Allow
Incomplete
Revocation
Checks
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Enable Security
Banner
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Banner Text
DoD
Custom
Custom
Yes
Local System Banner
Text
Unicode characters,
2048 bytes max
Null
(no text)
Yes
Remote System
Banner Text
Unicode characters,
2048 bytes max
Null
(no text)
Yes
Off
Microsoft
LDAP
Polycom GDS
Off
Revocation
Security Banner
Servers
Directory Servers
Server Type
Polycom, Inc.
315
Security Profile Default Settings
Admin Settings Area
Maximum
Registration Status
Range
Default Value
N/A
Read only
SNMP
Version1
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Version2c
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Version3
Checkbox
Enabled
Yes
Checkbox
Checkbox
Disabled
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Checkbox - Disabled
Yes
Provisioning Service
Calendaring Service
Enable Calendaring
Service
Recording Service
Enable Recording Service
Recording Service
Domain Name
User Name
Password
Server Address
Low
Diagnostics Area
Range
Default
Value
Configurable?
Enable Remote Logging
Checkbox
Disabled
Yes
Remote Log Server Transport Protocol
UDP
TCP
TLS
UDP
Yes
System
System Log Settings
Polycom, Inc.
316
Call Speeds and Resolutions
See the following topics to learn about maximum call speeds and resolutions for different call types:
● Point-to-Point Call Speeds
● Multipoint Call Speeds
● High-Profile Call Speeds and Resolutions
● Multipoint Resolutions for High Definition Video
● Resolution and Frame Rates for Content Video
Point-to-Point Call Speeds
The following table shows the maximum allowable H.323/SIP point-to-point call speeds for each type of
RealPresence Group system:
System
Maximum Call Speed
RealPresence Group 300
3072 kbps
RealPresence Group 310
3072 kbps
RealPresence Group 500
6144 kbps
RealPresence Group 700
6144 kbps
Multipoint Call Speeds
The following table shows the maximum allowable H.323/SIP call speeds for the number of sites in a call.
Maximum speeds can be further limited by the communications equipment. Multipoint option keys are
required for some of the capabilities shown in the table. RealPresence Group 300 and 310 systems do not
support multipoint calling.
Number of Sites in Call
Max Speed for
Each Site
Max Speed for Each Site (ICE
Enabled, Skype for Business
2015
Max Speed for Each Site
(CCCP Skype for Business
2015 with A/V MCU)
3
3072 kbps
1024 kbps
664 kbps
4
2048 kbps
512 kbps
664 kbps
5
1536 kbps
384 kbps
664 kbps
6
1152 kbps
256 kbps
664 kbps
Polycom, Inc.
317
Call Speeds and Resolutions
Max Speed for
Each Site
Max Speed for Each Site (ICE
Enabled, Skype for Business
2015
Max Speed for Each Site
(CCCP Skype for Business
2015 with A/V MCU)
7 (RealPresence
Group 700 only)
1024 kbps
128 kbps
664 kbps
8 (RealPresence
Group 700 only)
832 kbps
128 kbps
664 kbps
Number of Sites in Call
These values do not apply when the Microsoft Skype Interoperability option is enabled, whether it is in a
Skype for Business 2015 environment. When this option key is enabled, all calls are CCCP calls and are
capped at 1920 kbps due to ICE restrictions.
The values in the Max Speed for Each Site (ICE Enabled, Skype for Business 2015) column are applicable
only when both of the following criteria are met:
● The Skype Interoperability option key is disabled, so that calls are negotiated with H.263 using Skype
for Business 2015 clients.
● The ICE calls go across the firewall boundary.
High-Profile Call Speeds and Resolutions
This section includes the H.264 high-profile resolutions and frame rates sent in calls between two
RealPresence Group systems. Resolutions and frame rates are based on both the call speed and the
Optimized for setting of your Camera input.
Due to the complexities of the systems and their capabilities, it is not possible to include tables of the resolutions and
frame rates for calls between a RealPresence Group system and a different type of endpoint or a multipoint resource.
The systems attempt to provide the highest resolutions and the best frame rates in all types of calls.
The values for sharpness and motion are the same from 2 MB to 6 MB for systems that support higher call
speeds. The difference between NTSC and PAL cameras is how frame rates are calculated:
● NTSC 60 fps equals PAL 50 fps
● NTSC 30 fps equals PAL 25 fps
The following table shows the resolutions for People video on systems with NTSC cameras in H.264
high-profile calls. The actual resolutions and frame rates might vary and depend upon the call types and call
scenarios in your environment.
Call Speeds and Resolutions in High-Profile Calls
Camera Source
HD (1280x720x60)
HD (1920x1080x60)
Call Speed (kbps)
Motion/
Sharpness
Resolution
Max Frame
Rate (fps)
Resolution
Max Frame
Rate (fps)
<160
Motion
512x288
60
512x288
60
160-511
Motion
640x368
60
640x368
60
512-831
Motion
848x480
60
848x480
60
Polycom, Inc.
318
Call Speeds and Resolutions
Call Speeds and Resolutions in High-Profile Calls
Camera Source
HD (1280x720x60)
HD (1920x1080x60)
Call Speed (kbps)
Motion/
Sharpness
Resolution
Max Frame
Rate (fps)
Resolution
Max Frame
Rate (fps)
832-895
Motion
1024x576
60
720x832
60
896-1727
Motion
1280x720
60
1280x720
60
>=1728
Motion
1280x720
60
1920x1080
60
<128
Sharpness
640x368
30
640x368
30
128-511
Sharpness
1024x576
30
1024x576
30
512-1023
Sharpness
1280x720
30
1280x720
30
>=1024
Sharpness
1280x720
30
1920x1080
30
The following table shows the resolutions for People video on systems with NTSC EagleEye Acoustic
cameras in H.264 high-profile calls.
Call Speeds and Resolutions in High-Profile Calls for EagleEye Acoustic
Camera Source
HD (1920x1080x30)
Call Speed (kbps)
Motion/
Sharpness
Resolution
Max Frame Rate (fps)
<128
Motion/Sharpness
640x368
30
128-511
Motion/Sharpness
1024x576
30
512-1023
Motion/Sharpness
1280x720
30
>=1024
Motion/Sharpness
1920x1080
30
Multipoint Resolutions for High Definition Video
Polycom offers enhanced high definition (HD) multipoint resolutions, maximizing video quality in multipoint
conferences. This feature increases the maximum transmitting and receiving video resolutions in multipoint
video conferences. During a multipoint video conference, if any endpoints in the video conference do not
support high resolution video and transmit lower resolution video, all endpoints receive lower resolution
video.
The maximum Multipoint Control Unit (MCU) transmitting and receiving resolutions are specified in the
following table. Note that changing from discussion to speaker does not alter the transmit of 960x540 from
an endpoint and the receive of 1080p from the endpoints.
Polycom, Inc.
319
Call Speeds and Resolutions
RealPresence Group 500 systems support one endpoint as a host system and up to 5 other endpoints in a 6-way
multipoint conference; RealPresence Group 700 systems support one endpoint as a host system and up to 7 other
endpoints in an 8-way multipoint conference.
Number of Endpoints in the Video Conference
Maximum Transmitting
Resolutions
Maximum Receiving
Resolutions
2-4 endpoints
1080p, 30fps
960x540p, 30fps
5-8 endpoints
720p, 30fps
640x368p, 30fps
Resolution and Frame Rates for Content Video
The high frame rates with high resolution apply only to point-to-point calls above 832 kbps. In addition, you
must set Optimized for value of your Camera input to Sharpness. Low frame rates apply if your call does
not meet these requirements.
For multipoint calls, the maximum resolution and frame rate for content is 720p @ 30 fps.
Resolution
Encode
Resolution
Sharpness
Motion
800 x 600
800 x 600
30
60
1024 x 768
1024 x 768
30
60
1280 x 720
1280 x 720
30
60
1280 x 768
1280 x 720
30
60
1280 x 1024
1280 x 1024
30
60
1600 x 1200
1280 x 1024
30
60
1680 x 1050
1280 x 720
30
60
1920 x 1080
1920 x 1080
30
60*
*Available only when the Quality Preference setting on your RealPresence Group 310 or RealPresence
Group 500 system is set to Content in Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > Network Quality.
Polycom, Inc.
320
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising